SlideShare a Scribd company logo
Chapter 1-17
Operations Management

Roberta Russell & Bernard W. Taylor, III
Organization of This Text:
Part I – Operations Management
Intro. to Operations and
Supply Chain Management:
Quality Management:
Statistical Quality Control:
Product Design:
Service Design:
Processes and Technology:
Facilities:
Human Resources:
Project Management:

Chapter 1 (Slide 5)
Chapter 2 (Slide 67)
Chapter 3 (Slide 120)
Chapter 4 (Slide 186)
Chapter 5 (Slide 231)
Chapter 6 (Slide 276)
Chapter 7 (Slide 321)
Chapter 8 (Slide 402)
Chapter 9 (Slide 450)
1 -2
Organization of This Text:
Part II – Supply Chain Management
Supply Chain
Strategy and Design:
Global Supply Chain
Procurement and Distribution:
Forecasting:
Inventory Management:
Sales and
Operations Planning:
Resource Planning:
Lean Systems:
Scheduling:

Chapter 10 (Slide 507)
Chapter 11 (Slide 534)
Chapter 12 (Slide 575)
Chapter 13 (Slide 641)
Chapter 14 (Slide 703)
Chapter 15 (Slide 767)
Chapter 16 (Slide 827)
Chapter 17 (Slide 878)
1 -3
Learning Objectives of
this Course
Gain an appreciation of strategic importance
of operations and supply chain management
in a global business environment
Understand how operations relates to other
business functions
Develop a working knowledge of concepts
and methods related to designing and
managing operations and supply chains
Develop a skill set for quality and process
improvement
1 -4
Chapter 1
Introduction to Operations and
Supply Chain Management
Operations Management
Roberta Russell & Bernard W. Taylor, III
Lecture Outline
What Operations and Supply Chain
Managers Do
Operations Function
Evolution of Operations and Supply Chain
Management
Globalization and Competitiveness
Operations
Strategy and Organization of the Text
Learning Objectives for This Course
1 -6
What Operations and
Supply Chain Managers Do
What is Operations Management?
design, operation, and improvement of productive
systems

What is Operations?
a function or system that transforms inputs into outputs of
greater value

What is a Transformation Process?
a series of activities along a value chain extending from
supplier to customer
activities that do not add value are superfluous and
should be eliminated

1 -7
Transformation Process
Physical: as in manufacturing operations
Locational: as in transportation or
warehouse operations
Exchange: as in retail operations
Physiological: as in health care
Psychological: as in entertainment
Informational: as in communication
1 -8
Operations as a
Transformation Process
INPUT
•Material
•Machines
•Labor
•Management
•Capital

TRANSFORMATION
PROCESS

OUTPUT
•Goods
•Services

Feedback & Requirements
1 -9
Operations Function
Operations
Marketing
Finance and
Accounting
Human
Resources
Outside
Suppliers
1-10
How is Operations Relevant to my
Major?
Accounting
Information
Technology
Management

“As an auditor you must
understand the fundamentals of
operations management.”
“IT is a tool, and there’s no better
place to apply it than in
operations.”
“We use so many things you
learn in an operations class—
class—
scheduling, lean production,
theory of constraints, and tons of
quality tools.”
1-11
How is Operations Relevant to my
Major? (cont.)
Economics
Marketing

Finance

“It’s all about processes. I live
by flowcharts and Pareto
analysis.”
“How can you do a good job
marketing a product if you’re
unsure of its quality or delivery
status?”
“Most of our capital budgeting
requests are from operations,
and most of our cost savings,
too.”
1-12
Evolution of Operations and
Supply Chain Management
Craft production
process of handcrafting products or
services for individual customers

Division of labor
dividing a job into a series of small tasks
each performed by a different worker

Interchangeable parts
standardization of parts initially as
replacement parts; enabled mass
production

1-13
Evolution of Operations and
Supply Chain Management (cont.)
Scientific management
systematic analysis of work methods

Mass production
highhigh-volume production of a standardized
product for a mass market

Lean production
adaptation of mass production that prizes
quality and flexibility
1-14
Historical Events in
Operations Management
Era
Industrial
Revolution

Events/Concepts

Dates

Originator

Steam engine
Division of labor
Interchangeable parts
Principles of scientific
management

1769
1776
1790

James Watt

1911

Frederick W. Taylor

Time and motion studies
Scientific
Management Activity scheduling chart
Moving assembly line

1911
1912
1913

Adam Smith
Eli Whitney

Frank and Lillian
Gilbreth
Henry Gantt
Henry Ford

1-15
Historical Events in
Operations Management (cont.)
Era

Operations
Research

Dates

Originator

Hawthorne studies
Human
Relations

Events/Concepts

1930
1940s
1950s
1960s
1947
1951

Elton Mayo
Abraham Maslow
Frederick Herzberg
Douglas McGregor
George Dantzig
Remington Rand

1950s

Operations research
groups

1960s,
1970s

Joseph Orlicky, IBM
and others

Motivation theories
Linear programming
Digital computer
Simulation, waiting
line theory, decision
theory, PERT/CPM
MRP, EDI, EFT, CIM

1-16
Historical Events in
Operations Management (cont.)
Era

Events/Concepts Dates Originator

JIT (just-in-time)
TQM (total quality
management)
Strategy and
Quality
Revolution operations
Business process
reengineering
Six Sigma

1970s
1980s
1980s
1990s
1990s

Taiichi Ohno (Toyota)
W. Edwards Deming,
Joseph Juran
Wickham Skinner,
Robert Hayes
Michael Hammer,
James Champy
GE, Motorola

1-17
Historical Events in
Operations Management (cont.)
Era

Events/Concepts

Internet
Revolution

Internet, WWW, ERP,
1990s
supply chain management

E-commerce

Dates Originator

2000s

Globalization WTO, European Union,
1990s
and other trade
2000s
agreements, global supply
chains, outsourcing, BPO,
Services Science

ARPANET, Tim
Berners-Lee SAP,
i2 Technologies,
ORACLE
Amazon, Yahoo,
eBay, Google, and
others
Numerous countries
and companies

1-18
Evolution of Operations and
Supply Chain Management (cont.)
Supply chain management
management of the flow of information, products, and services across
a network of customers, enterprises, and supply chain partners

1-19
Globalization and
Competitiveness
Why “go global”?
favorable cost
access to international markets
response to changes in demand
reliable sources of supply
latest trends and technologies

Increased globalization
results from the Internet and falling trade
barriers
1-20
Globalization and
Competitiveness (cont.)

Hourly Compensation Costs for Production Workers
Source: U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics, 2005.
1-21
Globalization and
Competitiveness (cont.)

World Population Distribution
Source: U.S. Census Bureau, 2006.
1-22
Globalization and
Competitiveness (cont.)

Trade in Goods as % of GDP
(sum of merchandise exports and imports divided by GDP, valued in U.S. dollars)
1-23
Productivity and
Competitiveness
Competitiveness
degree to which a nation can produce goods and
services that meet the test of international
markets

Productivity
ratio of output to input

Output
sales made, products produced, customers
served, meals delivered, or calls answered

Input
labor hours, investment in equipment, material
usage, or square footage

1-24
Productivity and
Competitiveness (cont.)

Measures of Productivity

1-25
Productivity and
Competitiveness (cont.)

Average Annual Growth Rates in Productivity, 1995-2005.
1995Source: Bureau of Labor Statistics. A Chartbook of
International Labor Comparisons. January 2007, p. 28.
1-26
Productivity and
Competitiveness (cont.)

Average Annual Growth Rates in Output and Input, 1995-2005
1995Source: Bureau of Labor Statistics. A Chartbook of International
Labor Comparisons, January 2007, p. 26.

Dramatic Increase in
Output w/ Decrease in
Labor Hours
1-27
Productivity and
Competitiveness (cont.)
Retrenching
productivity is increasing, but both output and input
decrease with input decreasing at a faster rate

Assumption that more input would cause
output to increase at the same rate
certain limits to the amount of output may not be
considered
output produced is emphasized, not output sold;
sold;
increased inventories
1-28
Strategy and Operations
Strategy
Provides direction for achieving a mission

Five Steps for Strategy Formulation
Defining a primary task
What is the firm in the business of doing?

Assessing core competencies
What does the firm do better than anyone else?

Determining order winners and order qualifiers
What qualifies an item to be considered for purchase?
What wins the order?

Positioning the firm
How will the firm compete?

Deploying the strategy
1-29
Strategic Planning
Mission
and Vision

Corporate
Strategy

Marketing
Strategy

Operations
Strategy

Financial
Strategy
1-30
Order Winners
and Order Qualifiers

Source: Adapted from Nigel Slack, Stuart Chambers, Robert Johnston, and Alan
Betts, Operations and Process Management, Prentice Hall, 2006, p. 47
Management,
1-31
Positioning the Firm
Cost
Speed
Quality
Flexibility

1-32
Positioning the Firm:
Cost
Waste elimination
relentlessly pursuing the removal of all waste

Examination of cost structure
looking at the entire cost structure for
reduction potential

Lean production
providing low costs through disciplined
operations

1-33
Positioning the Firm:
Speed
fast moves, fast adaptations, tight linkages
Internet
conditioned customers to expect immediate responses

Service organizations
always competed on speed (McDonald’s, LensCrafters, and
Federal Express)

Manufacturers
timetime-based competition: build-to-order production and
build-toefficient supply chains

Fashion industry
twotwo-week design-to-rack lead time of Spanish retailer, Zara
design-to-

1-34
Positioning the Firm:
Quality
Minimizing defect rates or conforming to
design specifications; please the customer
RitzRitz-Carlton - one customer at a time
Service system is designed to “move heaven
and earth” to satisfy customer
Every employee is empowered to satisfy a
guest’s wish
Teams at all levels set objectives and devise
quality action plans
Each hotel has a quality leader
1-35
Positioning the Firm:
Flexibility
ability to adjust to changes in product mix,
production volume, or design
National Bicycle Industrial Company
offers 11,231,862 variations
delivers within two weeks at costs only 10%
above standard models
mass customization: the mass production of
customization:
customized parts

1-36
Policy Deployment
Policy deployment
translates corporate strategy into measurable
objectives

Hoshins
action plans generated from the policy
deployment process

1-37
Policy Deployment

Derivation of an Action Plan Using Policy Deployment
1-38
Balanced Scorecard
Balanced scorecard
measuring more than financial performance
finances
customers
processes
learning and growing

Key performance indicators
a set of measures that help managers evaluate
performance in critical areas
1-39
Balanced Scorecard
Balanced Scorecard Worksheet

1-40
Balanced Scorecard

Radar Chart

Dashboard

1-41
Operations Strategy
Services
Products

Capacity

Facilities

Human
Resources

Sourcing

Process
and
Technology

Quality

Operating
Systems

1-42
Chapter 1 Supplement
Decision Analysis
Operations Management
Roberta Russell & Bernard W. Taylor, III
Lecture Outline
Decision Analysis
Decision Making without Probabilities
Decision Analysis with Excel
Decision Analysis with OM Tools
Decision Making with Probabilities
Expected Value of Perfect Information
Sequential Decision Tree
Supplement 1-44
1-
Decision Analysis
Quantitative methods
a set of tools for operations manager

Decision analysis
a set of quantitative decision-making
decisiontechniques for decision situations in which
uncertainty exists
Example of an uncertain situation
demand for a product may vary between 0 and 200
units, depending on the state of market

Supplement 1-45
1-
Decision Making
Without Probabilities
States of nature
Events that may occur in the future
Examples of states of nature:
high or low demand for a product
good or bad economic conditions

Decision making under risk
probabilities can be assigned to the occurrence of
states of nature in the future

Decision making under uncertainty
probabilities can NOT be assigned to the
occurrence of states of nature in the future
Supplement 1-46
1-
Payoff Table
Payoff table
method for organizing and illustrating payoffs from different
decisions given various states of nature

Payoff
outcome of a decision

States Of Nature
Decision
a
b
1
Payoff 1a
Payoff 1b
2
Payoff 2a
Payoff 2b
Supplement 1-47
1-
Decision Making Criteria Under
Uncertainty
Maximax
choose decision with the maximum of the
maximum payoffs

Maximin
choose decision with the maximum of the
minimum payoffs

Minimax regret
choose decision with the minimum of the
maximum regrets for each alternative
Supplement 1-48
1-
Decision Making Criteria Under
Uncertainty (cont.)
Hurwicz
choose decision in which decision payoffs are
weighted by a coefficient of optimism, alpha
coefficient of optimism is a measure of a
decision maker’s optimism, from 0 (completely
pessimistic) to 1 (completely optimistic)

Equal likelihood (La Place)
choose decision in which each state of nature is
weighted equally
Supplement 1-49
1-
Southern Textile
Company
STATES OF NATURE
Good Foreign

DECISION
Expand
Maintain status quo
Sell now

Poor Foreign

Competitive Conditions

Competitive Conditions

$ 800,000
1,300,000
320,000

$ 500,000
-150,000
320,000

Supplement 1-50
1-
Maximax Solution
STATES OF NATURE
Good Foreign

DECISION
Expand
Maintain status quo
Sell now
Expand:
Status quo:
Sell:

Poor Foreign

Competitive Conditions

Competitive Conditions

$ 800,000
1,300,000
320,000
$800,000
1,300,000
320,000

$ 500,000
-150,000
320,000

← Maximum
Decision: Maintain status quo
Supplement 1-51
1-
Maximin Solution
STATES OF NATURE
Good Foreign

DECISION
Expand
Maintain status quo
Sell now

Expand:
Status quo:
Sell:

Poor Foreign

Competitive Conditions

Competitive Conditions

$ 800,000
1,300,000
320,000

$500,000
-150,000
320,000

$ 500,000
-150,000
320,000

← Maximum

Decision: Expand
Supplement 1-52
1-
Minimax Regret Solution
Good Foreign
Competitive Conditions

Poor Foreign
Competitive Conditions

$1,300,000 - 800,000 = 500,000
$500,000 - 500,000 = 0
1,300,000 - 1,300,000 = 0
500,000 - (-150,000)= 650,000
1,300,000 - 320,000 = 980,000
500,000 - 320,000= 180,000

Expand:
Status quo:
Sell:

$500,000
650,000
980,000

← Minimum

Decision: Expand
Supplement 1-53
1-
Hurwicz Criteria
STATES OF NATURE
Good Foreign

DECISION
Expand
Maintain status quo
Sell now

α = 0.3

Poor Foreign

Competitive Conditions

Competitive Conditions

$ 800,000
1,300,000
320,000

$ 500,000
-150,000
320,000

1 - α = 0.7

Expand: $800,000(0.3) + 500,000(0.7) = $590,000 ← Maximum
Status quo: 1,300,000(0.3) -150,000(0.7) = 285,000
Sell: 320,000(0.3) + 320,000(0.7) = 320,000
Decision: Expand
Supplement 1-54
1-
Equal Likelihood Criteria
STATES OF NATURE
Good Foreign

DECISION
Expand
Maintain status quo
Sell now

Poor Foreign

Competitive Conditions

Competitive Conditions

$ 800,000
1,300,000
320,000

$ 500,000
-150,000
320,000

Two states of nature each weighted 0.50
Expand: $800,000(0.5) + 500,000(0.5) = $650,000 ← Maximum
Status quo: 1,300,000(0.5) -150,000(0.5) = 575,000
Sell: 320,000(0.5) + 320,000(0.5) = 320,000
Decision: Expand
Supplement 1-55
1-
Decision Analysis with
Excel

Supplement 1-56
1-
Decision Analysis with
OM Tools

Supplement 1-57
1-
Decision Making with
Probabilities
Risk involves assigning probabilities to
states of nature
Expected value
a weighted average of decision outcomes in
which each future state of nature is
assigned a probability of occurrence

Supplement 1-58
1-
Expected value
EV (x) =
(x
p(xi)xi

n

∑
i =1

where
xi = outcome i
p(xi) = probability of outcome i

Supplement 1-59
1-
Decision Making with
Probabilities: Example
STATES OF NATURE
Good Foreign
Competitive Conditions

DECISION
Expand
Maintain status quo
Sell now

Poor Foreign
Competitive Conditions

$ 800,000
1,300,000
320,000

p(good) = 0.70

$ 500,000
-150,000
320,000
p(poor) = 0.30

EV(expand): $800,000(0.7) + 500,000(0.3) = $710,000
EV(status quo): 1,300,000(0.7) -150,000(0.3) = 865,000 ← Maximum
EV(sell):
320,000(0.7) + 320,000(0.3) = 320,000

Decision: Status quo
Supplement 1-60
1-
Decision Making with
Probabilities: Excel

Supplement 1-61
1-
Expected Value of
Perfect Information
EVPI
maximum value of perfect information to
the decision maker
maximum amount that would be paid to
gain information that would result in a
decision better than the one made
without perfect information

Supplement 1-62
1-
EVPI Example
Good conditions will exist 70% of the time
choose maintain status quo with payoff of $1,300,000

Poor conditions will exist 30% of the time
choose expand with payoff of $500,000

Expected value given perfect information
= $1,300,000 (0.70) + 500,000 (0.30)
= $1,060,000
Recall that expected value without perfect
information was $865,000 (maintain status quo)
EVPI=
EVPI= $1,060,000 - 865,000 = $195,000

Supplement 1-63
1-
Sequential
Decision Trees
A graphical method for analyzing
decision situations that require a
sequence of decisions over time
Decision tree consists of
Square nodes - indicating decision points
Circles nodes - indicating states of nature
Arcs - connecting nodes

Supplement 1-64
1-
Evaluations at Nodes
Compute EV at nodes 6 & 7
EV(node 6)= 0.80($3,000,000) + 0.20($700,000) = $2,540,000
EV(
6)=
EV(node 7)= 0.30($2,300,000) + 0.70($1,000,000)= $1,390,000
EV(
7)=

Decision at node 4 is between
$2,540,000 for Expand and
$450,000 for Sell land

Choose Expand
Repeat expected value calculations and decisions at
remaining nodes

Supplement 1-65
1-
Decision Tree Analysis
$2,000,000

$1,290,000
0.60

Market growth

2
0.40
$225,000
$2,540,000

$3,000,000

0.80
$1,740,000

6
0.20

1

$700,000

4

$1,160,000

$450,000
0.60
3
$1,360,000

$1,390,000

0.40
$790,000

$2,300,000

0.30
7
0.70

$1,000,000

5
$210,000
Supplement 1-66
1-
Chapter 2
Quality Management
Operations Management
Roberta Russell & Bernard W. Taylor, III
Lecture Outline
What Is Quality?
Evolution of Quality
Management
Quality Tools
TQM and QMS
Focus of Quality
Management—
Management—
Customers
Role of Employees in
Quality Improvement

Quality in Service
Companies
Six Sigma
Cost of Quality
Effect of Quality
Management on
Productivity
Quality Awards
ISO 9000
2-68
What Is Quality?
Oxford American Dictionary
a degree or level of excellence

American Society for Quality
totality of features and characteristics
that satisfy needs without deficiencies

Consumer’s and producer’s
perspective

2-69
What Is Quality:
Customer’s Perspective
Fitness for use
how well product or
service does what it is
supposed to

Quality of design
designing quality
characteristics into a
product or service
A Mercedes and a Ford are
equally “fit for use,” but with
different design dimensions.

2-70
Dimensions of Quality:
Manufactured Products
Performance
basic operating characteristics of a product; how
well a car handles or its gas mileage

Features
“extra” items added to basic features, such as a
stereo CD or a leather interior in a car

Reliability
probability that a product will operate properly
within an expected time frame; that is, a TV will
work without repair for about seven years

2-71
Dimensions of Quality:
Manufactured Products (cont.)
Conformance
degree to which a product meets pre–established
pre–
standards

Durability
how long product lasts before replacement; with
care, L.L.Bean boots may last a lifetime

Serviceability
ease of getting repairs, speed of repairs, courtesy
and competence of repair person

2-72
Dimensions of Quality:
Manufactured Products (cont.)
Aesthetics
how a product looks, feels, sounds,
smells, or tastes

Safety
assurance that customer will not suffer
injury or harm from a product; an
especially important consideration for
automobiles

Perceptions
subjective perceptions based on brand
name, advertising, and like
2-73
Dimensions of Quality:
Services
Time and timeliness
how long must a customer wait for service,
and is it completed on time?
is an overnight package delivered overnight?

Completeness:
is everything customer asked for provided?
is a mail order from a catalogue company
complete when delivered?

2-74
Dimensions of Quality:
Service (cont.)
Courtesy:
how are customers treated by employees?
are catalogue phone operators nice and are
their voices pleasant?

Consistency
is same level of service provided to each
customer each time?
is your newspaper delivered on time every
morning?

2-75
Dimensions of Quality:
Service (cont.)
Accessibility and convenience
how easy is it to obtain service?
does service representative answer you calls quickly?

Accuracy
is service performed right every time?
is your bank or credit card statement correct every month?

Responsiveness
how well does company react to unusual situations?
how well is a telephone operator able to respond to a
customer’s questions?

2-76
What Is Quality:
Producer’s Perspective
Quality of conformance
making sure product or service is produced
according to design
if new tires do not conform to specifications, they
wobble
if a hotel room is not clean when a guest checks
in, hotel is not functioning according to
specifications of its design
2-77
Meaning of Quality

2-78
What Is Quality:
A Final Perspective
Customer’s and producer’s perspectives
depend on each other
Producer’s perspective:
production process and COST

Customer’s perspective:
fitness for use and PRICE

Customer’s view must dominate

2-79
Evolution of Quality Management:
Quality Gurus
Walter Shewart
In 1920s, developed control charts
Introduced term “quality assurance”
“quality

W. Edwards Deming
Developed courses during World War II to teach
statistical quality-control techniques to engineers and
qualityexecutives of companies that were military suppliers
After war, began teaching statistical quality control to
Japanese companies

Joseph M. Juran
Followed Deming to Japan in 1954
Focused on strategic quality planning
Quality improvement achieved by focusing on projects
to solve problems and securing breakthrough solutions
2-80
Evolution of Quality Management:
Quality Gurus (cont.)
Armand V. Feigenbaum
In 1951, introduced concepts of total quality control
and continuous quality improvement

Philip Crosby
In 1979, emphasized that costs of poor quality far
outweigh cost of preventing poor quality
In 1984, defined absolutes of quality management—
management—
conformance to requirements, prevention, and “zero
defects”

Kaoru Ishikawa
Promoted use of quality circles
Developed “fishbone” diagram
Emphasized importance of internal customer
2-81
Deming’s 14 Points
1. Create constancy of purpose
2. Adopt philosophy of prevention
3. Cease mass inspection
4. Select a few suppliers based on
quality
5. Constantly improve system and
workers
2-82
Deming’s 14 Points (cont.)
6. Institute worker training
7. Instill leadership among
supervisors
8. Eliminate fear among employees
9. Eliminate barriers between
departments
10. Eliminate slogans
2-83
Deming’s 14 Points (cont.)
11. Remove numerical quotas
12. Enhance worker pride
13. Institute vigorous training and
education programs
14. Develop a commitment from top
management to implement
above 13 points
2-84
Deming Wheel: PDCA Cycle

2-85
Quality Tools

Process Flow
Chart
Cause-andCause-andEffect Diagram
Check Sheet
Pareto Analysis

Histogram
Scatter Diagram
Statistical Process
Control Chart

2-86
Flow Chart

2-87
Cause-andCause-and-Effect Diagram
Cause-andCause-and-effect diagram (“fishbone” diagram)
chart showing different categories of problem causes

2-88
Cause-andCause-and-Effect Matrix
Cause-andCause-and-effect matrix
grid used to prioritize causes of quality problems

2-89
Check Sheets and Histograms

2-90
Pareto Analysis
Pareto analysis
most quality problems result from a few causes

2-91
Pareto Chart

2-92
Scatter Diagram

2-93
Control Chart

2-94
TQM and QMS
Total Quality Management (TQM)
customercustomer-oriented, leadership, strategic
planning, employee responsibility,
continuous improvement, cooperation,
statistical methods, and training and
education

Quality Management System (QMS)
system to achieve customer satisfaction
that complements other company
systems
2-95
Focus of Quality Management—
Management—
Customers
TQM and QMSs
serve to achieve customer satisfaction

Partnering
a relationship between a company and
its supplier based on mutual quality
standards

Measuring customer satisfaction
important component of any QMS
customer surveys, telephone interviews
2-96
Role of Employees in
Quality Improvement
Participative
problem solving
employees involved in
qualityquality-management
every employee has
undergone extensive
training to provide quality
service to Disney’s guests

Kaizen
involves everyone in
process of continuous
improvement
2-97
Quality Circles
and QITs
Organization
8-10 members
Same area
Supervisor/moderator

Quality circle
group of workers
and supervisors
from same area
who address
quality problems

Implementation
Monitoring

Group processes
Data collection
Problem analysis

Process/Quality
improvement teams
(QITs)

Solution

Problem
Identification

focus attention on
business processes
rather than separate
company functions

Training

Presentation

Problem results

Problem
Analysis

List alternatives
Consensus
Brainstorming

Cause and effect
Data collection
and analysis

2-98
Quality in Services
Service defects are not always easy
to measure because service output
is not usually a tangible item
Services tend to be labor intensive
Services and manufacturing
companies have similar inputs but
different processes and outputs

2-99
Quality Attributes in
Services
Principles of TQM apply
equally well to services
and manufacturing
Timeliness
how quickly a service is
provided?

Benchmark
“best” level of quality
achievement in one
company that other
companies seek to achieve

“quickest, friendliest, most
accurate service
available.”

2-100
Six Sigma
A process for developing and delivering
virtually perfect products and services
Measure of how much a process
deviates from perfection
3.4 defects per million opportunities
Six Sigma Process
four basic steps of Six Sigma—align,
Sigma—
mobilize, accelerate, and govern

Champion
an executive responsible for project success
2-101
Six Sigma:
Breakthrough Strategy—DMAIC
Strategy—
DEFINE

MEASURE

ANALYZE

IMPROVE

CONTROL

3.4 DPMO

67,000 DPMO
cost = 25% of
sales
2-102
Six Sigma:
Black Belts and
Green Belts

Black Belt
project leader

Master Black Belt
a teacher and mentor
for Black Belts

Green Belts
project team
members

2-103
Six Sigma
Design for Six Sigma (DFSS)
a systematic approach to designing products and
processes that will achieve Six Sigma

Profitability
typical criterion for selection Six Sigma project
one of the factors distinguishing Six Sigma from
TQM
“Quality is not only free, it is an
honest-tohonest-to-everything profit maker.”
2-104
Cost of Quality
Cost of Achieving Good Quality
Prevention costs
costs incurred during product design

Appraisal costs
costs of measuring, testing, and analyzing

Cost of Poor Quality
Internal failure costs
include scrap, rework, process failure, downtime,
and price reductions

External failure costs
include complaints, returns, warranty claims,
liability, and lost sales
2-105
Prevention Costs
Quality planning costs
costs of developing and
implementing quality
management program

ProductProduct-design costs
costs of designing
products with quality
characteristics

Process costs
costs expended to make
sure productive process
conforms to quality
specifications

Training costs
costs of developing and
putting on quality training
programs for employees
and management

Information costs
costs of acquiring
and maintaining data
related to quality, and
development and
analysis of reports on
quality performance

2-106
Appraisal Costs
Inspection and testing
costs of testing and inspecting materials, parts, and
product at various stages and at end of process

Test equipment costs
costs of maintaining equipment used in testing
quality characteristics of products

Operator costs
costs of time spent by operators to gather data for
testing product quality, to make equipment
adjustments to maintain quality, and to stop work to
assess quality

2-107
Internal Failure Costs
Scrap costs
costs of poor-quality
poorproducts that must be
discarded, including labor,
material, and indirect costs

Rework costs
costs of fixing defective
products to conform to
quality specifications

Process failure costs
costs of determining why
production process is
producing poor-quality
poorproducts

Process downtime costs
costs of shutting down
productive process to fix
problem

PricePrice-downgrading costs
costs of discounting poorpoorquality products—that is,
products—
selling products as
“seconds”

2-108
External Failure Costs
Customer complaint costs
costs of investigating and
satisfactorily responding to a
customer complaint resulting
from a poor-quality product
poor-

Product return costs
costs of handling and replacing
poorpoor-quality products returned
by customer

Warranty claims costs
costs of complying with
product warranties

Product liability costs
litigation costs
resulting from product
liability and customer
injury

Lost sales costs
costs incurred
because customers
are dissatisfied with
poorpoor-quality products
and do not make
additional purchases

2-109
Measuring and
Reporting Quality Costs
Index numbers
ratios that measure quality costs against a
base value
labor index
ratio of quality cost to labor hours

cost index
ratio of quality cost to manufacturing cost

sales index
ratio of quality cost to sales

production index
ratio of quality cost to units of final product
2-110
Quality–
Quality–Cost Relationship
Cost of quality
difference between price of
nonconformance and conformance
cost of doing things wrong
20 to 35% of revenues

cost of doing things right
3 to 4% of revenues

2-111
Effect of Quality
Management on Productivity
Productivity
ratio of output to input

Quality impact on productivity
fewer defects increase output, and quality
improvement reduces inputs

Yield
a measure of productivity
Yield=(total input)(% good units) + (total input)(1-%good units)(% reworked)

or
Y=(I)(%G)+(I)(1Y=(I)(%G)+(I)(1-%G)(%R)
2-112
Computing Product
Cost per Unit
Product Cost

(Kd )(I) +(Kr )(R)
=
Y

where:
Kd = direct manufacturing cost per unit
I = input
Kr = rework cost per unit
R = reworked units
Y = yield

2-113
Computing Product Yield
for Multistage Processes
Y = (I)(%g1)(%g2) … (%gn)

where:
I = input of items to the production process that will
result in finished products
gi = good-quality, work-in-process products at stage i

2-114
Quality–
Quality–Productivity Ratio
QPR
productivity index that includes productivity and
quality costs

QPR =

(good-quality units)
(input) (processing cost) + (reworked units) (rework cost)

(100)

2-115
Malcolm Baldrige Award
Created in 1987 to stimulate growth of
quality management in United States
Categories
Leadership
Information and analysis
Strategic planning
Human resource focus
Process management
Business results
Customer and market focus
2-116
Other Awards for Quality
National individual
awards
Armand V. Feigenbaum
Medal
Deming Medal
E. Jack Lancaster Medal
Edwards Medal
Shewart Medal
Ishikawa Medal

International awards
European Quality Award
Canadian Quality Award
Australian Business
Excellence Award
Deming Prize from Japan

2-117
ISO 9000
A set of procedures and
policies for international
quality certification of
suppliers
Standards
ISO 9000:2000
Quality Management
Systems—
Systems—Fundamentals
and Vocabulary
defines fundamental
terms and definitions
used in ISO 9000 family

ISO 9001:2000
Quality Management
Systems—
Systems—Requirements
standard to assess ability to
achieve customer satisfaction

ISO 9004:2000
Quality Management
Systems—
Systems—Guidelines for
Performance Improvements
guidance to a company for
continual improvement of its
qualityquality-management system

2-118
ISO 9000 Certification,
Implications, and Registrars
ISO 9001:2000—only
9001:2000—
standard that carries thirdthirdparty certification
Many overseas companies
will not do business with a
supplier unless it has ISO
9000 certification
ISO 9000 accreditation
ISO registrars

2-119
Chapter 3
Statistical Process Control
Operations Management
Roberta Russell & Bernard W. Taylor, III
Lecture Outline
Basics of Statistical Process Control
Control Charts
Control Charts for Attributes
Control Charts for Variables
Control Chart Patterns
SPC with Excel and OM Tools
Process Capability
3-121
Basics of Statistical
Process Control
Statistical Process Control
(SPC)
monitoring production process
to detect and prevent poor
quality

UCL

Sample
subset of items produced to
use for inspection

LCL

Control Charts
process is within statistical
control limits

3-122
Basics of Statistical
Process Control (cont.)
Random
inherent in a process
depends on equipment
and machinery,
engineering, operator,
and system of
measurement
natural occurrences

NonNon-Random
special causes
identifiable and
correctable
include equipment out of
adjustment, defective
materials, changes in
parts or materials, broken
machinery or equipment,
operator fatigue or poor
work methods, or errors
due to lack of training
3-123
SPC in Quality Management
SPC
tool for identifying problems in
order to make improvements
contributes to the TQM goal of
continuous improvements

3-124
Quality Measures:
Attributes and Variables
Attribute
a product characteristic that can be
evaluated with a discrete response
good – bad; yes - no

Variable measure
a product characteristic that is continuous
and can be measured
weight - length
3-125
SPC Applied to
Services
Nature of defect is different in services
Service defect is a failure to meet
customer requirements
Monitor time and customer satisfaction

3-126
SPC Applied to
Services (cont.)
Hospitals
timeliness and quickness of care, staff responses to requests,
accuracy of lab tests, cleanliness, courtesy, accuracy of
paperwork, speed of admittance and checkouts

Grocery stores
waiting time to check out, frequency of out-of-stock items,
out-ofquality of food items, cleanliness, customer complaints,
checkout register errors

Airlines
flight delays, lost luggage and luggage handling, waiting time
at ticket counters and check-in, agent and flight attendant
checkcourtesy, accurate flight information, passenger cabin
cleanliness and maintenance

3-127
SPC Applied to
Services (cont.)
FastFast-food restaurants
waiting time for service, customer complaints,
cleanliness, food quality, order accuracy, employee
courtesy

CatalogueCatalogue-order companies
order accuracy, operator knowledge and courtesy,
packaging, delivery time, phone order waiting time

Insurance companies
billing accuracy, timeliness of claims processing,
agent availability and response time

3-128
Where to Use Control Charts
Process has a tendency to go out of control
Process is particularly harmful and costly if it
goes out of control
Examples
at the beginning of a process because it is a waste of
time and money to begin production process with bad
supplies
before a costly or irreversible point, after which
product is difficult to rework or correct
before and after assembly or painting operations that
might cover defects
before the outgoing final product or service is
delivered
3-129
Control Charts
A graph that establishes
control limits of a
process
Control limits
upper and lower bands of
a control chart

Types of charts
Attributes
p-chart
c-chart

Variables
mean (x bar – chart)
range (R-chart)
(R-

3-130
Process Control Chart
Out of control
Upper
control
limit
Process
average
Lower
control
limit

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Sample number
3-131
Normal Distribution

95%
99.74%
- 3σ

- 2σ

- 1σ

µ=0

1σ

2σ

3σ

3-132
A Process Is in
Control If …
1. … no sample points outside limits
2. … most points near process average
3. … about equal number of points above
and below centerline
4. … points appear randomly distributed

3-133
Control Charts for
Attributes
p-chart
uses portion defective in a sample

c-chart
uses number of defective items in
a sample

3-134
p-Chart
UCL = p + zσp
LCL = p - zσp
z = number of standard deviations from
process average
p = sample proportion defective; an estimate
of process average
σp = standard deviation of sample proportion

σp =

p(1 - p)
n
3-135
Construction of p-Chart
pSAMPLE

1
2
3
:
:
20

NUMBER OF
DEFECTIVES

PROPORTION
DEFECTIVE

6
0
4
:
:
18
200

.06
.00
.04
:
:
.18

20 samples of 100 pairs of jeans
3-136
Construction of p-Chart (cont.)
pp=

total defectives
total sample observations

UCL = p + z

p(1 - p)
n

= 200 / 20(100) = 0.10

= 0.10 + 3

0.10(1 - 0.10)
100

UCL = 0.190
LCL = p - z

p(1 - p)
n

= 0.10 - 3

0.10(1 - 0.10)
100

LCL = 0.010

3-137
0.20
UCL = 0.190

0.18

Construction
of p-Chart
p(cont.)

Proportion defective

0.16
0.14
0.12
0.10

p = 0.10

0.08
0.06
0.04
0.02

LCL = 0.010
2

4

6

8
10
12 14
Sample number

16

18

20

3-138
c-Chart

UCL = c + zσc
LCL = c - zσc

σc =

c

where
c = number of defects per sample

3-139
c-Chart (cont.)
Number of defects in 15 sample rooms

SAMPLE

1
2
3

NUMBER
OF
DEFECTS

:
:
15

c=

12
8
16

:
:
15
190

190
15

= 12.67

UCL = c + zσc
= 12.67 + 3
= 23.35

12.67

= c - zσ c
= 12.67 - 3
= 1.99

12.67

LCL

3-140
24
UCL = 23.35

c-Chart
(cont.)

Number of defects

21
18
c = 12.67
15
12
9
6
LCL = 1.99

3

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

Sample number

3-141
Control Charts for
Variables
Range chart ( R-Chart )
Ruses amount of dispersion in a
sample

Mean chart ( x -Chart )
uses process average of a
sample

3-142
x-bar Chart:
Standard Deviation Known
=
UCL = x + zσx

LCL = = - zσx
x

x1 + x2 + ... xn
n

=
x =
where
=

x = average of sample means
3-143
x-bar Chart Example:
Standard Deviation Known (cont.)

3-144
x-bar Chart Example:
Standard Deviation Known (cont.)

3-145
x-bar Chart Example:
Standard Deviation Unknown
=
UCL = x + A2R

=
LCL = x - A2R

where

x = average of sample means
3-146
Control
Limits

3-147
x-bar Chart Example:
Standard Deviation Unknown
OBSERVATIONS (SLIP- RING DIAMETER, CM)
(SLIPSAMPLE k

1

2

3

4

5

x

R

1

5.02

5.01

4.94

4.99

4.96

4.98

0.08

2

5.01

5.03

5.07

4.95

4.96

5.00

0.12

3

4.99

5.00

4.93

4.92

4.99

4.97

0.08

4

5.03

4.91

5.01

4.98

4.89

4.96

0.14

5

4.95

4.92

5.03

5.05

5.01

4.99

0.13

6

4.97

5.06

5.06

4.96

5.03

5.01

0.10

7

5.05

5.01

5.10

4.96

4.99

5.02

0.14

8

5.09

5.10

5.00

4.99

5.08

5.05

0.11

9

5.14

5.10

4.99

5.08

5.09

5.08

0.15

10

5.01

4.98

5.08

5.07

4.99

5.03

0.10

50.09

1.15

Example 15.4

3-148
x-bar Chart Example:
Standard Deviation Unknown (cont.)
∑R

R=

=
x=

k

∑x
k

=

=

1.15
10

= 0.115

50.09 5.01 cm
=
10

=
UCL = x + A2R = 5.01 + (0.58)(0.115) = 5.08
LCL = x = A2R = 5.01 - (0.58)(0.115) = 4.94
Retrieve Factor Value A2
3-149
5.10 –
5.08 –

UCL = 5.08

5.06 –

Mean

5.04 –
=
x = 5.01

5.02 –
5.00 –

x- bar
Chart
Example
(cont.)

4.98 –
4.96 –

LCL = 4.94

4.94 –
4.92 –

|
1

|
2

|
3

|
|
|
|
4
5
6
7
Sample number

|
8

|
9

|
10

3-150
R- Chart
UCL = D4R
R=

LCL = D3R
∑R
k

where
R = range of each sample
k = number of samples
3-151
R-Chart Example
OBSERVATIONS (SLIP-RING DIAMETER, CM)
(SLIPSAMPLE k

1

2

3

4

5

x

R

1

5.02

5.01

4.94

4.99

4.96

4.98

0.08

2

5.01

5.03

5.07

4.95

4.96

5.00

0.12

3

4.99

5.00

4.93

4.92

4.99

4.97

0.08

4

5.03

4.91

5.01

4.98

4.89

4.96

0.14

5

4.95

4.92

5.03

5.05

5.01

4.99

0.13

6

4.97

5.06

5.06

4.96

5.03

5.01

0.10

7

5.05

5.01

5.10

4.96

4.99

5.02

0.14

8

5.09

5.10

5.00

4.99

5.08

5.05

0.11

9

5.14

5.10

4.99

5.08

5.09

5.08

0.15

10

5.01

4.98

5.08

5.07

4.99

5.03

0.10

50.09

1.15

Example 15.3

3-152
R-Chart Example (cont.)
UCL = D4R = 2.11(0.115) = 0.243
LCL = D3R = 0(0.115) = 0
Retrieve Factor Values D3 and D4

Example 15.3
3-153
R-Chart Example (cont.)
0.28 –
0.24 –

UCL = 0.243

Range

0.20 –
0.16 –

R = 0.115

0.12 –
0.08 –
0.04 –
0–

LCL = 0
|
|
|
1 2
3

|
|
|
|
4
5
6
7
Sample number

|
8

|
9

|
10

3-154
Using x- bar and R-Charts
xRTogether
Process average and process variability must be in control
It is possible for samples to have very narrow ranges, but
their averages might be beyond control limits
It is possible for sample averages to be in control, but
ranges might be very large
It is possible for an R-chart to exhibit a distinct downward
Rtrend, suggesting some nonrandom cause is reducing
variation

3-155
Control Chart Patterns
Run
sequence of sample values that display same characteristic
Pattern test
determines if observations within limits of a control chart display a
nonrandom pattern
To identify a pattern:
8 consecutive points on one side of the center line
8 consecutive points up or down
14 points alternating up or down
2 out of 3 consecutive points in zone A (on one side of center line)
4 out of 5 consecutive points in zone A or B (on one side of center
line)

3-156
Control Chart Patterns (cont.)
UCL

UCL
LCL
Sample observations
consistently below the
center line

LCL
Sample observations
consistently above the
center line
3-157
Control Chart Patterns (cont.)
UCL

UCL
LCL
Sample observations
consistently increasing

LCL
Sample observations
consistently decreasing
3-158
Zones for Pattern Tests
=
3 sigma = x + A2R

UCL
Zone A

= 2
2 sigma = x +
(A
(A2R)
3

Zone B
= 1
1 sigma = x +
(A
(A2R)
3

Zone C
=
x

Process
average

Zone C
= 1
1 sigma = x - (A2R)
3

Zone B
= 2
2 sigma = x - (A2R)
3

Zone A
=
3 sigma = x - A2R

LCL
|
1

|
2

|
3

|
4

|
5

|
6

|
7

|
8

|
9

|
10

|
11

|
12

|
13

Sample number
3-159
Performing a Pattern Test
SAMPLE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

x

ABOVE/BELOW

UP/DOWN

ZONE

4.98
5.00
4.95
4.96
4.99
5.01
5.02
5.05
5.08
5.03

B
B
B
B
B
—
A
A
A
A

—
U
D
D
U
U
U
U
U
D

B
C
A
A
C
C
C
B
A
B

3-160
Sample Size Determination

Attribute charts require larger sample sizes
50 to 100 parts in a sample
Variable charts require smaller samples
2 to 10 parts in a sample

3-161
SPC with Excel

3-162
SPC with Excel and OM Tools

3-163
Process Capability
Tolerances
design specifications reflecting product
requirements

Process capability
range of natural variability in a process—
process—
what we measure with control charts

3-164
Process Capability (cont.)
Design
Specifications
(a) Natural variation
exceeds design
specifications; process
is not capable of
meeting specifications
all the time.
Process
Design
Specifications
(b) Design specifications
and natural variation the
same; process is capable
of meeting specifications
most of the time.
Process
3-165
Process Capability (cont.)
Design
Specifications
(c) Design specifications
greater than natural
variation; process is
capable of always
conforming to
specifications.
Process
Design
Specifications
(d) Specifications greater
than natural variation,
but process off center;
capable but some output
will not meet upper
specification.
Process
3-166
Process Capability Measures
Process Capability Ratio
Cp =

tolerance range
process range
upper specification limit lower specification limit

=

6σ
3-167
Computing Cp
Net weight specification = 9.0 oz ± 0.5 oz
Process mean = 8.80 oz
Process standard deviation = 0.12 oz

Cp =

=

upper specification limit lower specification limit
6σ
9.5 - 8.5 = 1.39
6(0.12)

3-168
Process Capability Measures
Process Capability Index
=
Cpk = minimum

x - lower specification limit
3σ

,

upper specification limit - x

=

3σ

3-169
Computing Cpk
Net weight specification = 9.0 oz ± 0.5 oz
Process mean = 8.80 oz
Process standard deviation = 0.12 oz
=
x - lower specification limit
Cpk = minimum

,

3σ
=
upper specification limit - x
3σ
8.80 - 8.50

= minimum

3(0.12) ,

9.50 - 8.80
3(0.12)

= 0.83

3-170
Process Capability
with Excel

3-171
Process Capability
with Excel and OM Tools

3-172
Chapter 3 Supplement
Acceptance Sampling
Operations Management
Roberta Russell & Bernard W. Taylor, III
Lecture Outline
SingleSingle-Sample Attribute Plan
Operating Characteristic Curve
Developing a Sampling Plan with Excel
Average Outgoing Quality
Double - and Multiple-Sampling Plans
Multiple-

Supplement 3-174
3-
Acceptance Sampling
Accepting or rejecting a production lot based
on the number of defects in a sample
Not consistent with TQM or Zero Defects
philosophy
producer and customer agree on the number of
acceptable defects
a means of identifying not preventing poor quality
percent of defective parts versus PPM

Sampling plan
provides guidelines for accepting a lot
Supplement 3-175
3-
Single–
Single–Sample
Attribute Plan
Single sampling plan
N = lot size
n = sample size (random)
c = acceptance number
d = number of defective items in sample

If d ≤ c, accept lot; else reject

Supplement 3-176
3-
Producer’s and
Consumer’s Risk
AQL or acceptable quality level
proportion of defects consumer will accept in
a given lot

α or producer’s risk

probability of rejecting a good lot

LTPD or lot tolerance percent defective
limit on the number of defectives the
customer will accept

β or consumer’s risk
probability of accepting a bad lot
Supplement 3-177
3-
Producer’s and
Consumer’s Risk (cont.)
Good Lot

Reject

No Error

Type I Error
Producer’ Risk

Bad Lot

Accept

Type II Error
Consumer’s Risk

No Error

Sampling Errors

Supplement 3-178
3-
Operating Characteristic
(OC) Curve
shows probability of accepting lots of
different quality levels with a specific
sampling plan
assists management to discriminate
between good and bad lots
exact shape and location of the curve is
defined by the sample size (n) and
(n
acceptance level (c) for the sampling
(c
plan
Supplement 3-179
3-
OC Curve (cont.)
1.00 –
α = 0.05

Probability of acceptance, Pa

0.80 –

OC curve for n and c

0.60 –

0.40 –

0.20 –
β = 0.10

|

–

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.10 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.20

AQL

Proportion defective

LTPD
Supplement 3-180
3-
Developing a Sampling Plan
with OM Tools
ABC Company produces mugs
in lots of 10,000. Performance
measures for quality of mugs
sent to stores call for a
producer’s risk of 0.05 with an
AQL of 1% defective and a
consumer’s risk of 0.10 with a
LTPD of 5% defective. What
size sample and what
acceptance number should
ABC use to achieve
performance measures called
for in the sampling plan?

N = 10,000
α = 0.05
?
β = 0.10
AQL = 1%
LTPD = 5%

n=?
c=

Supplement 3-181
3-
Average Outgoing
Quality (AOQ)
Expected number of defective
items that will pass on to
customer with a sampling plan
Average outgoing quality limit
(AOQL)
maximum point on the curve
worst level of outgoing quality
Supplement 3-182
3-
AOQ Curve

Supplement 3-183
3-
DoubleDouble-Sampling Plans
Take small initial sample
If # defective ≤ lower limit, accept
If # defective > upper limit, reject
If # defective between limits, take second
sample

Accept or reject based on 2 samples
Less costly than single-sampling plans
single-

Supplement 3-184
3-
MultipleMultiple-Sampling Plans
Uses smaller sample sizes
Take initial sample
If # defective ≤ lower limit, accept
If # defective > upper limit, reject
If # defective between limits, resample

Continue sampling until accept or reject
lot based on all sample data
Supplement 3-185
3-
Chapter 4
Product Design
Operations Management
Roberta Russell & Bernard W. Taylor, III
Lecture Outline
Design Process
Concurrent Design
Technology in Design
Design Reviews
Design for Environment
Design for Robustness
Quality Function Deployment
4-187
Design Process
Effective design can provide a competitive
edge
matches product or service characteristics with
customer requirements
ensures that customer requirements are met in the
simplest and least costly manner
reduces time required to design a new product or
service
minimizes revisions necessary to make a design
workable
Copyright 2009 John Wiley & Sons, Inc.

4-188
Design Process (cont.)
Product design
defines appearance of product
sets standards for performance
specifies which materials are to be used
determines dimensions and tolerances

4-189
Design Process (cont.)

4-190
Idea Generation
Company’s own
R&D department
Customer complaints
or suggestions
Marketing research
Suppliers

Salespersons in the
field
Factory workers
New technological
developments
Competitors

4-191
Idea Generation (cont.)
Perceptual Maps
Visual comparison of
customer perceptions

Benchmarking
Comparing product/process
against best-in-class
best-in-

Reverse engineering
Dismantling competitor’s product to
improve your own product

4-192
Perceptual Map of
Breakfast Cereals

4-193
Feasibility Study
Market analysis
Economic analysis
Technical/strategic analyses
Performance specifications

4-194
Rapid Prototyping
testing and revising a
preliminary design model
Build a prototype
form design
functional design
production design

Test prototype
Revise design
Retest
4-195
Form and Functional Design
Form Design
how product will
look?

Functional Design
how product will
perform?
reliability
maintainability
usability

4-196
Computing Reliability

Components in series
0.90

0.90

0.90 x 0.90 = 0.81

4-197
Computing Reliability (cont.)
Components in parallel
0.90
R2
0.95 + 0.90(1-0.95) = 0.995
0.90(1-

0.95
R1

4-198
System Reliability
0.90

0.98

0.98

0.92

0.98

0.92+(10.92+(1-0.92)(0.90)=0.99

0.98

0.98 x 0.99 x 0.98 = 0.951
4-199
System Availability (SA)

SA =

MTBF
MTBF + MTTR

where:
MTBF = mean time between failures
MTTR = mean time to repair

4-200
System Availability
(cont.)
PROVIDER

MTBF (HR)

MTTR (HR)

A
B
C

60
36
24

4.0
2.0
1.0

SAA = 60 / (60 + 4) = .9375 or 94%
SAB = 36 / (36 + 2) = .9473 or 95%
SAC = 24 / (24 + 1) = .96 or 96%

4-201
Usability
Ease of use of a product or service
ease of learning
ease of use
ease of remembering how to use
frequency and severity of errors
user satisfaction with experience

4-202
Production Design
How the product will be made
Simplification
reducing number of parts, assemblies, or options in a
product

Standardization
using commonly available and interchangeable parts

Modular Design
combining standardized building blocks, or modules, to
create unique finished products

Design for Manufacture (DFM)
• Designing a product so that it can be produced easily and
economically

4-203
Design
Simplification
(a) Original design

Assembly using
common fasteners

Source: Adapted from G. Boothroyd and
P. Dewhurst, “Product Design…. Key to
Successful Robotic Assembly.” Assembly
Engineering (September 1986), pp. 909093.

(b) Revised design

(c) Final design

OneOne-piece base &
elimination of
fasteners

Design for
push-andpush-and-snap
assembly
4-204
Final Design and Process Plans
Final design
detailed drawings
and specifications
for new product or
service

Process plans
workable instructions
necessary equipment
and tooling
component sourcing
recommendations
job descriptions and
procedures
computer programs for
automated machines

4-205
Design Team

4-206
Concurrent Design
A new approach to
design that involves
simultaneous design of
products and processes
by design teams
Improves quality of early
design decisions

Involves suppliers
Incorporates production
process
Uses a price-minus
pricesystem
Scheduling and
management can be
complex as tasks are
done in parallel
Uses technology to aid
design

4-207
Technology in Design
Computer Aided Design (CAD)
assists in creation, modification, and analysis of
a design
computercomputer-aided engineering (CAE)
tests and analyzes designs on computer screen

computercomputer-aided manufacturing (CAD/CAM)
ultimate design-to-manufacture connection
design-to-

product life cycle management (PLM)
managing entire lifecycle of a product

collaborative product design (CPD)
4-208
Collaborative Product Design
(CPD)
A software system for collaborative design and
development among trading partners
With PML, manages product data, sets up project
workspaces, and follows life cycle of the product
Accelerates product development, helps to resolve
product launch issues, and improves quality of design
Designers can
conduct virtual review sessions
test “what if” scenarios
assign and track design issues
communicate with multiple tiers of suppliers
create, store, and manage project documents
4-209
Design Review
Review designs to prevent failures and
ensure value
Failure mode and effects analysis (FMEA)
a systematic method of analyzing product
failures

Fault tree analysis (FTA)
a visual method for analyzing interrelationships
among failures

Value analysis (VA)
helps eliminate unnecessary features and
functions
4-210
FMEA for Potato Chips
Failure
Mode

Cause of
Failure

Effect of
Failure

Corrective
Action

Stale

low moisture content
expired shelf life
poor packaging

tastes bad
won’t crunch
thrown out
lost sales

add moisture
cure longer
better package seal
shorter shelf life

Broken

too thin
too brittle
rough handling
rough use
poor packaging

can’t dip
poor display
injures mouth
chocking
perceived as old
lost sales

change recipe
change process
change packaging

Too Salty

outdated receipt
process not in control
uneven distribution of salt

eat less
drink more
health hazard
lost sales

experiment with recipe
experiment with process
introduce low salt version

4-211
Fault tree analysis (FTA)

4-212
Value analysis (VA)
Can we do without it?
Does it do more than is required?
Does it cost more than it is worth?
Can something else do a better job?
Can it be made by
a less costly method?
with less costly tooling?
with less costly material?

Can it be made cheaper, better, or faster by
someone else?
4-213
Value analysis (VA) (cont.)
Updated versions also include:
Is it recyclable or biodegradable?
Is the process sustainable?
Will it use more energy than it is worth?
Does the item or its by-product harm the
byenvironment?

4-214
Design for Environment and
Extended Producer Responsibility
Design for environment
designing a product from material that can be recycled
design from recycled material
design for ease of repair
minimize packaging
minimize material and energy used during manufacture,
consumption and disposal

Extended producer responsibility
holds companies responsible for their product even after its
useful life

4-215
Design for Environment

4-216
Sustainability
Ability to meet present needs without compromising
those of future generations
Green product design
Use fewer materials
Use recycled materials or recovered components
Don’t assume natural materials are always better
Don’t forget energy consumption
Extend useful life of product
Involve entire supply chain
Change paradigm of design
Source: Adapted from the Business
Social Responsibility Web site,
www.bsr.org,
www.bsr.org, accessed April 1, 2007.

4-217
Quality Function
Deployment (QFD)
Translates voice of customer into technical
design requirements
Displays requirements in matrix diagrams
first matrix called “house of quality”
series of connected houses

4-218
House of Quality
Importance

5
TradeTrade-off matrix
3
Design
characteristics

1

4

2

Customer
requirements

Relationship
matrix

Competitive
assessment

6

Target values

4-219
Competitive Assessment
of Customer
Requirements
Competitive Assessment
Customer Requirements

1

2

3

9

Removes wrinkles

8

AB

Doesn’t stick to fabric

6

X

BA

8

AB

Doesn’t spot fabric

6

X AB

Doesn’t scorch fabric

9

A XB

Heats quickly

6

Automatic shut-off
shut-

3

Quick cool-down
cool-

3

X

Doesn’t break when dropped

5

AB

Doesn’t burn when touched

5

AB X

Not too heavy

8

X

5

X

Provides enough steam

Irons
well

Presses quickly

Easy and
safe to use

B A

4

X

X

B

X

A
ABX
ABX

A B
X
4-220

A

B
Presses quickly

-

+

Doesn’t stick to fabric

-

Provides enough steam

+

+

+ +
-

-

-

+ - +
+

-

Automatic shut-off
shut-

+

Quick cool-down
coolDoesn’t break when dropped

-

- +

+ + +

Doesn’t burn when touched
Not too heavy

+
+ -

-

- +

+
+
+ + +
-4-221

Automatic shutoff

Protective cover for soleplate

+ +

+ + +
+ -

Heats quickly

Time to go from 450º to 100º

+ + +

+

Doesn’t scorch fabric

Time required to reach 450º F

Flow of water from holes

Size of holes

Number of holes

-

+

Doesn’t spot fabric

Easy and
safe to use

Material used in soleplate

Thickness of soleplate

- + + +

Removes wrinkles
Irons
well

Size of soleplate

Weight of iron

Customer Requirements

Energy needed to press

From Customer
Requirements
to Design
Characteristics
4-222

Automatic shutoff

Protective cover for soleplate

Time to go from 450º to 100º

Time required to reach 450º

Flow of water from holes

+

Size of holes

-

Number of holes

Material used in soleplate

Thickness of soleplate

Size of soleplate

Weight of iron

Energy needed to press

Tradeoff Matrix
+

+
Units of measure

lb

in.

cm

ty

ea

Iron A

3

1.4

8x4

2

SS

27

15

0.5

45

500

N

Y

Iron B

4

1.2

8x4

1

MG

27

15

0.3

35

350

N

Y

Our Iron (X)

2

1.7

9x5

4

T

35

15

0.7

50

600

N

Y

Estimated impact

3

4

4

4

5

4

3

2

5

5

3

0

Estimated cost

3

3

3

3

4

3

3

3

4

4

5

2

1.2

8x5

3

SS

30

30

500

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

Objective
measures

ft-lb
ft-

Targets
Design changes

mm oz/s sec sec Y/N Y/N

4-223

Automatic shutoff

Protective cover for soleplate

Time to go from 450º to 100º

Time required to reach 450º

Flow of water from holes

Size of holes

Number of holes

Material used in soleplate

Thickness of soleplate

Size of soleplate

Weight of iron

Energy needed to press

Targeted Changes in
Design
Completed
House of Quality

SS = Silverstone
MG = Mirorrglide
T = Titanium

4-224
A Series of Connected
QFD Houses
Part
characteristics

Process
characteristics

A-2
Parts
deployment

Operations

A-3
Process
planning

Process
characteristics

House
of
quality

Part
characteristics

A-1
Product
characteristics

Customer
requirements

Product
characteristics

A-4

Operating
requirements
4-225
Benefits of QFD
Promotes better understanding of
customer demands
Promotes better understanding of
design interactions
Involves manufacturing in design
process
Provides documentation of design
process

4-226
Design for Robustness
Robust product
designed to withstand variations in environmental and
operating conditions

Robust design
yields a product or service designed to withstand
variations

Controllable factors
design parameters such as material used, dimensions,
and form of processing

Uncontrollable factors
user’s control (length of use, maintenance, settings, etc.)

4-227
Design for Robustness (cont.)
Tolerance
allowable ranges of variation in the dimension of a
part

Consistency
consistent errors are easier to correct than random
errors
parts within tolerances may yield assemblies that
are not within limits
consumers prefer product characteristics near their
ideal values
4-228
Quantifies customer
preferences toward
quality
Emphasizes that
customer preferences
are strongly oriented
toward consistently
Design for Six Sigma
(DFSS)

Quality Loss

Taguchi’s Quality Loss
Function

Lower
tolerance
limit

Target

Upper
tolerance
limit

4-229
Copyright 2009 John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
All rights reserved. Reproduction or translation of this work beyond
that permitted in section 117 of the 1976 United States Copyright
Act without express permission of the copyright owner is unlawful.
Request for further information should be addressed to the
Permission Department, John Wiley & Sons, Inc. The purchaser
may make back-up copies for his/her own use only and not for
backdistribution or resale. The Publisher assumes no responsibility for
errors, omissions, or damages caused by the use of these
programs or from the use of the information herein.

4-230
Chapter 5
Service Design
Operations Management
Roberta Russell & Bernard W. Taylor, III
Lecture Outline
Service Economy
Characteristics of Services
Service Design Process
Tools for Service Design
Waiting Line Analysis for
Service Improvement
5-232
Service Economy

Source: U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics, IBM Almaden Research Center
5-233
5-234
Characteristics of Services
Services
acts, deeds, or performances

Goods
tangible objects

Facilitating services
accompany almost all purchases of goods

Facilitating goods
accompany almost all service purchases
5-235
Continuum from
Goods to Services

Source: Adapted from Earl W. Sasser, R.P. Olsen, and D. Daryl Wyckoff,
Management of Service Operations (Boston: Allyn Bacon, 1978), p.11.
5-236
Characteristics
of Services (cont.)
Services are
intangible
Service output is
variable
Services have higher
customer contact
Services are
perishable

Service inseparable
from delivery
Services tend to be
decentralized and
dispersed
Services are
consumed more often
than products
Services can be easily
emulated

5-237
Service
Design
Process

5-238
Service Design
Process (cont.)
Service concept
purpose of a service; it defines target
market and customer experience

Service package
mixture of physical items, sensual
benefits, and psychological benefits

Service specifications
performance specifications
design specifications
delivery specifications
5-239
Service Process Matrix

5-240
High v. Low Contact
Services
Design
Decision
Facility
location
Facility
layout

High-Contact Service
Convenient to
customer
Must look presentable,
accommodate
customer needs, and
facilitate interaction
with customer

Low-Contact Service
Near labor or
transportation source
Designed for efficiency

Source: Adapted from R. Chase, N. Aquilano, and R. Jacobs, Operations Management for Compensative
Advantage (New York:McGraw-Hill, 2001), p. 210

5-241
High v. Low Contact
Services (cont.)
Design
Decision

High-Contact Service

Quality
control

More variable since
customer is involved in
process; customer
expectations and
perceptions of quality
may differ; customer
present when defects
occur

Capacity

Excess capacity required
to handle peaks in
demand

Low-Contact
Service
Measured against
established
standards; testing
and rework possible
to correct defects

Planned for average
demand

Source: Adapted from R. Chase, N. Aquilano, and R. Jacobs, Operations Management for Compensative
Advantage (New York:McGraw-Hill, 2001), p. 210

5-242
High v. Low Contact
Services (cont.)
Design
Decision

High-Contact Service

Low-Contact
Service

Worker skills

Must be able to
interact well with
customers and use
judgment in decision
making

Technical skills

Scheduling

Must accommodate
customer schedule

Customer
concerned only
with completion
date

Source: Adapted from R. Chase, N. Aquilano, and R. Jacobs, Operations Management for Compensative
Advantage (New York:McGraw-Hill, 2001), p. 210

5-243
High v. Low Contact
Services (cont.)
Design
Decision
Service
process

Service package

High-Contact Service

Low-Contact
Service

Mostly front-room
activities; service may
change during delivery
in response to
customer

Mostly back-room
activities;
planned and
executed with
minimal
interference

Varies with customer;
includes environment
as well as actual
service

Fixed, less
extensive

Source: Adapted from R. Chase, N. Aquilano, and R. Jacobs, Operations Management for Compensative
Advantage (New York:McGraw-Hill, 2001), p. 210

5-244
Tools for Service Design
Service blueprinting
line of influence
line of interaction
line of visibility
line of support

Front-office/BackFront-office/Backoffice activities

Servicescapes
space and function
ambient conditions
signs, symbols, and
artifacts

Quantitative
techniques

5-245
Service Blueprinting

5-246
Service Blueprinting (Con’t)

5-247
Elements of
Waiting Line Analysis
Operating characteristics
average values for characteristics that describe
performance of waiting line system

Queue
a single waiting line

Waiting line system
consists of arrivals, servers, and waiting line
structure

Calling population
source of customers; infinite or finite
5-248
5-249
Elements of
Waiting Line Analysis (cont.)
Arrival rate (λ)
(λ
frequency at which customers arrive at a waiting line
according to a probability distribution, usually Poisson

Service time (µ)
(µ
time required to serve a customer, usually described by
negative exponential distribution

Service rate must be shorter than arrival rate (λ < µ)
(λ
Queue discipline
order in which customers are served

Infinite queue
can be of any length; length of a finite queue is limited

5-250
Elements of
Waiting Line Analysis (cont.)
Channels
number of
parallel
servers for
servicing
customers

Phases
number of
servers in
sequence a
customer
must go
through
5-251
Operating Characteristics
Operating characteristics are assumed to
approach a steady state

5-252
Traditional Cost Relationships
as service improves, cost increases

5-253
Psychology of Waiting
Waiting rooms
magazines and
newspapers
televisions

Bank of America

Disney
costumed characters
mobile vendors
accurate wait times
special passes

mirrors

Supermarkets
magazines
“impulse purchases”
5-254
Psychology of Waiting (cont.)
Preferential treatment
Grocery stores: express lanes for customers with
few purchases
Airlines/Car rental agencies: special cards
available to frequent-users or for an additional fee
frequentPhone retailers: route calls to more or less
experienced salespeople based on customer’s
sales history

Critical service providers
services of police department, fire department, etc.
waiting is unacceptable; cost is not important
5-255
Waiting Line Models
SingleSingle-server model
simplest, most basic waiting line structure

Frequent variations (all with Poisson arrival rate)
exponential service times
general (unknown) distribution of service times
constant service times
exponential service times with finite queue
exponential service times with finite calling population

5-256
Basic Single-Server Model
SingleAssumptions
Poisson arrival rate
exponential service
times
firstfirst-come, firstfirstserved queue
discipline
infinite queue length
infinite calling
population

Computations
λ = mean arrival rate
µ = mean service rate
n = number of
customers in line

5-257
Basic Single-Server Model (cont.)
Singleprobability that no customers
are in queuing system

( )

P0 =

λ
1–
µ

λ

L=
µ–λ

probability of n customers in
queuing system

average number of customers
in waiting line

( ) ( )( )

Pn =

λ

µ

n

· P0 =

λ

µ

average number of customers
in queuing system

n

1–

λ

µ

Lq =

λ2
µ ( µ – λ)

5-258
Basic Single-Server Model (cont.)
Singleaverage time customer
spends in queuing system
W=

1
µ–λ

=

L
λ

average time customer
spends waiting in line
λ
Wq =
µ ( µ – λ)

probability that server is busy
and a customer has to wait
(utilization factor)
λ
ρ=
µ
probability that server is idle
and customer can be served
I=1– ρ
=1–

λ
µ

= P0
5-259
Basic Single-Server Model
SingleExample

5-260
Basic Single-Server Model
SingleExample (cont.)

5-261
Service Improvement Analysis
waiting time (8 min.) is too long
hire assistant for cashier?
increased service rate

hire another cashier?
reduced arrival rate

Is improved service worth the cost?

5-262
Basic Single-Server Model
SingleExample: Excel

5-263
Advanced Single-Server Models
SingleConstant service times
occur most often when automated equipment or
machinery performs service

Finite queue lengths
occur when there is a physical limitation to length of
waiting line

Finite calling population
number of “customers” that can arrive is limited

5-264
Advanced Single-Server
SingleModels (cont.)

5-265
Basic Multiple-Server Model
Multiplesingle waiting line and service facility with
several independent servers in parallel
same assumptions as single-server model
singlesµ > λ
s = number of servers
servers must be able to serve customers faster than
they arrive

5-266
Basic Multiple-Server Model
Multiple(cont.)
probability that there are no customers in system
1
P0 = n = s – 1
1 λ n
1 λ s
sµ

∑

n=0

()
n!

+

µ

( )( )
s!

µ

sµ - λ

probability of n customers in system
1
λ n
P0, for n > s
n–s
s!s
µ
Pn =
1 λ n
P0, for n ≤ s
n! µ

{

()
()

5-267
Basic Multiple-Server Model
Multiple(cont.)
probability that customer must wait
Pw =

L=

()

1
s!

λ

µ

s

sµ

sµ – λ

λµ (λ/µ)s
(s – 1)! (sµ – λ)2
(s
L
W=
λ

P0

P0 +

Lq = L –

λ
µ

λ
µ

Wq = W –

1
µ

=

Lq
λ

λ
ρ=
sµ
5-268
Basic Multiple-Server Model
MultipleExample

5-269
Basic Multiple-Server Model
MultipleExample (cont.)

5-270
Basic Multiple-Server Model
MultipleExample (cont.)

5-271
Basic Multiple-Server Model
MultipleExample (cont.)

5-272
Basic Multiple-Server Model
MultipleExample (cont.)

5-273
Basic Multiple-Server Model
MultipleExample (cont.)
To cut wait time, add another service
representative
now, s = 4

Therefore:

5-274
MultipleMultiple-Server Waiting Line
in Excel

5-275
Chapter 6
Processes and Technology
Operations Management
Roberta Russell & Bernard W. Taylor, III
Lecture Outline
Process Planning
Process Analysis
Process Innovation
Technology Decisions

6-277
Process Planning
Process
a group of related tasks with specific inputs and outputs

Process design
what tasks need to be done and how they are
coordinated among functions, people, and
organizations

Process strategy
an organization’s overall approach for physically
producing goods and services

Process planning
converts designs into workable instructions for
manufacture or delivery
6-278
Process Strategy
Vertical integration
extent to which firm will produce inputs and control outputs of
each stage of production process

Capital intensity
mix of capital (i.e., equipment, automation) and labor
resources used in production process

Process flexibility
ease with which resources can be adjusted in response to
changes in demand, technology, products or services, and
resource availability

Customer involvement
role of customer in production process

6-279
Outsourcing
Cost
Capacity
Quality

Speed
Reliability
Expertise

6-280
Process Selection
Projects
one-of-a-kind production of a product to customer order

Batch production
processes many different jobs at the same time in groups or
batches

Mass production
produces large volumes of a standard product for a mass
market

Continuous production
used for very-high volume commodity products

6-281
Sourcing Continuum

6-282
ProductProduct-Process Matrix

Source: Adapted from Robert Hayes and Steven Wheelwright, Restoring the Competitive Edge
Competing through Manufacturing (New York, John Wiley & Sons, 1984), p. 209.

6-283
Types of Processes
PROJECT

Type of
product

Type of
customer

Product
demand

BATCH

MASS

CONT.
CONT.

Unique

Made-toMade-toorder

Made-toMade-tostock

Commodity

(customized)

(standardized )

Few
individual
customers

Mass
market

Mass
market

Fluctuates

Stable

Very stable

One-atOne-at-atime

Infrequent

Source: Adapted from R. Chase, N. Aquilano, and R. Jacobs, Operations Management for Competitive
Advantage (New York:McGraw-Hill, 2001), p. 210
York:McGraw-

6-284
Types of Processes (cont.)
PROJECT

BATCH

MASS

CONT.
CONT.

Demand
volume

Very low

Low to
medium

High

Very high

No. of
different
products

Infinite
variety

Many, varied

Few

Very few

Production
system

LongLong-term
project

Discrete, job
shops

Repetitive,
assembly
lines

Continuous,
process
industries

Source: Adapted from R. Chase, N. Aquilano, and R. Jacobs, Operations Management for Competitive
Advantage (New York:McGraw-Hill, 2001), p. 210
York:McGraw-

6-285
Types of Processes (cont.)
PROJECT

BATCH

MASS

CONT.
CONT.

Equipment

Varied

GeneralGeneralpurpose

SpecialSpecialpurpose

Highly
automated

Primary
type of
work

Specialized
contracts

Fabrication

Assembly

Mixing,
treating,
refining

Worker
skills

Experts,
craftscraftspersons

Wide range
of skills

Limited
range of
skills

Equipment
monitors

Source: Adapted from R. Chase, N. Aquilano, and R. Jacobs, Operations Management for Competitive
Advantage (New York:McGraw-Hill, 2001), p. 210
York:McGraw-

6-286
Types of Processes (cont.)
PROJECT

Advantages

DisDisadvantages

Examples

BATCH

MASS

CONT.
CONT.

Custom work,
latest technology

Flexibility,
quality

Efficiency,
speed,
low cost

Highly efficient,
large capacity,
ease of control

NonNon-repetitive,
small customer
base, expensive

Costly, slow,
difficult to
manage

Capital
investment;
lack of
responsiveness

Difficult to change,
far-reaching errors,
farlimited variety

Construction,
shipbuilding,
spacecraft

Machine shops,
print shops,
bakeries,
education

Automobiles,
televisions,
computers,
fast food

Paint, chemicals,
foodstuffs

Source: Adapted from R. Chase, N. Aquilano, and R. Jacobs, Operations Management for Competitive Advantage (New
York:McGrawYork:McGraw-Hill, 2001), p. 210

6-287
Process Selection with
BreakBreak-Even Analysis
examines cost trade-offs associated with demand volume
Cost
Fixed costs
constant regardless of the number of units produced

Variable costs
vary with the volume of units produced

Revenue
price at which an item is sold
Total revenue
is price times volume sold
Profit
difference between total revenue and total cost
6-288
Process Selection with
BreakBreak-Even Analysis (cont.)
Total cost = fixed cost + total variable cost
TC = cf + vcv
Total revenue = volume x price
TR = vp
Profit = total revenue - total cost
Z = TR – TC = vp - (cf + vcv)

6-289
Process Selection with
BreakBreak-Even Analysis (cont.)
TR = TC
vp = cf + vcv
vp - vcv = cf
v ( p - c v) = c f
v=

cf

p - cv

Solving for Break-Even Point (Volume)
Break6-290
BreakBreak-Even Analysis: Example
Fixed cost = cf = $2,000
Variable cost = cv = $5 per raft
Price = p = $10 per raft
BreakBreak-even point is
v=

cf
p - cv

=

2000

= 400 rafts

10 - 5
6-291
BreakBreak-Even Analysis: Graph
Dollars

Total
cost
line

$3,000 —

$2,000 —

$1,000 —
Total
revenue
line
400
BreakBreak-even point

Units

6-292
Process Plans
Set of documents that detail manufacturing
and service delivery specifications
assembly charts
operations sheets
quality-control check-sheets

6-293
Process Selection
Process A

Process B

$2,000 + $5v = $10,000 + $3v
$5v
$3v
$2v = $8,000
$2v
v = 4,000 rafts

Below or equal to 4,000, choose A
Above or equal to 4,000, choose B
6-294
Process Analysis

•
systematic
examinatio
n of all
aspects of
process to
improve
operation

6-295
An Operations Sheet for a Plastic Part
Part name

Crevice Tool

Part No.

52074

Usage

Hand-Vac
Hand-

Assembly No. 520
Oper. No.

Description

Dept.

Machine/Tools

Time

10

Pour in plastic bits

041

Injection molding

2 min

20

Insert mold

041

#076

2 min

30

Check settings
& start machine

041

113, 67, 650

20 min

40

Collect parts & lay flat

051

Plastics finishing

10 min

50

Remove & clean mold

042

Parts washer

15 min

60

Break off rough edges

051

Plastics finishing

10 min

6-296
Process Analysis
Building a flowchart
Determine objectives
Define process boundaries
Define units of flow
Choose type of chart
Observe process and collect data
Map out process
Validate chart
6-297
Process Flowcharts
look at manufacture of product or delivery
of service from broad perspective
Incorporate
nonproductive activities (inspection,
transportation, delay, storage)
productive activities (operations)

6-298
Process Flowchart
Symbols
Operations
Inspection
Transportation
Delay
Storage
6-299
Process
Flowchart
of Apple
Processin
g
6-300
6-301
Simple Value Chain Flowchart

6-302
Process Innovation
Continuous improvement
refines the breakthrough

Breakthrough
Improvement

Total redesign
of a process for
breakthrough
improvements

Continuous improvement activities
peak; time to reengineer process

6-303
From Function to Process

Sales

Manufacturing

Purchasing

Accounting

Product Development
Order Fulfillment
Supply Chain Management
Customer Service
Function

Process

6-304
Process Innovation

Customer
Requirements

Strategic
Directives

Baseline Data
Benchmark
Data

Goals for Process
Performance
High - level
Process map

Innovative
Ideas

Detailed
Process Map

Model
Validation

Pilot Study
of New Design

No

Goals
Met?

Yes

Design
Principles
Key
Performance
Measures

Full Scale
Implementation

6-305
HighHigh-Level Process Map

6-306
Principles for Redesigning
Processes
Remove waste, simplify, and consolidate
similar activities
Link processes to create value
Let the swiftest and most capable enterprise
execute the process
Flex process for any time, any place, any way
Capture information digitally at the source and
propagate it through process
6-307
Principles for Redesigning
Processes (cont.)
Provide visibility through fresher and richer
information about process status
Fit process with sensors and feedback loops
that can prompt action
Add analytic capabilities to process
Connect, collect, and create knowledge around
process through all who touch it
Personalize process with preferences and
habits of participants

6-308
Techniques for Generating
Innovative Ideas
Vary the entry point to a problem
in trying to untangle fishing lines, it’s best to start
from the fish, not the poles

Draw analogies
a previous solution to an old problem might work

Change your perspective
think like a customer
bring in persons who have no knowledge of
process

6-309
Techniques for Generating
Innovative Ideas (cont.)
Try inverse brainstorming
what would increase cost
what would displease the customer

Chain forward as far as possible
if I solve this problem, what is the next problem

Use attribute brainstorming
how would this process operate if. . .
our workers were mobile and flexible
there were no monetary constraints
we had perfect knowledge

6-310
Technology Decisions
Financial justification of technology
Purchase cost
Operating Costs
Annual Savings
Revenue Enhancement
Replacement Analysis
Risk and Uncertainty
Piecemeal Analysis

6-311
Components of e-Manufacturing
e-

6-312
A Technology Primer
Product Technology
Computer-aided
design (CAD)
Group technology
(GT)
Computer-aided
engineering (CAE)
Collaborative
product commerce
(CPC)

Creates and communicates designs
electronically
Classifies designs into families for easy
retrieval and modification
Tests functionality of CAD designs
electronically
Facilitates electronic communication and
exchange of information among designers
and suppliers

6-313
A Technology Primer (cont.)
Product Technology
Product data
management
(PDM)
Product life cycle
management
(PLM)
Product
configuration

Keeps track of design specs and revisions
for the life of the product
Integrates decisions of those involved in
product development, manufacturing, sales,
customer service, recycling, and disposal
Defines products “configured” by customers
who have selected among various options,
usually from a Web site

6-314
A Technology Primer (cont.)
Process Technology
Standard for
exchange of
product model data
(STEP)
Computer-aided
design and
manufacture
(CAD/CAM)
Computer aided
process (CAPP)
E-procurement

Set standards for communication among
different CAD vendors; translates CAD data
into requirements for automated inspection
and manufacture
Electronic link between automated design
(CAD) and automated manufacture (CAM)
Generates process plans based on
database of similar requirements
Electronic purchasing of items from eemarketplaces, auctions, or company
websites

6-315
A Technology Primer (cont.)
Manufacturing Technology
Computer
numerically control
(CNC)
Flexible
manufacturing
system (FMS)
Robots
Conveyors

Machines controlled by software code to perform a
variety of operations with the help of automated
tool changers; also collects processing information
and quality data
A collection of CNC machines connected by an
automated material handling system to produce a
wide variety of parts
Manipulators that can be programmed to perform
repetitive tasks; more consistent than workers but
less flexible
FixedFixed-path material handling; moves items along a
belt or overhead chain; “reads” packages and
diverts them to different directions; can be very fast

6-316
A Technology Primer (cont.)
Manufacturing Technology
Automatic guided
vehicle (AGV)

A driverless truck that moves material along a
specified path; directed by wire or tape embedded
in floor or by radio frequencies; very flexible

Automated storage
and retrieval system
(ASRS)

An automated warehouse—some 26 stores high—
warehouse—
high—
in which items are placed in a carousel-type
carouselstorage system and retrieved by fast-moving
faststacker cranes; controlled by computer

Process Control

Continuous monitoring of automated equipment;
makes real-time decisions on ongoing operation,
realmaintenance, and quality

Computer-integrated
manufacturing (CIM)

Automated manufacturing systems integrated
through computer technology; also called eemanufacturing

6-317
A Technology Primer (cont.)
Information Technology
Business – to –
Business (B2B)
Business – to –
Consumer (B2C)
Internet

Electronic transactions between businesses
usually over the Internet

Intranet

Communication networks internal to an
organization; can be password (i.e., firewall)
protected sites on the Internet

Extranet

Electronic transactions between businesses and
their customers usually over the Internet
A global information system of computer networks
that facilitates communication and data transfer

Intranets connected to the Internet for shared
access with select suppliers, customers, and
trading partners
6-318
A Technology Primer (cont.)
Information Technology
Bar Codes
Radio Frequency
Identification tags
(RFID)
Electronic data
interchange (EDI)
Extensive markup
language (XML)
Enterprise
resource planning
(ERP)

A series of vertical lines printed on most packages that
identifies item and other information when read by a
scanner
An integrated circuit embedded in a tag that can send
and receive information; a twenty-first century bar code
twentywith read/write capabilities
A computer-to-computer exchange of business
computer-todocuments over a proprietary network; very expensive
and inflexible
A programming language that enables computer – to computer communication over the Internet by tagging
data before its is sent
Software for managing basic requirements of an
enterprise, including sales & marketing, finance and
accounting, production & materials management, and
human resources

6-319
A Technology Primer (cont.)
Information Technology
Supply chain
management (SCM)
Customer relationship
management (CRM)
Decision support
systems (DSS)
Expert systems (ES)
Artificial intelligence
(AI)

Software for managing flow of goods and information
among a network of suppliers, manufacturers and
distributors
Software for managing interactions with customers and
compiling and analyzing customer data
An information system that helps managers make
decisions; includes a quantitative modeling component
and an interactive component for what-if analysis
whatA computer system that uses an expert knowledge base
to diagnose or solve a problem
A field of study that attempts to replicate elements of
human thought in computer processes; includes expert
systems, genetic algorithms, neural networks, and fuzzy
logic

6-320
Chapter 7

Capacity and Facilities
Operations Management
Roberta Russell & Bernard W. Taylor, III
Lecture Outline
Capacity Planning
Basic Layouts
Designing Process Layouts
Designing Service Layouts
Designing Product Layouts
Hybrid Layouts
Capacity
Maximum capability to produce
Capacity planning
establishes overall level of productive
resources for a firm

3 basic strategies for timing of capacity
expansion in relation to steady growth in
demand (lead, lag, and average)
Capacity Expansion Strategies
Capacity (cont.)
Capacity increase depends on
volume and certainty of anticipated demand
strategic objectives
costs of expansion and operation

Best operating level
% of capacity utilization that minimizes unit costs

Capacity cushion
% of capacity held in reserve for unexpected
occurrences
Economies of Scale
it costs less per unit to produce high levels of
output
fixed costs can be spread over a larger number of
units
production or operating costs do not increase
linearly with output levels
quantity discounts are available for material
purchases
operating efficiency increases as workers gain
experience
Best Operating Level for a Hotel
Machine Objectives of
Facility Layout
Arrangement of areas within a facility to:
Minimize material-handling
costs
Utilize space efficiently
Utilize labor efficiently
Eliminate bottlenecks
Facilitate communication and
interaction
Reduce manufacturing cycle
time
Reduce customer service time
Eliminate wasted or redundant
movement
Increase capacity

Facilitate entry, exit, and
placement of material, products,
and people
Incorporate safety and security
measures
Promote product and service
quality
Encourage proper maintenance
activities
Provide a visual control of
activities
Provide flexibility to adapt to
changing conditions
BASIC LAYOUTS
Process layouts
group similar activities together
according to process or function they
perform

Product layouts
arrange activities in line according to
sequence of operations for a particular
product or service

Fixed-position layouts
are used for projects in which product
cannot be moved
Process Layout in Services
Women’s
lingerie

Shoes

Housewares

Women’s
dresses

Cosmetics
and jewelry

Children’s
department

Women’s
sportswear

Entry and
display area

Men’s
department
Manufacturing Process Layout
A Product Layout
In

Out
Comparison of Product
and Process Layouts
Product
Description

Type of process

Product
Demand
Volume
Equipment

Process

Sequential
arrangement of
activities
Continuous, mass
production, mainly
assembly

Functional
grouping of
activities
Intermittent, job
shop, batch
production, mainly
fabrication
Varied, made to
order
Fluctuating
Low
General purpose

Standardized, made
to stock
Stable
High
Special purpose
Comparison of Product
and Process Layouts
Product
Workers
Inventory
Storage space
Material handling
Aisles
Scheduling
Layout decision
Goal
Advantage

Limited skills
Low in-process, high
infinished goods
Small
Fixed path (conveyor)
Narrow
Part of balancing
Line balancing
Equalize work at each
station
Efficiency

Process
Varied skills
High in-process, low
infinished goods
Large
Variable path (forklift)
Wide
Dynamic
Machine location
Minimize material
handling cost
Flexibility
FixedFixed-Position Layouts
Typical of projects in
which product produced
is too fragile, bulky, or
heavy to move
Equipment, workers,
materials, other
resources brought to the
site
Low equipment utilization
Highly skilled labor
Typically low fixed cost
Often high variable costs
7-335
Designing Process Layouts
Goal: minimize material handling costs
Block Diagramming
minimize nonadjacent loads
use when quantitative data is available

Relationship Diagramming
based on location preference between areas
use when quantitative data is not available
Block Diagramming
Unit load
quantity in which
material is normally
moved

Nonadjacent load
distance farther
than the next block

STEPS
create load summary chart
calculate composite (two
way) movements
develop trial layouts
minimizing number of
nonadjacent loads
Block Diagramming: Example
Load Summary Chart

4

2

5

3

DEPARTMENT

Department 1

1

FROM/TO

2

3

100
—

50
200
—

1
2
3
4
5

—
60

100
50

4
50
40
—

5

50
60
—
Block Diagramming:
Example (cont.)
2
2
1
1
4
3
2
3
1
1

3
4
3
2
5
5
5
4
4
5

200 loads
150 loads
110 loads
100 loads
60 loads
50 loads
50 loads
40 loads
0 loads
0 loads

Nonadjacent Loads:
110+40=150
0
110

1

4
Grid 1
2

100

2

150
200

3
4

150 200 50
50 40 60
50
110
50
60

3
5

5

40
Block Diagramming:
Example (cont.)
Block Diagram
type of schematic layout diagram; includes space requirements
(a) Initial block diagram

1

(b) Final block diagram

2

4

3

5

1

4
2

3

5
Relationship Diagramming

Schematic diagram that
uses weighted lines to
denote location preference
Muther’s grid
format for displaying
manager preferences for
department locations
Relationship Diagramming: Excel
Relationship A Absolutely necessary
E Especially important
Diagramming: Example
I Important
O Okay
U Unimportant
X Undesirable

Production
O
A

Offices
U

I

A
Shipping and
receiving

U

U
O

O
O

A

X
U

Locker room
Toolroom

E

O

Stockroom
Relationship Diagrams: Example (cont.)
(a) Relationship diagram of original layout

Offices

Stockroom

Locker
room

Toolroom

Shipping
and
receiving
Key: A
E
I
Production
O
U
X
Relationship Diagrams: Example (cont.)
(b) Relationship diagram of revised layout

Stockroom

Shipping
and
receiving

Offices

Toolroom

Production

Locker
room

Key: A
E
I
O
U
X
Computerized layout
Solutions
CRAFT
Computerized Relative Allocation of Facilities
Technique

CORELAP
Computerized Relationship Layout Planning

PROMODEL and EXTEND
visual feedback
allow user to quickly test a variety of scenarios

Three-D modeling and CAD
integrated layout analysis
available in VisFactory and similar software
Designing Service
Layouts
Must be both attractive and functional
Types
Free flow layouts
encourage browsing, increase impulse purchasing, are flexible
and visually appealing

Grid layouts
encourage customer familiarity, are low cost, easy to clean and
secure, and good for repeat customers

Loop and Spine layouts
both increase customer sightlines and exposure to products,
while encouraging customer to circulate through the entire
store
Types of Store Layouts
Designing Product
Layouts
Objective
Balance the assembly line

Line balancing
tries to equalize the amount of work at each
workstation

Precedence requirements
physical restrictions on the order in which operations
are performed

Cycle time
maximum amount of time a product is allowed to
spend at each workstation
Cycle Time Example

Cd =
Cd =

production time available
desired units of output
(8 hours x 60 minutes / hour)
(120 units)

Cd =

480
120

= 4 minutes
Flow Time vs Cycle Time
Cycle time = max time spent at any station
Flow time = time to complete all stations
1

2

3

4 minutes

4 minutes

4 minutes

Flow time = 4 + 4 + 4 = 12 minutes
Cycle time = max (4, 4, 4) = 4 minutes
Efficiency of Line and Balance Delay
Efficiency

Minimum number of
workstations

i

∑
E=

i=1

nCa

i

∑

ti

N=

ti

i=1

Cd

where

ti
j
n
Ca
Cd

= completion time for element i
= number of work elements
= actual number of workstations
= actual cycle time
= desired cycle time

Balance
delay
total idle
time of line
calculated
as (1 efficiency)
Line Balancing Procedure
1. Draw and label a precedence diagram
2. Calculate desired cycle time required for line
3. Calculate theoretical minimum number of
workstations
4. Group elements into workstations, recognizing cycle
time and precedence constraints
5. Calculate efficiency of line
6. Determine if theoretical minimum number of
workstations or an acceptable efficiency level has
been reached. If not, go back to step 4.
Line Balancing: Example
WORK ELEMENT
A
B
C
D

PRECEDENCE

TIME (MIN)

—
A
A
B, C

0.1
0.2
0.4
0.3

Press out sheet of fruit
Cut into strips
Outline fun shapes
Roll up and package

B

0.2

0.1 A

D
C

0.4

0.3
Line Balancing: Example (cont.)
WORK ELEMENT
A
B
C
D

PRECEDENCE

TIME (MIN)

—
A
A
B, C

0.1
0.2
0.4
0.3

Press out sheet of fruit
Cut into strips
Outline fun shapes
Roll up and package

Cd =

N=

40 hours x 60 minutes / hour

=

6,000 units
0.1 + 0.2 + 0.3 + 0.4
0.4

2400

= 0.4 minute

6000
=

1.0
0.4

= 2.5

3 workstations
Line Balancing: Example (cont.)
WORKSTATION
1
2
3

ELEMENT
A
B
C
D
B

REMAINING
TIME
0.3
0.1
0.0
0.1
0.2

0.1 A

Cd = 0.4
N = 2.5
D

C

0.4

REMAINING
ELEMENTS
B, C
C, D
D
none

0.3
Line Balancing: Example (cont.)
Work
station 1

Work
station 3

A, B

C

D

0.3
minute

E=

Work
station 2

0.4
minute

0.3
minute

0.1 + 0.2 + 0.3 + 0.4
3(0.4)

=

1.0
1.2

Cd = 0.4
N = 2.5

= 0.833 = 83.3%
Computerized Line
Balancing
Use heuristics to assign tasks to
workstations
Longest operation time
Shortest operation time
Most number of following tasks
Least number of following tasks
Ranked positional weight
Hybrid Layouts
Cellular layouts
group dissimilar machines into work centers (called cells)
that process families of parts with similar shapes or
processing requirements

Production flow analysis (PFA)
reorders part routing matrices to identify families of parts
with similar processing requirements

Flexible manufacturing system
automated machining and material handling systems
which can produce an enormous variety of items

Mixed-model assembly line
processes more than one product model in one line
Cellular Layouts
1. Identify families of parts with similar
flow paths
2. Group machines into cells based on
part families
3. Arrange cells so material movement
is minimized
4. Locate large shared machines at
point of use
Parts Families

A family of
similar parts

A family of related
grocery items
Original Process Layout
Assembly

4

6

7

8

5
2

A

B

12

10
3

1

9

C

11

Raw materials
Part Routing Matrix
Parts

1

2

A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H

x

x

Figure 5.8

8

x

3

Machines
4 5 6 7

x
x

x
x

x

x
x

10 11 12
x

x

x

x
x
x
x

9

x

x
x

x

x

x
x
x

x
x

x

x
x
Revised Cellular Layout
Assembly

8

10

9

12
11

4

Cell 1

Cell 2

6

Cell 3
7

2

1

3

A B C
Raw materials

5
Reordered Routing Matrix
Parts

1

2

4

Machines
8 10 3 6

A
D
F
C
G
B
H
E

x
x
x

x
x

x
x
x

x
x
x

9

5

7

11 12

x
x

x
x
x
x

x
x
x
x

x
x

x
x
x

x

x

x
x
Operationsmanagement 919slidespresentation-090928145353-phpapp01
Advantages and Disadvantages
of Cellular Layouts
Advantages
Reduced material
handling and transit time
Reduced setup time
Reduced work-inwork-inprocess inventory
Better use of human
resources
Easier to control
Easier to automate

Disadvantages
Inadequate part families
Poorly balanced cells
Expanded training and
scheduling of workers
Increased capital
investment
Automated Manufacturing Cell

Source: J. T. Black, “Cellular
Manufacturing Systems Reduce
Setup Time, Make Small Lot
Production Economical.” Industrial
Engineering (November 1983)
Flexible Manufacturing
Systems (FMS)
FMS consists of numerous programmable
machine tools connected by an automated
material handling system and controlled by
a common computer network
FMS combines flexibility with efficiency
FMS layouts differ based on
variety of parts that the system can process
size of parts processed
average processing time required for part
completion
Full-Blown FMS
Mixed Model
Assembly Lines
Produce multiple models in any order
on one assembly line
Issues in mixed model lines
Line balancing
U-shaped lines
Flexible workforce
Model sequencing
Balancing U-Shaped Lines
UPrecedence diagram:
B

Cycle time = 12 min

C

D

A

E

(a) Balanced for a straight line

(b) Balanced for a U-shaped line
U-

A,B

C,D

E

9 min

12 min

3 min

Efficiency =

24
3(12)

=

24

A,B

= .6666 = 66.7 %

C,D

36
E

Efficiency =

24
2(12)

=

24
24

= 100 % 12 min

12 min
Chapter 7 Supplement
Facility Location Models
Operations Management
Roberta Russell & Bernard W. Taylor, III
Lecture Outline
Types of Facilities
Site Selection: Where to Locate
Location Analysis Techniques

Supplement 7-374
7-
Types of Facilities
HeavyHeavy-manufacturing facilities
large, require a lot of space, and are
expensive

LightLight-industry facilities
smaller, cleaner plants and usually less
costly

Retail and service facilities
smallest and least costly
Supplement 7-375
7-
Factors in Heavy Manufacturing
Location
Construction costs
Land costs
Raw material and finished goods
shipment modes
Proximity to raw materials
Utilities
Means of waste disposal
Labor availability
Supplement 7-376
7-
Factors in Light Industry
Location
Land costs
Transportation costs
Proximity to markets
depending on delivery requirements
including frequency of delivery
required by customer

Supplement 7-377
7-
Factors in Retail Location

Proximity to customers
Location is everything

Supplement 7-378
7-
Site Selection: Where to Locate
Infrequent but important
being “in the right place at the
right time”

Must consider other factors,
especially financial
considerations
Location decisions made more
often for service operations
than manufacturing facilities
Location criteria for service
access to customers

Location criteria for
manufacturing facility
nature of labor force
labor costs
proximity to suppliers and
markets
distribution and
transportation costs
energy availability and cost
community infrastructure
quality of life in community
government regulations and
taxes

Supplement 7-379
7-
Global Location Factors
Government stability
Government regulations
Political and economic
systems
Economic stability and growth
Exchange rates
Culture
Climate
Export/import regulations,
duties and tariffs

Raw material availability
Number and proximity of
suppliers
Transportation and
distribution system
Labor cost and education
Available technology
Commercial travel
Technical expertise
CrossCross-border trade
regulations
Group trade agreements
Supplement 7-380
7-
Regional and Community
Location Factors in U.S.
Labor (availability,
education, cost, and
unions)
Proximity of customers
Number of customers
Construction/leasing
costs
Land cost

Modes and quality of
transportation
Transportation costs
Community government
Local business
regulations
Government services
(e.g., Chamber of
Commerce)

Supplement 7-381
7-
Regional and Community
Location Factors in U.S. (cont.)
Business climate
Community services
Incentive packages
Government regulations
Environmental
regulations
Raw material availability
Commercial travel
Climate

Infrastructure (e.g.,
roads, water, sewers)
Quality of life
Taxes
Availability of sites
Financial services
Community inducements
Proximity of suppliers
Education system

Supplement 7-382
7-
Location Incentives
Tax credits
Relaxed government regulation
Job training
Infrastructure improvement
Money

Supplement 7-383
7-
Geographic Information
Systems (GIS)
Computerized system for storing, managing,
creating, analyzing, integrating, and digitally
displaying geographic, i.e., spatial, data
Specifically used for site selection
enables users to integrate large quantities of
information about potential sites and analyze these
data with many different, powerful analytical tools

Supplement 7-384
7-
GIS Diagram

Supplement 7-385
7-
Location Analysis Techniques
Location factor rating
Center-ofCenter-of-gravity
LoadLoad-distance

Supplement 7-386
7-
Location Factor Rating
Identify important factors
Weight factors (0.00 - 1.00)
Subjectively score each factor (0 - 100)
Sum weighted scores

Supplement 7-387
7-
Location Factor Rating: Example
SCORES (0 TO 100)
LOCATION FACTOR
Labor pool and climate
Proximity to suppliers
Wage rates
Community environment
Proximity to customers
Shipping modes
Air service

WEIGHT

Site 1

Site 2

Site 3

.30
.20
.15
.15
.10
.05
.05

80
100
60
75
65
85
50

65
91
95
80
90
92
65

90
75
72
80
95
65
90

Weighted Score for “Labor pool and climate” for
Site 1 = (0.30)(80) = 24

Supplement 7-388
7-
Location Factor Rating: Example
(cont.)
WEIGHTED SCORES
Site 1

Site 2

Site 3

24.00
20.00
9.00
11.25
6.50
4.25
2.50
77.50

19.50
18.20
14.25
12.00
9.00
4.60
3.25
80.80

27.00
15.00
10.80
12.00
9.50
3.25
4.50
82.05

Site 3 has the
highest factor rating

Supplement 7-389
7-
Location Factor Rating
with Excel and OM Tools

Supplement 7-390
7-
Center-ofCenter-of-Gravity
Technique
Locate facility at center of movement
in geographic area
Based on weight and distance
traveled; establishes grid-map of
gridarea
Identify coordinates and weights
shipped for each location

Supplement 7-391
7-
GridGrid-Map Coordinates
y

n

∑ xiWi
x=

n

∑ Wi
i=1

1 (x1, y1), W1
(x
3 (x3, y3), W3
(x

y3

x1

x2

x3

∑ yiWi

i=1

2 (x2, y2), W2
(x

y2

y1

n

i=1
y=

n

∑ Wi
i=1

where,
x, y = coordinates of new facility
at center of gravity
xi, yi = coordinates of existing
facility i
Wi = annual weight shipped from
facility i

x
Supplement 7-392
7-
Center-ofCenter-of-Gravity Technique:
Example
A

y
700
600

Miles

500

C
(135)

B

200

C

D

200
200
75

100
500
105

250
600
135

500
300
60

(105)

400
300

x
y
Wt

B

D
(60)

A
(75)

100
0

100 200 300 400 500 600 700 x
Miles
Supplement 7-393
7-
Center-ofCenter-of-Gravity Technique:
Example (cont.)
n

∑ xiWi

x=

i=1
n

=

∑ Wi

(200)(75) + (100)(105) + (250)(135) + (500)(60)
75 + 105 + 135 + 60

= 238

i=1
n

∑ yiWi

y=

i=1
n

∑ Wi

=

(200)(75) + (500)(105) + (600)(135) + (300)(60)
75 + 105 + 135 + 60

= 444

i=1

Supplement 7-394
7-
Center-ofCenter-of-Gravity Technique:
Example (cont.)
A

y
700
600

Miles

500

C
(135)

B
(105)

400
300
200

A

x
y
Wt

B

C

D

200
200
75

100
500
105

250
600
135

500
300
60

Center of gravity (238, 444)
D
(60)

(75)

100
0

100 200 300 400 500 600 700 x
Miles
Supplement 7-395
7-
Center-ofCenter-of-Gravity Technique
with Excel and OM Tools

Supplement 7-396
7-
LoadLoad-Distance Technique

Compute (Load x Distance) for each site
Choose site with lowest (Load x Distance)
Distance can be actual or straight-line
straight-

Supplement 7-397
7-
LoadLoad-Distance Calculations
n

∑ ld

LD =

i

i

i=1
where,
LD =

loadload-distance value

li

load expressed as a weight, number of trips or units
being shipped from proposed site and location i
distance between proposed site and location i

=

di

=

di

=

(xi - x)2 + (yi - y)2
(y

where,
(x,y) = coordinates of proposed site
x,y)
(xi , yi) = coordinates of existing facility
Supplement 7-398
7-
LoadLoad-Distance: Example
Potential Sites
Site
X
1
360
2
420
3
250

Y
180
450
400

A
200
200
75

X
Y
Wt

Suppliers
B
C
100
250
500
600
105
135

D
500
300
60

Compute distance from each site to each supplier
Site 1 dA =
dB =

=

(200(200-360)2 + (200-180)2 = 161.2
(200-

(xB - x1)2 + (yB - y1)2 =

(100(100-360)2 + (500-180)2 = 412.3
(500-

(xA - x1)2 + (yA - y1)2

dC = 434.2

dD = 184.4

Supplement 7-399
7-
LoadLoad-Distance: Example (cont.)
Site 2 dA = 333

dB = 323.9 dC = 226.7 dD = 170

Site 3 dA = 206.2 dB = 180.3 dC = 200

dD = 269.3

Compute load-distance
load-

n

LD =

∑ ld
i

i

i=1
Site 1 = (75)(161.2) + (105)(412.3) + (135)(434.2) + (60)(434.4) = 125,063
Site 2 = (75)(333) + (105)(323.9) + (135)(226.7) + (60)(170) = 99,789
Site 3 = (75)(206.2) + (105)(180.3) + (135)(200) + (60)(269.3) = 77,555*

* Choose site 3
Supplement 7-400
7-
LoadLoad-Distance Technique
with Excel and OM Tools

Supplement 7-401
7-
Chapter 8
Human Resources
Operations Management
Roberta Russell & Bernard W. Taylor, III
Lecture Outline
Human Resources and Quality Management
Changing Nature of Human Resources
Management
Contemporary Trends in Human Resources
Management
Employee Compensation
Managing Diversity in Workplace
Job Design
Job Analysis
Learning Curves
8-403
Human Resources and Quality
Management
Employees play important
role in quality management
Malcolm Baldrige National
Quality Award winners have a
pervasive human resource
focus
Employee training and
education are recognized as
necessary long-term
investments

Employees have power to
make decisions that will
improve quality and customer
service
Strategic goals for quality and
customer satisfaction require
teamwork and group
participation

8-404
Changing Nature of Human
Resources Management
Scientific management
Breaking down jobs into
elemental activities and
simplifying job design

Jobs
Comprise a set of tasks,
elements, and job motions
(basic physical
movements)

In a piece-rate wage
system, pay is based on
output

Assembly-line
Production meshed with
principles of scientific
management

Advantages of task
specialization
High output, low costs,
and minimal training

Disadvantages of task
specialization
Boredom, lack of
motivation, and physical
and mental fatigue
8-405
Employee Motivation
Motivation
willingness to work hard because
that effort satisfies an employee
need

Improving Motivation
positive reinforcement and
feedback
effective organization and
discipline
fair treatment of people
satisfaction of employee needs
setting of work-related goals

Improving Motivation
(cont.)
design of jobs to fit employee
work responsibility
empowerment
restructuring of jobs when
necessary
rewards based on company as
well as individual performance
achievement of company goals

8-406
Evolution of Theories of
Employee Motivation
Abraham Maslow’s
Pyramid of Human
Needs

Douglas McGregor’s
Theory X and Theory Y
•Theory X Employee

SelfSelfactualization
Esteem
Social
Safety/Security
Physiological (financial)

• Dislikes work
• Must be coerced
• Shirks responsibility
• Little ambition
• Security top motivator

•Theory Y Employee
• Work is natural
• Self-directed
Self• Controlled
• Accepts responsibility
• Makes good decisions

Frederick Herzberg’s
Hygiene/Motivation
Theories
•Hygiene Factors
• Company policies
• Supervision
• Working conditions
• Interpersonal relations
• Salary, status, security
•Motivation Factors
• Achievement
• Recognition
• Job interest
• Responsibility
• Growth
• Advancement
8-407
Contemporary Trends in
Human Resources Management
Job training
extensive and varied
two of Deming’s 14 points
refer to employee
education and training

Cross Training
an employee learns more
than one job

Job rotation
horizontal movement
between two or more jobs
according to a plan

Empowerment
giving employees
authority to make
decisions

Teams
group of employees work
on problems in their
immediate work area

8-408
Contemporary Trends in Human
Resources Management (cont.)
Job enrichment
vertical enlargement
allows employees control
over their work

horizontal enlargement
an employee is assigned a
complete unit of work with
defined start and end

Flexible time
part of a daily work
schedule in which
employees can choose
time of arrival and
departure

Alternative workplace
nontraditional work location

Telecommuting
employees work
electronically from a
location they choose

Temporary and part-time
employees
mostly in fast-food and
restaurant chains, retail
companies, package delivery
services, and financial firms

8-409
Employee Compensation
Types of pay
hourly wage
the longer someone works, the more s/he is paid

individual incentive or piece rate
employees are paid for the number of units they produce
during the workday

straight salary
common form of payment for management

commissions
usually applied to sales and salespeople

8-410
Employee Compensation (cont.)
Gainsharing
an incentive plan joins employees
in a common effort to achieve
company goals in which they
share in the gains

Profit sharing
sets aside a portion of profits for
employees at year’s end

8-411
Managing Diversity in
Workplace
Workforce has become more diverse
4 out of every 10 people entering workforce during
the decade from 1998 to 2008 will be members of
minority groups
In 2000 U.S. Census showed that some minorities,
primarily Hispanic and Asian, are becoming
majorities

Companies must develop a strategic approach
to managing diversity
8-412
Affirmative Actions vs.
Managing Diversity
Affirmative action
an outgrowth of laws and
regulations
government initiated and
mandated
contains goals and
timetables designed to
increase level of
participation by women
and minorities to attain
parity levels in a
company’s workforce
not directly concerned
with increasing company
success or increasing
profits

Managing diversity
process of creating a work
environment in which all
employees can contribute
to their full potential in
order to achieve a
company’s goals
voluntary in nature, not
mandated
seeks to improve internal
communications and
interpersonal
relationships, resolve
conflict, and increase
product quality,
productivity, and efficiency
8-413
Diversity Management Programs

Education
Awareness
Communication
Fairness
Commitment

8-414
Global Diversity Issues
Cultural, language, geography
significant barriers to managing a globally diverse workforce

E-mails, faxes, Internet, phones, air travel
make managing a global workforce possible but not
necessarily effective

How to deal with diversity?
identify critical cultural elements
learn informal rules of communication
use a third party who is better able to bridge cultural gap
become culturally aware and learn foreign language
teach employees cultural norm of organization
8-415
Attributes of Good Job Design
An appropriate degree of
repetitiveness
An appropriate degree of
attention and mental
absorption
Some employee
responsibility for
decisions and discretion
Employee control over
their own job

Goals and achievement
feedback
A perceived contribution
to a useful product or
service
Opportunities for
personal relationships
and friendships
Some influence over the
way work is carried out
in groups
Use of skills
8-416
Factors in Job Design
Task analysis
how tasks fit together to form a job

Worker analysis
determining worker capabilities and responsibilities for a
job

Environment analysis
physical characteristics and location of a job

Ergonomics
fitting task to person in a work environment

Technology and automation
broadened scope of job design

8-417
Elements of Job Design

8-418
Job Analysis
Method Analysis (work methods)
Study methods used in the work included in
the job to see how it should be done
Primary tools are a variety of charts that
illustrate in different ways how a job or work
process is done

8-419
Process Flowchart Symbols
Operation:
An activity directly contributing to product or service
Transportation:
Moving the product or service from one location to another
Inspection:
Examining the product or service for completeness,
irregularities, or quality
Delay:
Process having to wait
Storage:
Store of the product or service

8-420
Process Flowchart

8-421
Job Photo-Id Cards
PhotoTime
(min)

–1

WorkerWorkerMachine
Chart

Operator

Date
Time
(min)

10/14

Photo Machine

Key in customer data
on card

2.6

Idle

Feed data card in

0.4

Accept card

–2
–3

Idle

Take picture

0.6

Begin photo process

Idle

–4

Position customer for photo 1.0

3.4

Photo/card processed

Inspect card & trim edges

1.2

Idle

–5
–6
–7
–8
–9

8-422
WorkerWorker-Machine Chart: Summary

Summary
Operator Time

%

Photo Machine Time

%

Work

5.8

63

4.8

52

Idle

3.4

37

4.4

48

Total

9.2 min

100%

9.2 Min

100%

8-423
Motion Study
Used to ensure efficiency of motion in
a job
Frank & Lillian Gilbreth
Find one “best way” to do task
Use videotape to study motions

8-424
General Guidelines for
Motion Study
Efficient Use Of Human Body
Work
simplified, rhythmic and symmetric
Hand/arm motions
coordinated and simultaneous
Employ full extent of physical capabilities
Conserve energy
use machines, minimize distances, use momentum
Tasks
simple, minimal eye contact and muscular effort, no
unnecessary motions, delays or idleness
8-425
General Guidelines for
Motion Study
Efficient Arrangement of Workplace
Tools, material, equipment - designated, easily accessible
location
Comfortable and healthy seating and work area

Efficient Use of Equipment
Equipment and mechanized tools enhance worker abilities
Use foot-operated equipment to relieve hand/arm stress
footConstruct and arrange equipment to fit worker use

8-426
Illustrates
improvement rate of
workers as a job is
repeated
Processing time per
unit decreases by a
constant percentage
each time output
doubles

Processing time per unit

Learning Curves

Units produced

8-427
Learning Curves (cont.)
Time required for the nth unit =
tn = t1n b
where:
tn =
t1 =
n=
b=

time required for nth unit produced
time required for first unit produced
cumulative number of units produced
ln r where r is the learning curve percentage
ln 2 (decimal coefficient)

8-428
Learning Curve Effect
Contract to produce 36 computers.
t1 = 18 hours, learning rate = 80%
What is time for 9th, 18th, 36th units?
t9 = (18)(9)ln(0.8)/ln 2 = (18)(9)-0.322
= (18)/(9)0.322 = (18)(0.493) = 8.874hrs
t18 = (18)(18)ln(0.8)/ln 2 = (18)(0.394) = 7.092hrs
t36 = (18)(36)ln(0.8)/ln 2 = (18)(0.315) = 5.674hrs
8-429
Processing time per unit

Learning Curve for Mass
Production Job

End of improvement

Standard
time

Units produced

8-430
Learning Curves (cont.)
Advantages
planning labor
planning budget
determining
scheduling
requirements

Limitations
product modifications
negate learning curve
effect
improvement can derive
from sources besides
learning
industry-derived learning
curve rates may be
inappropriate

8-431
Chapter 8 Supplement
Work Measurement
Operations Management
Roberta Russell & Bernard W. Taylor, III
Lecture Outline
Time Studies
Work Sampling

Supplement 8-433
8-
Work Measurement
Determining how long it takes to do a job
Growing importance in service sector
Services tend to be labor-intensive
laborService jobs are often repetitive

Time studies
Standard time
is time required by an average worker to perform a job once

Incentive piece-rate wage system based on time
piecestudy

Supplement 8-434
8-
Stopwatch Time
Study Basic Steps
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Establish standard job method
Break down job into elements
Study job
Rate worker’s performance (RF)
Compute average time (t)

Supplement 8-435
8-
Stopwatch Time Study
Basic Steps (cont.)
6. Compute normal time
Normal Time = (Elemental average) x (rating factor)
Nt = (t )(RF)
)(RF)
Normal Cycle Time = NT = ΣNt

7. Compute standard time
Standard Time = (normal cycle time) x (1 + allowance factor)
ST = (NT)(1 + AF)
Supplement 8-436
8-
Performing a Time Study
Time Study Observation Sheet
Identification of operation

Date

Sandwich Assembly
Operator
Smith

Approval
Jones

Observer
Russell

Cycles
1
Grasp and lay
1 out bread slices
2

Spread mayonnaise
on both slices

3

Place ham, cheese,
and lettuce on bread

4

t

2

3

4

5

6

5/17

Summary
7

8

9

10

.04 .05 .05 .04 .06 .05 .06 .06 .07 .05

R .04

.06

R .11

.11

RF

Nt

.53 .053 1.05 .056

.44 .79 1.13 1.47 1.83 2.21 2.60 2.98 3.37

t .12

t

.38 .72 1.05 1.40 1.76 2.13 2.50 2.89 3.29

t .07

Σt

R .23 .55

.07 .08 .07 .07

.14

.12

.13

.13

.08

.13

.10

.12

.09

.14

.08

.77 .077 1.00 .077

.14 1.28 1.28 1.10 .141

.93 1.25 1.60 1.96 2.34 2.72 3.12 3.51

Place top on sandwich, t .10 .12 .08 .09 .11 .11 .10 .10 .12 .10 1.03 1.03 1.10 .113
Slice, and stack
R .33 .67 1.01 1.34 1.71 2.07 2.44 2.82 3.24 3.61

Supplement 8-437
8-
Performing a Time
Study (cont.)
Average element time = t =

0.53
Σt
=
= 0.053
10
10

Normal time = (Elemental average)(rating factor)
Nt = ( t )(RF) = (0.053)(1.05) = 0.056
)(RF)
Normal Cycle Time = NT = Σ Nt = 0.387
ST = (NT) (1 + AF) = (0.387)(1+0.15) = 0.445 min

Supplement 8-438
8-
Performing a Time
Study (cont.)
How many sandwiches can be made in 2 hours?
120 min
0.445 min/sandwich

= 269.7 or 270 sandwiches

Example 17.3
Supplement 8-439
8-
Number of Cycles
To determine sample size:
zs
n=

2

eT

where
z = number of standard deviations from the mean in a
normal distribution reflecting a level of statistical
confidence
s=

Σ(xi - x)2 = sample standard deviation from sample
time study
n-1

T = average job cycle time from the sample time study
e = degree of error from true mean of distribution

Supplement 8-440
8-
Number of Cycles: Example
• Average cycle time = 0.361
• Computed standard deviation = 0.03
• Company wants to be 95% confident that computed time is
within 5% of true average time

zs
n=

eT

2

=

2

(1.96)(0.03)
= 10.61 or 11
(0.05)(0.361)

Supplement 8-441
8-
Number of Cycles: Example
(cont.)

Supplement 8-442
8-
Developing Time Standards
without a Time Study
Elemental standard time
files
predetermined job
element times

Predetermined motion
times
predetermined times for
basic micro-motions
micro-

Time measurement units
TMUs = 0.0006 minute
100,000 TMU = 1 hour

Advantages
worker cooperation
unnecessary
workplace uninterrupted
performance ratings
unnecessary
consistent

Disadvantages
ignores job context
may not reflect skills and
abilities of local workers

Supplement 8-443
8-
MTM Table for MOVE
TIME (TMU) WEIGHT ALLOWANCE
DISTANCE
MOVED
(INCHES)
A
3/4 or less
2.0
1
2.5
2
3.6
3
4.9
4
6.1
…
20
19.2

B
2.0
2.9
4.6
5.7
6.9

C
2.0
3.4
5.2
6.7
8.0

18.2

22.1

Hand in
motion
B

Weight
(lb)
up to:

Static
constant
TMU

Dynamic
factor

2.3
2.9
3.6
4.3

2.5

1.00

0

7.5

1.06

2.2

15.6

37.5

1.39

12.5

A. Move object to other hand or against stop
B. Move object to approximate or indefinite location
Source: MTM Association for Standards and Research.
C. Move object to exact location
Supplement 8-444
8-
Work Sampling
Determines the proportion of time a worker
spends on activities
Primary uses of work sampling are to
determine
ratio delay
percentage of time a worker or machine is delayed or idle

analyze jobs that have non-repetitive tasks
non-

Cheaper, easier approach to work
measurement
Supplement 8-445
8-
Steps of Work Sampling
1.
2.

Define job activities
Determine number of observations in work sample
2

n=

z
e p(1 - p)

where
n = sample size (number of sample observations)
z = number of standard deviations from mean for desired
level of confidence
e = degree of allowable error in sample estimate
p = proportion of time spent on a work activity estimated
prior to calculating work sample
Supplement 8-446
8-
Steps of Work Sampling
(cont.)
3. Determine length of sampling
period
4. Conduct work sampling study;
record observations
5. Periodically re-compute number
reof observations

Supplement 8-447
8-
Work Sampling: Example
What percent of time is spent looking up
information? Current estimate is p = 30%
Estimate within +/- 2%, with 95% confidence
+/-

n=

z
e

2

2

p(1 - p) =

1.96

(0.3)(0.7) = 2016.84 or 2017

0.02

After 280 observations, p = 38%

n=

z
e

2

2

p(1 - p) =

1.96

(0.38)(0.62) = 2263

0.02
Supplement 8-448
8-
Supplement 8-449
8-
Chapter 9
Project Management
Operations Management
Roberta Russell & Bernard W. Taylor, III
Lecture Outline
Project Planning
Project Scheduling
Project Control
CPM/PERT
Probabilistic Activity Times
Microsoft Project
Project Crashing and Time-Cost
Trade-off
9-451
Project Management Process
Project
unique, one-time operational activity or effort

9-452
Project Management Process
(cont.)

9-453
Project Management Process
(cont.)

9-454
Project Elements
Objective
Scope
Contract requirements
Schedules
Resources
Personnel
Control
Risk and problem analysis
9-455
Project Team and Project Manager
Project team
made up of individuals from various areas and
departments within a company

Matrix organization
a team structure with members from functional
areas, depending on skills required

Project manager
most important member of project team

9-456
Scope Statement and Work
Breakdown Structure
Scope statement
a document that provides an understanding,
justification, and expected result of a project

Statement of work
written description of objectives of a project

Work breakdown structure (WBS)
breaks down a project into components,
subcomponents, activities, and tasks
9-457
Work Breakdown Structure for Computer Order
Processing System Project

9-458
Responsibility Assignment Matrix
Organizational
Breakdown
Structure (OBS)
a chart that
shows which
organizational
units are
responsible for
work items

Responsibility
Assignment
Matrix (RAM)
shows who is
responsible for
work in a
project
9-459
Global and Diversity Issues in
Project Management
In existing global business environment,
project teams are formed from different
genders, cultures, ethnicities, etc.
In global projects diversity among team
members can add an extra dimension to
project planning
Cultural research and communication are
important elements in planning process

9-460
Project Scheduling
Steps
Define activities
Sequence
activities
Estimate time
Develop schedule

Techniques
Gantt chart
CPM/PERT
Microsoft Project

9-461
Gantt Chart
Graph or bar chart with a bar for each
project activity that shows passage of
time
Provides visual display of project
schedule
Slack
amount of time an activity can be delayed
without delaying the project

9-462
Example of Gantt Chart
0

|

2

|

Month
4

|

6

|

8

|

10

Activity
Design house
and obtain
financing
Lay foundation
Order and
receive
materials
Build house

Select paint

Select carpet

1
Finish work

3

5

7

9

Month
9-463
Project Control
Time management
Cost management
Quality management
Performance management
Earned Value Analysis
a standard procedure for numerically measuring a
project’s progress, forecasting its completion date and
cost and measuring schedule and budget variation

Communication
Enterprise project management

9-464
CPM/PERT
Critical Path Method (CPM)
DuPont & Remington-Rand (1956)
RemingtonDeterministic task times
Activity-onActivity-on-node network construction

Project Evaluation and Review Technique
(PERT)
US Navy, Booz, Allen & Hamilton
Multiple task time estimates; probabilistic
Activity-onActivity-on-arrow network construction
9-465
Project Network
Activity-on-node (AON)
nodes represent activities,
and arrows show
precedence relationships

Node

Activity-on-arrow (AOA)
arrows represent activities
and nodes are events for
points in time

Event

1

2

3

Branch

completion or beginning
of an activity in a project

Dummy
two or more activities
cannot share same start
and end nodes
9-466
AOA Project Network for
a House
3

Lay
foundation
2

1

3
Design house
and obtain
financing

2

Dummy
Build
house

0
1

Order and
receive
materials

4
Select
paint

Finish
work

6

3
1

1

1

7

Select
carpet

5

9-467
Concurrent Activities
Lay foundation

2

3
Lay
foundation

3

Order material

(a) Incorrect precedence
relationship

2

Dummy
2

0
1

4

Order material
(b) Correct precedence
relationship

9-468
AON Network for House
Building Project
Lay foundations

Build house

4
3

2
2
Start

Finish work

7
1

1
3

Design house
and obtain
financing

3
1

Order and receive
materials

5
1

6
1
Select carpet

Select paint

9-469
Critical Path
4
3

2
2
Start

7
1

1
3
3
1

A:
B:
C:
D:

1-2-4-7
3 + 2 + 3 + 1 = 9 months
1-2-5-6-7
3 + 2 + 1 + 1 + 1 = 8 months
1-3-4-7
3 + 1 + 3 + 1 = 8 months
1-3-5-6-7
3 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 = 7 months

5
1

6
1

Critical path
Longest path
through a network
Minimum project
completion time
9-470
Activity Start Times
Start at 5 months

4
3

2
2
Start

Finish at 9 months

7
1

1
3
3
1
Start at 3 months

5
1

Finish

6
1
Start at 6 months

9-471
Node Configuration
Activity number

Earliest start

Earliest finish
1

0

3

3

0

3
Latest finish

Activity duration

Latest start

9-472
Activity Scheduling
Earliest start time (ES)
earliest time an activity can start
ES = maximum EF of immediate predecessors

Forward pass
starts at beginning of CPM/PERT network to
determine earliest activity times

Earliest finish time (EF)
earliest time an activity can finish
earliest start time plus activity time
EF= ES + t

9-473
Earliest Activity Start and
Finish Times
Lay foundations
Build house

2

Start

3

5
4

2

5

8

3
1

0

3

7

1
Design house
and obtain
financing

8

9

1
6
3

3

4

1
Order and receive
materials

6

7

Finish work

1
5

5

6

1

Select carpet

Select pain
9-474
Activity Scheduling (cont.)
Latest start time (LS)
Latest time an activity can start without delaying
critical path time
LS= LF - t

Latest finish time (LF)
latest time an activity can be completed without
delaying critical path time
LF = minimum LS of immediate predecessors

Backward pass
Determines latest activity times by starting at the end
of CPM/PERT network and working forward

9-475
Latest Activity Start and
Finish Times
Lay foundations
Build house

2

3

5

2

Start

3

5

4

5

8

3

5

8

1

0

3

7

8

9

1

0

3

1

8

9

Design house
and obtain
financing

6
3

3

1

4

5

Order and receive
materials

5

5
6

7

7

Finish work

8

6

1

7

1

4

6

Select carpet

Select pain

9-476
Activity Slack
Activity

LS

ES

LF

EF

Slack S

*1

0

0

3

3

0

*2

3

3

5

5

0

3

4

3

5

4

1

*4

5

5

8

8

0

5

6

5

7

6

1

6

7

6

8

7

1

*7

8

8

9

9

0

* Critical Path

9-477
Probabilistic Time Estimates
Beta distribution
a probability distribution traditionally used in
CPM/PERT
Mean (expected time):

Variance:

a + 4m + b
4m

t=

6

σ =
2

b-a

2

6

where
a = optimistic estimate
m = most likely time estimate
b = pessimistic time estimate
9-478
P(time)

P(time)

Examples of Beta Distributions

m

t

b

a

Time

t

m

b

Time

P(time)

a

a

m=t

b

Time
9-479
Project Network with Probabilistic
Time Estimates: Example
Equipment
installation

Equipment testing
and modification

1

4

6,8,10

2,4,12

System
development

Start

System
training

8

2

Manual
testing

3,6,9

5

Position
recruiting

2,3,4

3
1,3,5

3,7,11

1,4,7

Finish

11

9

Job Training

2,4,6

6

System
testing

3,4,5

Final
debugging
10

1,10,13
System
changeover

Orientation

7
2,2,2

9-480
Activity Time Estimates
TIME ESTIMATES (WKS)
ACTIVITY

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

MEAN TIME

VARIANCE

a

m

b

t

б2

6
3
1
2
2
3
2
3
2
1
1

8
6
3
4
3
4
2
7
4
4
10

10
9
5
12
4
5
2
11
6
7
13

8
6
3
5
3
4
2
7
4
4
9

0.44
1.00
0.44
2.78
0.11
0.11
0.00
1.78
0.44
1.00
4.00
9-481
Activity Early, Late Times,
and Slack
ACTIVITY

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

t

б2

ES

EF

LS

LF

S

8
6
3
5
3
4
2
7
4
4
9

0.44
1.00
0.44
2.78
0.11
0.11
0.00
1.78
0.44
1.00
4.00

0
0
0
8
6
3
3
9
9
13
16

8
6
3
13
9
7
5
16
13
17
25

1
0
2
16
6
5
14
9
12
21
16

9
6
5
21
9
9
16
16
16
25
25

1
0
2
8
0
2
11
0
3
8
0
9-482
Earliest, Latest, and Slack
1 0
8 1

Start

2 0
6 0

3 0
3 2

8

9

4 8
5 16 21

3

5

10 13 17

8 9
7 9

6

6

Critical Path

13

5 6
3 6
6 3
4 5

16

7

3
Finish

16

9

9

1 0

13

9 9
4 12 16

11 16 25

9 16 25

9

7 3 5
2 14 16

9-483
Total project variance
σ2 = б22 + б52 + б82 + б112
σ

= 1.00 + 0.11 + 1.78 + 4.00
= 6.89 weeks

9-484
9-485
Probabilistic Network Analysis
Determine probability that project is
completed within specified time
Z=
where

x-µ

σ

µ = tp = project mean time
σ = project standard deviation
x = proposed project time
Z = number of standard deviations x
is from mean
9-486
Normal Distribution of
Project Time
Probability

Zσ

µ = tp

x

Time

9-487
Southern Textile Example
What is the probability that the project is completed within 30
weeks?

P(x ≤ 30 weeks)

σ

2

= 6.89 weeks

σ
σ
µ = 25 x = 30

=

= 2.62 weeks

6.89

Z =
=

x-µ

σ

30 - 25
2.62

= 1.91

Time (weeks)

From Table A.1, (appendix A) a Z score of 1.91 corresponds to a
probability of 0.4719. Thus P(30) = 0.4719 + 0.5000 = 0.9719
9-488
Southern Textile Example
What is the probability that the project is completed within 22
weeks?
P(x ≤ 22 weeks)

σ

2

= 6.89 weeks

σ
σ

x = 22 µ = 25

=

= 2.62 weeks

6.89

Z =
=

x-µ

σ

22 - 25
2.62

= -1.14

Time
(weeks)

From Table A.1 (appendix A) a Z score of -1.14 corresponds to a
probability of 0.3729. Thus P(22) = 0.5000 - 0.3729 = 0.1271
9-489
Microsoft Project
Popular software package for project
management and CPM/PERT analysis
Relatively easy to use

9-490
Microsoft Project (cont.)

9-491
Microsoft Project (cont.)

9-492
Microsoft Project (cont.)

9-493
Microsoft Project (cont.)

9-494
Microsoft Project (cont.)

9-495
Microsoft Project (cont.)

9-496
PERT Analysis with
Microsoft Project

9-497
PERT Analysis with
Microsoft Project (cont.)

9-498
PERT Analysis with
Microsoft Project (cont.)

9-499
Project Crashing
Crashing
reducing project time by expending additional
resources

Crash time
an amount of time an activity is reduced

Crash cost
cost of reducing activity time

Goal
reduce project duration at minimum cost
9-500
Project Network for Building
a House
4

2
8

12

7
4

1
12

3
4

5
4

6
4

9-501
Normal Time and Cost
vs. Crash Time and Cost
$7,000 –
$6,000 –

Crash cost
Crashed activity

$5,000 –

Slope = crash cost per week

$4,000 –
Normal activity

$3,000 –
Normal cost

$2,000 –

0
–

Normal time

Crash time

$1,000 –
|
2

|
4

|
6

|
8

|
10

|
12

|
14

Weeks
9-502
Project Crashing: Example
TOTAL
ALLOWABLE
CRASH TIME
(WEEKS)

NORMAL
TIME
(WEEKS)

CRASH
TIME
(WEEKS)

NORMAL
COST

1

12

7

$3,000

$5,000

5

$400

2

8

5

2,000

3,500

3

500

3

4

3

4,000

7,000

1

3,000

4

12

9

50,000

71,000

3

7,000

5

4

1

500

1,100

3

200

6

4

1

500

1,100

3

200

7

4

3

15,000

22,000

1

7,000

$75,000

$110,700

ACTIVITY

CRASH
COST

CRASH
COST PER
WEEK

9-503
$7000

$500

Project Duration:
36 weeks

4

2
8

$700

12

7
4

1

FROM …

12

$400

3
4

6
4

5
4

$3000

$200

$200
$7000

$500

4

2
8

TO…
Project Duration:
31 weeks
Additional Cost:
$2000

$700

12

7
4

1
7

$400

3
4
$3000

5
4

6
4
$200

$200
9-504
TimeTime-Cost Relationship
Crashing costs increase as project
duration decreases
Indirect costs increase as project
duration increases
Reduce project length as long as
crashing costs are less than indirect
costs

9-505
TimeTime-Cost Tradeoff
Minimum cost = optimal project time

Total project cost

Cost ($)

Indirect cost

Direct cost
Crashing

Time

Project duration
9-506
Chapter 10
Supply Chain Management
Strategy and Design
Operations Management
Roberta Russell & Bernard W. Taylor, III
Lecture Outline
The Management of Supply Chains
Information Technology: A Supply Chain
Enabler
Supply Chain Integration
Supply Chain Management (SCM)
Software
Measuring Supply Chain Performance
10-508
10-
Supply Chains
All facilities, functions, and activities
associated with flow and transformation
of goods and services from raw materials
to customer, as well as the associated
information flows
An integrated group of processes to
“source,” “make,” and “deliver” products

10-509
10-
Supply Chain Illustration
10-510
10-
Supply
Chain
for
Denim
Jeans

10-511
10-
Supply
Chain
for
Denim
Jeans
(cont.)
10-512
10-
Supply Chain Processes

10-513
10-
Supply Chain for Service
Providers
More difficult than manufacturing
Does not focus on the flow of physical goods
Focuses on human resources and support
services
More compact and less extended

10-514
10-
Value Chains
Value chain
every step from raw materials to the eventual end user
ultimate goal is delivery of maximum value to the end user

Supply chain
activities that get raw materials and subassemblies into
manufacturing operation
ultimate goal is same as that of value chain

Demand chain
increase value for any part or all of chain

Terms are used interchangeably
Value
creation of value for customer is important aspect of supply
chain management
10-515
10-
Supply Chain
Management (SCM)
Managing flow of information through supply
chain in order to attain the level of
synchronization that will make it more
responsive to customer needs while lowering
costs
Keys to effective SCM
information
communication
cooperation
trust

10-516
10-
Supply Chain
Uncertainty and Inventory
One goal in SCM:
respond to uncertainty in
customer demand
without creating costly
excess inventory

Negative effects of
uncertainty
lateness
incomplete orders

Inventory
insurance against supply
chain uncertainty

Factors that contribute to
uncertainty
inaccurate demand
forecasting
long variable lead times
late deliveries
incomplete shipments
product changes
batch ordering
price fluctuations and
discounts
inflated orders

10-517
10-
Bullwhip Effect
Occurs when slight demand variability is magnified as information
moves back upstream

10-518
10-
Risk Pooling
Risks are aggregated to reduce the
impact of individual risks
Combine inventories from multiple locations
into one
Reduce parts and product variability,
thereby reducing the number of product
components
Create flexible capacity

10-519
10-
Information Technology:
A Supply Chain Enabler
Information links all aspects of supply chain
E-business
replacement of physical business processes with electronic
ones

Electronic data interchange (EDI)
a computer-to-computer exchange of business documents

Bar code and point-of-sale
data creates an instantaneous computer record of a sale

10-520
10-
Information Technology:
A Supply Chain Enabler (cont.)
Radio frequency identification (RFID)
technology can send product data from an item to a reader
via radio waves

Internet
allows companies to communicate with suppliers,
customers, shippers and other businesses around the world
instantaneously

Build-to-order (BTO)
direct-sell-to-customers model via the Internet; extensive
communication with suppliers and customer

10-521
10-
Supply Chain Enablers

10-522
10-
RFID Capabilities

10-523
10-
RFID Capabilities (cont.)

10-524
10-
Supply Chain Integration
Information sharing among supply chain
members
Reduced bullwhip effect
Early problem detection
Faster response
Builds trust and confidence

Collaborative planning, forecasting,
replenishment, and design
Reduced bullwhip effect
Lower costs (material, logistics, operating, etc.)
Higher capacity utilization
Improved customer service levels

10-525
10-
Supply Chain Integration (cont.)
Coordinated workflow, production and
operations, procurement
Production efficiencies
Fast response
Improved service
Quicker to market

Adopt new business models and
technologies
Penetration of new markets
Creation of new products
Improved efficiency
Mass customization

10-526
10-
Collaborative Planning, Forecasting,
and Replenishment (CPFR)
Process for two or more companies in
a supply chain to synchronize their
demand forecasts into a single plan to
meet customer demand
Parties electronically exchange
past sales trends
point-of-sale data
on-hand inventory
scheduled promotions
forecasts
10-527
10-
Supply Chain Management
(SCM) Software
Enterprise resource planning (ERP)
software that integrates the components of a
company by sharing and organizing
information and data

10-528
10-
Key Performance Indicators
Metrics used to measure supply chain performance
Inventory turnover
Inventory turns =

Cost of goods sold
Average aggregate value of inventory

Total value (at cost) of inventory
Average aggregate value of inventory = ∑ (average inventory for item i ) × (unit value item i )

Days of supply
Days of supply =

Average aggregate value of inventory
(Cost of goods sold)/(365 days)

Fill rate: fraction of orders filled by a distribution center within a
specific time period

10-529
10-
Computing
Key
Performance
Indicators
10-530
10-
Process Control and SCOR
Process Control
not only for manufacturing operations
can be used in any processes of supply chain

Supply Chain Operations Reference (SCOR)
a cross industry supply chain diagnostic tool
maintained by the Supply Chain Council

10-531
10-
SCOR

10-532
10-
SCOR
(cont.)

10-533
10-
Chapter 11
Global Supply Chain
Procurement and Distribution
Operations Management
Roberta Russell & Bernard W. Taylor, III
Lecture Outline
Procurement
E-Procurement
Distribution
Transportation
The Global Supply Chain

11-535
11-
Procurement
The purchase of goods and services from suppliers
Cross enterprise teams
coordinate processes between a company and its supplier

OnOn-demand (direct-response) delivery
(directrequires the supplier to deliver goods when demanded by the
customer

Continuous replenishment
supplying orders in a short period of time according to a
predetermined schedule

11-536
11-
Outsourcing
Sourcing
selection of suppliers

Outsourcing
purchase of goods and services from an
outside supplier

Core competencies
what a company does best

Single sourcing
a company purchases goods and services
from only a few (or one) suppliers
11-537
11-
Categories of Goods and
Services...

11-538
11-
E-Procurement
Direct purchase from suppliers over the
Internet, by using software packages or
through e-marketplaces, e-hubs, and
eetrading exchanges
Can streamline and speed up the
purchase order and transaction process

11-539
11-
E-Procurement (cont.)
What can companies buy over the
Internet?
Manufacturing inputs
the raw materials and components that go
directly into the production process of the product

Operating inputs
maintenance, repair, and operation goods and
services
11-540
11-
E-Procurement (cont.)
E-marketplaces (e-hubs)
(eWebsites where companies and suppliers
conduct business-to-business activities
business-to-

Reverse auction
process used by e-marketplaces for buyers
eto purchase items; company posts orders on
the internet for suppliers to bid on

11-541
11-
Distribution
Encompasses all channels, processes, and functions,
including warehousing and transportation, that a
product passes on its way to final customer
Order fulfillment
process of ensuring on-time delivery of an order
onLogistics
transportation and distribution of goods and
services
Driving force today is speed
Particularly important for Internet dot-coms
dot-

11-542
11-
Distribution Centers (DC)
and Warehousing
DCs are some of the largest business
facilities in the United States
Trend is for more frequent orders in smaller
quantities
FlowFlow-through facilities and automated
material handling
Postponement
final assembly and product configuration
may be done at the DC
11-543
11-
Warehouse Management
Systems
Highly automated system that runs day-to-day
day-tooperations of a DC
Controls item putaway, picking, packing, and
shipping
Features
transportation management
order management
yard management
labor management
warehouse optimization

11-544
11-
A WMS
11-545
11-
VendorVendor-Managed Inventory
Manufacturers generate orders, not distributors or
retailers
Stocking information is accessed using EDI
A first step towards supply chain collaboration
Increased speed, reduced errors, and improved
service

11-546
11-
Collaborative Logistics and
Distribution Outsourcing
Collaborative planning, forecasting, and
replenishment create greater economies of
scale
InternetInternet-based exchange of data and
information
Significant decrease in inventory levels and
costs and more efficient logistics
Companies focus on core competencies
11-547
11-
Transportation
Rail
low-value, high-density, bulk
products, raw materials,
intermodal containers
not as economical for small
loads, slower, less flexible
than trucking

Trucking
main mode of freight
transport in U.S.
small loads, point-to-point
service, flexible
More reliable, less damage
than rails; more expensive
than rails for long distance

11-548
11-
Transportation (cont.)
Air
most expensive and fastest, mode of
freight transport
lightweight, small packages <500 lbs
high-value, perishable and critical
goods
less theft

Package Delivery
small packages
fast and reliable
increased with e-Business
primary shipping mode for Internet
companies
11-549
11-
Transportation (cont.)
Water
low-cost shipping mode
primary means of international shipping
U.S. waterways
slowest shipping mode

Intermodal
combines several modes of shippingtruck, water and rail
key component is containers

Pipeline
transport oil and products in liquid form
high capital cost, economical use
long life and low operating cost
11-550
11-
Internet Transportation
Exchanges
Bring together shippers and carriers
Initial contact, negotiations, auctions
Examples
www.nte.com
www.freightquote.com

11-551
11-
Global Supply Chain
International trade barriers have fallen
New trade agreements
To compete globally requires an effective supply chain
Information technology is an “enabler” of global trade

11-552
11-
Obstacles to Global Chain
Transactions
Increased documentation for invoices, cargo
insurance, letters of credit, ocean bills of lading or air
waybills, and inspections
Ever changing regulations that vary from country to
country that govern the import and export of goods
Trade groups, tariffs, duties, and landing costs
Limited shipping modes
Differences in communication technology and
availability

11-553
11-
Obstacles to Global Chain
Transactions (cont.)
Different business practices as well as language
barriers
Government codes and reporting requirements that
vary from country to country
Numerous players, including forwarding agents,
custom house brokers, financial institutions, insurance
providers, multiple transportation carriers, and
government agencies
Since 9/11, numerous security regulations and
requirements

11-554
11-
Duties and Tariffs
Proliferation of trade agreements
Nations form trading groups
no tariffs or duties within group
charge uniform tariffs to nonmembers

Member nations have a competitive advantage
within the group
Trade specialists
include freight forwarders, customs house brokers,
export packers, and export management and trading
companies

11-555
11-
Duties and Tariffs (cont.)

11-556
11-
Landed Cost
Total cost of producing, storing, and
transporting a product to the site of
consumption or another port
Value added tax (VAT)
an indirect tax assessed on the increase in value of
a good at any stage of production process from
raw material to final product

Clicker shock
occurs when an ordered is placed with a company
that does not have the capability to calculate landed
cost
11-557
11-
WebWeb-based International Trade
Logistic Systems
International trade logistics web-based software
systems reduce obstacles to global trade
convert language and currency
provide information on tariffs, duties, and customs processes
attach appropriate weights, measurements, and unit prices to
individual products ordered over the Web
incorporate transportation costs and conversion rates
calculate shipping costs online while a company enters an
order
track global shipments

11-558
11-
Recent Trends in Globalization for
U.S. Companies
Two significant changes
passage of NAFTA
admission of China in WTO

Mexico
cheap labor and relatively short shipping time

China
cheaper labor and longer work week, but lengthy
shipping time
Major supply chains have moved to China
11-559
11-
China’s Increasing Role
in the Global Supply Chain
World’s premier sources of supply
Abundance of low-wage labor
lowWorld’s fastest growing market
Regulatory changes have liberalized its
market
Increased exporting of higher technology
products
11-560
11-
Models in Doing Business in China
Employ local third-party trading agents
thirdWhollyWholly-owned foreign enterprise
Develop your own international
procurement offices

11-561
11-
Challenges Sourcing from China
Getting reliable information in more
difficult than in the U.S.
Information technology is much less
advanced and sophisticated than in the
U.S.
Work turnover rates among low-skilled
lowworkers is extremely high
11-562
11-
Effects of 9/11 on Global Chains
Increase security measures
added time to supply chain schedules
Increased supply chain costs

24 hours rules for “risk screening”
extended documentation
extend time by 3-4 days
3-

Inventory levels have increased 5%
Other costs include:
new people, technologies, equipment, surveillance,
communication, and security systems, and training necessary
for screening at airports and seaports around the world
11-563
11-
Chapter 11 Supplement
Transportation and
Transshipment Models
Operations Management
Roberta Russell & Bernard W. Taylor, III
Lecture Outline
Transportation Model
Transshipment Model

Supplement 11-565
11-
Transportation Model
A transportation model is formulated for a class of
problems with the following characteristics
a product is transported from a number of sources to a
number of destinations at the minimum possible cost
each source is able to supply a fixed number of units of
product
each destination has a fixed demand for product

Solution Methods
steppingstepping-stone
modified distribution
Excel’s Solver

Supplement 11-566
11-
Transportation Method: Example

Supplement 11-567
11-
Transportation Method: Example

Supplement 11-568
11-
Problem
Formulation
Using Excel

Total Cost
Formula

Supplement 11-569
11-
Using Solver
from Tools
Menu

Supplement 11-570
11-
Solution

Supplement 11-571
11-
Modified
Problem
Solution

Supplement 11-572
11-
Transshipment
Model

Supplement 11-573
11-
Transshipment Model: Solution

Supplement 11-574
11-
Chapter 12
Forecasting
Operations Management
Roberta Russell & Bernard W. Taylor, III
Lecture Outline
Strategic Role of Forecasting in Supply
Chain Management
Components of Forecasting Demand
Time Series Methods
Forecast Accuracy
Time Series Forecasting Using Excel
Regression Methods
12-576
12-
Forecasting
Predicting the future
Qualitative forecast methods
subjective

Quantitative forecast
methods
based on mathematical
formulas

12-577
12-
Forecasting and Supply Chain
Management
Accurate forecasting determines how much
inventory a company must keep at various points
along its supply chain
Continuous replenishment
supplier and customer share continuously updated data
typically managed by the supplier
reduces inventory for the company
speeds customer delivery

Variations of continuous replenishment
quick response
JIT (just-in-time)
(just-inVMI (vendor-managed inventory)
(vendorstockless inventory
12-578
12-
Forecasting
Quality Management
Accurately forecasting customer demand is
a key to providing good quality service

Strategic Planning
Successful strategic planning requires
accurate forecasts of future products and
markets

12-579
12-
Types of Forecasting Methods
Depend on
time frame
demand behavior
causes of behavior

12-580
12-
Time Frame
Indicates how far into the future is
forecast
Short- midShort- to mid-range forecast
typically encompasses the immediate future
daily up to two years

LongLong-range forecast
usually encompasses a period of time longer
than two years
12-581
12-
Demand Behavior
Trend
a gradual, long-term up or down movement of
longdemand

Random variations
movements in demand that do not follow a pattern

Cycle
an up-and-down repetitive movement in demand
up-and-

Seasonal pattern
an up-and-down repetitive movement in demand
up-andoccurring periodically
12-582
12-
Demand

Demand

Forms of Forecast Movement

Random
movement
Time
(b) Cycle

Demand

Demand

Time
(a) Trend

Time
(c) Seasonal pattern

Time
(d) Trend with seasonal pattern
12-583
12-
Forecasting Methods
Time series
statistical techniques that use historical demand data
to predict future demand

Regression methods
attempt to develop a mathematical relationship
between demand and factors that cause its behavior

Qualitative
use management judgment, expertise, and opinion to
predict future demand
12-584
12-
Qualitative Methods
Management, marketing, purchasing,
and engineering are sources for internal
qualitative forecasts
Delphi method
involves soliciting forecasts about
technological advances from experts

12-585
12-
Forecasting Process
1. Identify the
purpose of forecast

2. Collect historical
data

6. Check forecast
accuracy with one or
more measures

5. Develop/compute
forecast for period of
historical data

7.
Is accuracy of
forecast
acceptable?

No

3. Plot data and identify
patterns

4. Select a forecast
model that seems
appropriate for data

8b. Select new
forecast model or
adjust parameters of
existing model

Yes
8a. Forecast over
planning horizon

9. Adjust forecast based
on additional qualitative
information and insight

10. Monitor results
and measure forecast
accuracy

12-586
12-
Time Series
Assume that what has occurred in the past will
continue to occur in the future
Relate the forecast to only one factor - time
Include
moving average
exponential smoothing
linear trend line

12-587
12-
Moving Average
Naive forecast
demand in current period is used as next period’s
forecast

Simple moving average
uses average demand for a fixed sequence of
periods
stable demand with no pronounced behavioral
patterns

Weighted moving average
weights are assigned to most recent data

12-588
12-
Moving Average:
Naïve Approach
MONTH

ORDERS
PER MONTH
Jan
Feb
Mar
Apr
May
June
July
Aug
Sept
Oct

Nov

FORECAST
120 90
120
100
90
75
100
110
75
50
110
75
50
130
75
110
130
90
110
90

12-589
12-
Simple Moving Average
n

Σ D
i

MAn =

i=1

n

where
n = number of periods in
the moving average
Di = demand in period i

12-590
12-
3-month Simple Moving Average

MONTH
Jan
Feb
Mar
Apr
May
June
July
Aug
Sept
Oct
Nov

ORDERS
PER MONTH
120
90
100
75
110
50
75
130
110
90
-

3

Σ

MOVING
AVERAGE
–
–
–
103.3
88.3
95.0
78.3
78.3
85.0
105.0
110.0

MA3 =

=

Di

i=1

3
90 + 110 + 130
3

= 110 orders
for Nov

12-591
12-
5-month Simple Moving Average

MONTH
Jan
Feb
Mar
Apr
May
June
July
Aug
Sept
Oct
Nov

ORDERS
PER MONTH
120
90
100
75
110
50
75
130
110
90
-

MOVING
AVERAGE
–
–
–
–
–
99.0
85.0
82.0
88.0
95.0
91.0

5

Σ

MA5 =

=

Di

i=1

5

90 + 110 + 130+75+50
5
= 91 orders
for Nov

12-592
12-
Smoothing Effects
150 –
5-month

125 –

Orders

100 –
75 –
3-month

50 –
Actual

25 –
0–

|
Jan

|
Feb

|
Mar

|
|
|
|
Apr May June July
Month

|
|
Aug Sept

|
Oct

|
Nov

12-593
12-
Weighted Moving Average
Σ Wi Di
n

Adjusts moving average
method to more
closely reflect data
fluctuations

WMAn =

i=1

where

Wi = the weight for period i,
between 0 and 100
percent

Σ Wi = 1.00
12-594
12-
Weighted Moving Average Example
MONTH

WEIGHT

August
September
October

DATA

17%
33%
50%

130
110
90
3

November Forecast WMA3 =

Σ1 Wi Di
i=

= (0.50)(90) + (0.33)(110) + (0.17)(130)
= 103.4 orders
12-595
12-
Exponential Smoothing

Averaging method
Weights most recent data more strongly
Reacts more to recent changes
Widely used, accurate method

12-596
12-
Exponential Smoothing (cont.)
Ft +1 = α Dt + (1 - α)Ft

where:
Ft +1 = forecast for next period
Dt = actual demand for present period
Ft = previously determined forecast for
present period
α = weighting factor, smoothing constant

12-597
12-
Effect of Smoothing Constant
0.0 ≤ α ≤ 1.0
If α = 0.20, then Ft +1 = 0.20 Dt + 0.80 Ft
If α = 0, then Ft +1 = 0 Dt + 1 Ft = Ft

Forecast does not reflect recent data
If α = 1, then Ft +1 = 1 Dt + 0 Ft = Dt

Forecast based only on most recent data

12-598
12-
Exponential Smoothing (α=0.30)
(α
PERIOD

MONTH

DEMAND

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

Jan
Feb
Mar
Apr
May
Jun
Jul
Aug
Sep
Oct
Nov
Dec

37
40
41
37
45
50
43
47
56
52
55
54

F2 = αD1 + (1 - α)F1
= (0.30)(37) + (0.70)(37)
= 37
F3 = αD2 + (1 - α)F2
= (0.30)(40) + (0.70)(37)
= 37.9
F13 = αD12 + (1 - α)F12
= (0.30)(54) + (0.70)(50.84)
= 51.79

12-599
12-
Exponential Smoothing (cont.)
PERIOD
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13

MONTH
Jan
Feb
Mar
Apr
May
Jun
Jul
Aug
Sep
Oct
Nov
Dec
Jan

DEMAND
37
40
41
37
45
50
43
47
56
52
55
54
–

FORECAST, Ft + 1
(α = 0.3)
(α = 0.5)
–
37.00
37.90
38.83
38.28
40.29
43.20
43.14
44.30
47.81
49.06
50.84
51.79

–
37.00
38.50
39.75
38.37
41.68
45.84
44.42
45.71
50.85
51.42
53.21
53.61
12-600
12-
Exponential Smoothing (cont.)
70 –
α = 0.50

Actual

60 –

Orders

50 –
40 –
α = 0.30
30 –
20 –
10 –
0–

|
1

|
2

|
3

|
4

|
5

|
6

|
7

|
8

|
9

|
10

|
11

|
12

|
13

Month
12-601
12-
Adjusted Exponential Smoothing
AFt +1 = Ft +1 + Tt +1

where
T = an exponentially smoothed trend factor
Tt +1 = β(Ft +1 - Ft) + (1 - β) Tt
where
Tt = the last period trend factor
β = a smoothing constant for trend

12-602
12-
Adjusted Exponential
Smoothing (β=0.30)
(β
PERIOD

MONTH

DEMAND

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

Jan
Feb
Mar
Apr
May
Jun
Jul
Aug
Sep
Oct
Nov
Dec

37
40
41
37
45
50
43
47
56
52
55
54

T3 = β(F3 - F2) + (1 - β) T2
= (0.30)(38.5 - 37.0) + (0.70)(0)
= 0.45
AF3 = F3 + T3 = 38.5 + 0.45
= 38.95
T13 = β(F13 - F12) + (1 - β) T12
= (0.30)(53.61 - 53.21) + (0.70)(1.77)
= 1.36

AF13 = F13 + T13 = 53.61 + 1.36 = 54.97
12-603
12-
Adjusted Exponential Smoothing:
Example
PERIOD
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13

MONTH
Jan
Feb
Mar
Apr
May
Jun
Jul
Aug
Sep
Oct
Nov
Dec
Jan

DEMAND

FORECAST
Ft +1

37
40
41
37
45
50
43
47
56
52
55
54
–

37.00
37.00
38.50
39.75
38.37
38.37
45.84
44.42
45.71
50.85
51.42
53.21
53.61

TREND
ADJUSTED
Tt +1
FORECAST AFt +1
–
0.00
0.45
0.69
0.07
0.07
1.97
0.95
1.05
2.28
1.76
1.77
1.36

–
37.00
38.95
40.44
38.44
38.44
47.82
45.37
46.76
58.13
53.19
54.98
54.96
12-604
12-
Adjusted Exponential Smoothing
Forecasts
70 –
Adjusted forecast (β = 0.30)
(β
60 –
Actual

Demand

50 –
40 –
Forecast (α = 0.50)
(α

30 –
20 –
10 –
0–

|
1

|
2

|
3

|
4

|
5

|
|
6
7
Period

|
8

|
9

|
10

|
11

|
12

|
13
12-605
12-
Linear Trend Line
y = a + bx

where
a = intercept
b = slope of the line
x = time period
y = forecast for
demand for period x

Σ xy - nxy
b =
2 - nx2
Σx
a = y-bx
where
n = number of periods
Σx
x = n
= mean of the x values
Σy
y = n = mean of the y values
12-606
12-
Least Squares Example
x(PERIOD)

y(DEMAND)

1
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
10
11
12

47
56
52
55
54

37
80
123
148
225
300
301
376
504
520
605
648

78

557

3867

7

73
40
41
37
45
50

xy

43

x2
1
4
9
16
25
36
49
64
81
100
121
144
650

12-607
12-
Least Squares Example
(cont.)
78
12
557
12
∑xy - nxy
b = 2
∑x - nx2

x =
y =

= 6.5
= 46.42

3867 - (12)(6.5)(46.42)
=
650 - 12(6.5)2

=1.72

a = y - bx
= 46.42 - (1.72)(6.5) = 35.2

12-608
12-
Linear trend line y = 35.2 + 1.72x
Forecast for period 13 y = 35.2 + 1.72(13) = 57.56 units
70 –
60 –

Actual

Demand

50 –
40 –
Linear trend line
30 –
20 –
10 –
0–

|
1

|
2

|
3

|
4

|
5

|
|
6
7
Period

|
8

|
9

|
10

|
11

|
12

|
13

12-609
12-
Seasonal Adjustments
Repetitive increase/ decrease in demand
Use seasonal factor to adjust forecast

Seasonal factor = Si =

Di
∑D

12-610
12-
Seasonal Adjustment (cont.)
YEAR
2002
2003
2004
Total

DEMAND (1000’S PER QUARTER)
1
2
3
4
Total
12.6
14.1
15.3
42.0

8.6
10.3
10.6
29.5

6.3
7.5
8.1
21.9

17.5
18.2
19.6
55.3

45.0
50.1
53.6
148.7

D1
42.0
S1 =
=
= 0.28
∑D 148.7

D3
21.9
S3 =
=
= 0.15
∑D 148.7

D2
29.5
S2 =
=
= 0.20
∑D 148.7

D4
55.3
S4 =
=
= 0.37
∑D 148.7
12-611
12-
Seasonal Adjustment (cont.)

For 2005
y = 40.97 + 4.30x = 40.97 + 4.30(4) = 58.17
4.30x
SF1 = (S1) (F5) = (0.28)(58.17) = 16.28
(S (F
SF2 = (S2) (F5) = (0.20)(58.17) = 11.63
(S (F
SF3 = (S3) (F5) = (0.15)(58.17) = 8.73
(S (F
SF4 = (S4) (F5) = (0.37)(58.17) = 21.53
(S (F

12-612
12-
Forecast Accuracy
Forecast error
difference between forecast and actual demand
MAD
mean absolute deviation

MAPD
mean absolute percent deviation

Cumulative error
Average error or bias

12-613
12-
Mean Absolute Deviation
(MAD)
Σ| Dt - Ft |
MAD =
n
where
t = period number
Dt = demand in period t
Ft = forecast for period t
n = total number of periods
  = absolute value
12-614
12-
MAD Example
PERIOD
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

DEMAND, Dt

Ft (α =0.3)

(Dt - Ft)

|Dt - Ft|

37
37.00
–
40
37.00
3.00
41
Σ| D37.90 t | 3.10
t - F
37
38.83
1.83
MAD = 38.28 -6.72
n
45
50
40.29
9.69
53.39
= 43.20 -0.20
43
47
43.14
3.86
11
56
= 4.85 44.30 11.70
52
47.81
4.19
55
49.06
5.94
54
50.84
3.15

–
3.00
3.10
1.83
6.72
9.69
0.20
3.86
11.70
4.19
5.94
3.15

557

53.39

49.31

12-615
12-
Other Accuracy Measures
Mean absolute percent deviation (MAPD)

∑|Dt - Ft|
MAPD =
∑Dt
Cumulative error
E = ∑et
Average error
E=

∑et
n
12-616
12-
Comparison of Forecasts

FORECAST

MAD

MAPD

E

Exponential smoothing (α = 0.30) 4.85
(α
9.6% 49.31
Exponential smoothing (α = 0.50) 4.04
(α
8.5% 33.21
Adjusted exponential smoothing
3.81
7.5% 21.14
(α = 0.50, β = 0.30)
Linear trend line
2.29
4.9%
–

(E)
4.48
3.02
1.92
–

12-617
12-
Forecast Control
Tracking signal
monitors the forecast to see if it is biased
high or low
Tracking signal =

∑(Dt - Ft)
E
=
MAD
MAD

1 MAD ≈ 0.8 б
Control limits of 2 to 5 MADs are used most
frequently
12-618
12-
Tracking Signal Values
PERIOD

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

DEMAND
Dt

37
40
41
37
45
50
43
47
56
52
55
54

FORECAST,
Ft

ERROR
Dt - Ft

∑E =
∑(Dt - Ft)

37.00
–
–
37.00
3.00
3.00
37.90
3.10
6.10
38.83
-1.83
4.27
38.28
6.72
10.99
Tracking signal for period 3
40.29
9.69
20.68
43.20
-0.20
20.48
6.10
43.14 =
3.86 = 2.00
24.34
TS3
3.05
44.30
11.70
36.04
47.81
4.19
40.23
49.06
5.94
46.17
50.84
3.15
49.32

TRACKING
MAD SIGNAL

–
–
3.00 1.00
3.05 2.00
2.64 1.62
3.66 3.00
4.87 4.25
4.09 5.01
4.06 6.00
5.01 7.19
4.92 8.18
5.02 9.20
4.85 10.17

12-619
12-
Tracking Signal Plot
Tracking signal (MAD)

3σ –
2σ –

Exponential smoothing (α = 0.30)
α

1σ –
0σ –
-1σ –
-2σ –

Linear trend line

-3σ –
|
0

|
1

|
2

|
3

|
4

|
5

|
6
Period

|
7

|
8

|
9

|
10

|
11

|
12

12-620
12-
Statistical Control Charts
σ=

∑(Dt - Ft)2
n-1

Using σ we can calculate statistical control
limits for the forecast error
Control limits are typically set at ± 3σ

12-621
12-
Statistical Control Charts
18.39 –

UCL = +3σ
σ

12.24 –

Errors

6.12 –
0–
-6.12 –
-12.24 –
-18.39 –
|
0

LCL = -3σ
σ
|
1

|
2

|
3

|
4

|
5

|
6
Period

|
7

|
8

|
9

|
10

|
11

|
12

12-622
12-
Time Series Forecasting using Excel
Excel can be used to develop forecasts:
Moving average
Exponential smoothing
Adjusted exponential smoothing
Linear trend line

12-623
12-
Exponentially Smoothed and Adjusted
Exponentially Smoothed Forecasts

12-624
12-
Demand and exponentially
smoothed forecast

12-625
12-
Data Analysis option

12-626
12-
Computing a Forecast with
Seasonal Adjustment

12-627
12-
OM Tools

12-628
12-
Regression Methods
Linear regression
a mathematical technique that relates a
dependent variable to an independent
variable in the form of a linear equation

Correlation
a measure of the strength of the relationship
between independent and dependent
variables

12-629
12-
Linear Regression
y = a + bx

a = y-bx
Σ xy - nxy
2 - nx2 b =
Σx
where
a = intercept
b = slope of the line
Σx
x =n
Σy
y =n

= mean of the x data
= mean of the y data
12-630
12-
Linear Regression Example
(WINS)

x
(ATTENDANCE)

4
6
6
8
6
7
5
7
49

y
xy

x2

36.3
40.1
41.2
53.0
44.0
45.6
39.0
47.5

145.2
240.6
247.2
424.0
264.0
319.2
195.0
332.5

16
36
36
64
36
49
25
49

346.7

2167.7

311

12-631
12-
Linear Regression Example (cont.)
49
x=
8
346.9y =
8

= 6.125
= 43.36

∑xy - nxy2 b =
∑x2 - nx2
=
(2,167.7) - (8)(6.125)(43.36)
(311) - (8)(6.125)2
= 4.06
a = y - bx
= 43.36 - (4.06)(6.125)
= 18.46

12-632
12-
Linear Regression Example (cont.)
Regression equation

Attendance forecast for 7 wins

y = 18.46 + 4.06x

y = 18.46 + 4.06(7)
= 46.88, or 46,880

60,000 –

Attendance, y

50,000 –
40,000 –
30,000 –

Linear regression line,
y = 18.46 + 4.06x
4.06x

20,000 –
10,000 –
|
0

|
1

|
2

|
3

|
4

|
|
5
6
Wins, x

|
7

|
8

|
9

|
10
12-633
12-
Correlation and Coefficient of
Determination
Correlation, r

Measure of strength of relationship
Varies between -1.00 and +1.00
Coefficient of determination, r2

Percentage of variation in dependent
variable resulting from changes in the
independent variable

12-634
12-
Computing Correlation
r=

r=

n∑ xy - ∑ x∑ y
[n∑ x2 - (∑ x)2] [n∑ y2 - (∑ y)2]
[n
(8)(2,167.7) - (49)(346.9)

[(8)(311) - (49)2] [(8)(15,224.7) - (346.9)2]
r = 0.947
Coefficient of determination
r2 = (0.947)2 = 0.897
12-635
12-
Regression Analysis with Excel

12-636
12-
Regression Analysis with Excel
(cont.)

12-637
12-
Regression Analysis with Excel
(cont.)

12-638
12-
Multiple Regression
Study the relationship of demand to two or more independent
variables

y = β0 + β1x1 + β2x2 … + βkxk
where
β0 = the intercept
β1, … , βk = parameters for the
independent variables
x1, … , xk = independent variables

12-639
12-
Multiple Regression with Excel

12-640
12-
Chapter 13
Inventory Management
Operations Management - 6th Edition
Roberta Russell & Bernard W. Taylor, III

Beni Asllani
University of Tennessee at Chattanooga
Lecture Outline
Elements of Inventory Management
Inventory Control Systems
Economic Order Quantity Models
Quantity Discounts
Reorder Point
Order Quantity for a Periodic Inventory
System
13-642
13-
What Is Inventory?
Stock of items kept to meet future
demand
Purpose of inventory management
how many units to order
when to order

13-643
13-
Inventory and Supply Chain
Management
Bullwhip effect
demand information is distorted as it moves away
from the end-use customer
endhigher safety stock inventories to are stored to
compensate

Seasonal or cyclical demand
Inventory provides independence from vendors
Take advantage of price discounts
Inventory provides independence between
stages and avoids work stoppages
13-644
13-
Inventory and Quality
Management in the Supply Chain
Customers usually perceive quality
service as availability of goods they want
when they want them
Inventory must be sufficient to provide
high-quality customer service in QM

13-645
13-
Types of Inventory
Raw materials
Purchased parts and supplies
Work-in-process (partially completed)
products (WIP)
Items being transported
Tools and equipment

13-646
13-
Two Forms of Demand
Dependent
Demand for items used to produce final
products
Tires stored at a Goodyear plant are an
example of a dependent demand item

Independent
Demand for items used by external
customers
Cars, appliances, computers, and houses
are examples of independent demand
inventory

13-647
13-
Inventory Costs
Carrying cost

cost of holding an item in inventory
Ordering cost

cost of replenishing inventory
Shortage cost

temporary or permanent loss of sales
when demand cannot be met

13-648
13-
Inventory Control Systems
Continuous system (fixed-order(fixed-orderquantity)
constant amount ordered when
inventory declines to
predetermined level

Periodic system (fixed-time(fixed-timeperiod)
order placed for variable amount
after fixed passage of time

13-649
13-
ABC Classification
Class A
5 – 15 % of units
70 – 80 % of value

Class B
30 % of units
15 % of value

Class C
50 – 60 % of units
5 – 10 % of value

13-650
13-
ABC Classification: Example
PART
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

UNIT COST
$ 60
350
30
80
30
20
10
320
510
20

ANNUAL USAGE
90
40
130
60
100
180
170
50
60
120

13-651
13-
ABC Classification:
Example (cont.)
PART

9
8
2
1
4
3
6
5
10
7

PART
VALUE
$30,6001
16,0002
14,000
3
5,400
4,8004
3,9005
3,6006
3,000
CLASS 7
2,400
A 8
1,700
B 9
C 10

TOTAL
% OF TOTAL %
TOTAL
UNIT COSTQUANTITY OF% CUMMULATIVE
ANNUAL USAGE
VALUE

35.9 $ 60
6.0
18.7 350
5.0
16.4
4.0
30
6.3
9.0
80
5.6
6.0
4.6 30
10.0
4.2 % OF TOTAL
18.0
20
3.5 10VALUE
13.0
ITEMS
2.8
12.0
320 71.0
9, 8, 2
2.0
17.0
1, 4, 3 510 16.5
$85,400
6, 5, 10, 720 12.5

90 6.0
40 11.0
A
130 15.0
24.0
60 30.0
B 100 40.0
%180TOTAL
OF 58.0
170 71.0
QUANTITY
83.0
C 50 100.0
15.0
60 25.0
120 60.0
Example 10.1
13-652
13-
Economic Order Quantity
(EOQ) Models
EOQ
optimal order quantity that will
minimize total inventory costs

Basic EOQ model
Production quantity model

13-653
13-
Assumptions of Basic
EOQ Model
Demand is known with certainty and is constant over time
No shortages are allowed
Lead time for the receipt of orders is constant
Order quantity is received all at once

13-654
13-
Inventory Order Cycle
Inventory Level

Order quantity, Q

Demand
rate

Average
inventory

Q
2

Reorder point, R

0

Lead
time
Order Order
placed receipt

Lead
time
Order Order
placed receipt

Time

13-655
13-
EOQ Cost Model
Co - cost of placing order
Cc - annual per-unit carrying cost
per-

D - annual demand
Q - order quantity

Annual ordering cost =

CoD
Q

Annual carrying cost =

CcQ
2

Total cost =

CoD
+
Q

CcQ
2

13-656
13-
EOQ Cost Model
Deriving Qopt

Proving equality of
costs at optimal point

CcQ
CoD
TC =
+
Q
2
CoD
Cc
∂TC
=– 2 +
Q
2
∂Q
C0D
Cc
0=– 2 +
Q
2
Qopt =

2CoD
Cc

CoD
CcQ
=
Q
2
Q2

2CoD
=
Cc

Qopt =

2CoD
Cc

13-657
13-
EOQ Cost Model (cont.)
Annual
cost ($)

Total Cost
Slope = 0
CcQ
Carrying Cost =
2

Minimum
total cost

CoD
Ordering Cost = Q
Optimal order
Qopt

Order Quantity, Q

13-658
13-
EOQ Example
Cc = $0.75 per gallon
Qopt =

2CoD
Cc

Qopt =

Co = $150

2(150)(10,000)
(0.75)

Qopt = 2,000 gallons
Orders per year = D/Qopt
= 10,000/2,000
= 5 orders/year

D = 10,000 gallons

CcQ
CoD
TCmin =
+
Q
2
TCmin

(150)(10,000) (0.75)(2,000)
=
+
2
2,000

TCmin = $750 + $750 = $1,500
Order cycle time = 311 days/(D/Qopt)
days/(D
= 311/5
= 62.2 store days
13-659
13-
Production Quantity
Model
An inventory system in which an order is
received gradually, as inventory is
simultaneously being depleted
AKA non-instantaneous receipt model
assumption that Q is received all at once is relaxed

p - daily rate at which an order is received over
time, a.k.a. production rate
d - daily rate at which inventory is demanded
13-660
13-
Production Quantity Model
(cont.)
Inventory
level

Q(1-d/p)
(1-d/p)

Maximum
inventory
level

Q
(1-d/p)
(1-d/p)
2

Average
inventory
level

0
Order
receipt period

Begin
End
order order
receipt receipt

Time

13-661
13-
Production Quantity Model
(cont.)
p = production rate

d = demand rate

Q
Maximum inventory level = Q - p d
d
= Q 1 -p

2CoD
Qopt =

Q
d
Average inventory level =
1p
2

Cc 1 - d
p

CoD CcQ
d
TC = Q + 2 1 - p

13-662
13-
Production Quantity Model:
Example
Cc = $0.75 per gallon
Co = $150
d = 10,000/311 = 32.2 gallons per day
2C o D
Qopt =

Cc 1 - d
p

D = 10,000 gallons
p = 150 gallons per day

2(150)(10,000)
=

CoD CcQ
d
TC = Q + 2 1 - p

0.75 1 - 32.2
150

= 2,256.8 gallons

= $1,329

2,256.8
Q
Production run = p =
= 15.05 days per order
150
13-663
13-
Production Quantity Model:
Example (cont.)

10,000
D
Number of production runs = Q = 2,256.8 = 4.43 runs/year
d
Maximum inventory level = Q 1 - p

= 2,256.8 1 -

32.2
150

= 1,772 gallons

13-664
13-
Solution of EOQ Models with
Excel

13-665
13-
Solution of EOQ Models with
Excel (Con’t)

13-666
13-
Solution of EOQ Models with OM
Tools

13-667
13-
Quantity Discounts
Price per unit decreases as order
quantity increases
CcQ
CoD
TC =
+
+ PD
2
Q
where
P = per unit price of the item
D = annual demand
13-668
13-
Quantity Discount Model (cont.)
ORDER SIZE
0 - 99
100 – 199
200+

PRICE
$10
8 (d1)
6 (d2)

TC = ($10 )
TC (d1 = $8 )

Inventory cost ($)

TC (d2 = $6 )

Carrying cost

Ordering cost
Q(d1 ) = 100 Qopt

Q(d2 ) = 200
13-669
13-
Quantity Discount: Example
QUANTITY
1 - 49
50 - 89
90+
Qopt =
For Q = 72.5

For Q = 90

PRICE
$1,400
1,100
900
2C o D
=
Cc

Co = $2,500
Cc = $190 per TV
D = 200 TVs per year

2(2500)(200)
= 72.5 TVs
190

CcQopt
CoD
TC =
+
+ PD = $233,784
2
Qopt
CcQ
CoD
TC =
+
+ PD = $194,105
2
Q
13-670
13-
QuantityQuantity-Discount Model Solution
with Excel

13-671
13-
Reorder Point
Level of inventory at which a new order is placed

R = dL
where
d = demand rate per period
L = lead time

13-672
13-
Reorder Point: Example
Demand = 10,000 gallons/year
Store open 311 days/year
Daily demand = 10,000 / 311 = 32.154
gallons/day
Lead time = L = 10 days
R = dL = (32.154)(10) = 321.54 gallons

13-673
13-
Safety Stocks
Safety stock
buffer added to on hand inventory during lead
time

Stockout
an inventory shortage

Service level
probability that the inventory available during lead
time will meet demand

13-674
13-
Variable Demand with
a Reorder Point
Inventory level

Q

Reorder
point, R

0
LT

LT
Time

13-675
13-
Inventory level

Reorder Point with
a Safety Stock

Q
Reorder
point, R

Safety Stock

0
LT

LT
Time
13-676
13-
Reorder Point With
Variable Demand
R = dL + zσd L
where
d = average daily demand
L = lead time
σd = the standard deviation of daily demand
z = number of standard deviations
corresponding to the service level
probability
zσd L = safety stock

13-677
13-
Reorder Point for
a Service Level
Probability of
meeting demand during
lead time = service level

Probability of
a stockout

Safety stock
zσd L
σ
dL
Demand

R
13-678
13-
Reorder Point for
Variable Demand
The paint store wants a reorder point with a 95%
service level and a 5% stockout probability
d = 30 gallons per day
L = 10 days
σd = 5 gallons per day
For a 95% service level, z = 1.65
R = dL + z σd L

Safety stock = z σd L

= 30(10) + (1.65)(5)( 10)

= (1.65)(5)( 10)

= 326.1 gallons

= 26.1 gallons
13-679
13-
Determining Reorder Point with
Excel

13-680
13-
Order Quantity for a
Periodic Inventory System
Q = d(tb + L) + zσd

tb + L - I

where
d = average demand rate
tb = the fixed time between orders
L = lead time
σd = standard deviation of demand
zσd

tb + L = safety stock
I = inventory level
13-681
13-
Periodic Inventory System

13-682
13-
FixedFixed-Period Model with
Variable Demand
d = 6 packages per day
σd = 1.2 packages
tb = 60 days
L = 5 days
I = 8 packages
z = 1.65 (for a 95% service level)
Q = d(tb + L) + zσd

tb + L - I

= (6)(60 + 5) + (1.65)(1.2)

60 + 5 - 8

= 397.96 packages

13-683
13-
FixedFixed-Period Model with Excel

13-684
13-
Chapter 13 Supplement
Simulation
Operations Management
Roberta Russell & Bernard W. Taylor, III
Lecture Outline

Monte Carlo Simulation
Computer Simulation with Excel
Areas of Simulation Application

Supplement 13-686
13-
Simulation
Mathematical and computer modeling technique for
replicating real-world problem situations
Modeling approach primarily used to analyze
probabilistic problems
It does not normally provide a solution; instead it provides
information that is used to make a decision

Physical simulation
Space flights, wind tunnels, treadmills for tires

Mathematical-computerized simulation
Computer-based replicated models

Supplement 13-687
13-
Monte Carlo Simulation
Select numbers randomly from a
probability distribution
Use these values to observe how a
model performs over time
Random numbers each have an equal
likelihood of being selected at random

Supplement 13-688
13-
Distribution of Demand
LAPTOPS DEMANDED
PER WEEK, x
0
1
2
3
4

FREQUENCY OF
DEMAND
20
40
20
10
10

PROBABILITY OF
DEMAND, P(x)
0.20
0.40
0.20
0.10
0.10

100

1.00

Supplement 13-689
13-
Roulette Wheel of Demand
0
90
x=4
x=0
80

20

x=3

x=2

x=1
60

Supplement 13-690
13-
Generating Demand
from Random Numbers
DEMAND,
x

RANGES OF RANDOM NUMBERS,
r

0
1
2
3
4

0-19
20-59
2060-79
6080-89
8090-99
90-

r = 39

Supplement 13-691
13-
Random Number Table

Supplement 13-692
13-
15 Weeks of Demand
WEEK

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

r

39
73
72
75
37
02
87
98
10
47
93
21
95
97
69

DEMAND (x)
(x

1
2
2
2
1
0
3
4
0
1
4
1
4
4
2
Σ = 31

REVENUE (S)

4,300
8,600
8,600
8,600
4,300
0
12,900
17,200
0
4,300
17,200 Average demand
4,300
= 31/15
17,200
= 2.07 laptops/week
17,200
8,600
$133,300
Supplement 13-693
13-
Computing Expected Demand
E(x) = (0.20)(0) + (0.40)(1) + (0.20)(2)
+ (0.10)(3) + (0.10)(4)
= 1.5 laptops per week
•Difference between 1.5 and 2.07 is due to small number of periods
analyzed (only 15 weeks)
•Steady-state result
Steady•an average result that remains constant after enough trials

Supplement 13-694
13-
Random Numbers in Excel

Supplement 13-695
13-
Simulation in Excel

Supplement 13-696
13-
Simulation in Excel (cont.)

Supplement 13-697
13-
Decision Making with
Simulation

Supplement 13-698
13-
Decision Making with
Simulation (cont.)

Supplement 13-699
13-
Areas of Simulation Application
Waiting Lines/Service
Complex systems for which it is difficult to develop
analytical formulas
Determine how many registers and servers are
needed to meet customer demand

Inventory Management
Traditional models make the assumption that
customer demand is certain
Simulation is widely used to analyze JIT without
having to implement it physically

Supplement 13-700
13-
Areas of Simulation
Application (cont.)
Production and Manufacturing Systems
Examples: production scheduling, production sequencing,
assembly line balancing, plant layout, and plant location
analysis
Machine breakdowns typically occur according to some
probability distributions

Capital Investment and Budgeting
Capital budgeting problems require estimates of cash flows,
often resulting from many random variables
Simulation has been used to generate values of cash flows,
market size, selling price, growth rate, and market share

Supplement 13-701
13-
Areas of Simulation Application
(cont.)
Logistics
Typically include numerous random variables, such as
distance, different modes of transport, shipping rates, and
schedules to analyze different distribution channels

Service Operations
Examples: police departments, fire departments, post offices,
hospitals, court systems, airports
Complex operations that no technique except simulation can
be employed

Environmental and Resource Analysis
Examples: impact of manufacturing plants, waste-disposal
facilities, nuclear power plants, waste and population
conditions, feasibility of alternative energy sources

Supplement 13-702
13-
Chapter 14
Sales and Operations Planning
Operations Management
Roberta Russell & Bernard W. Taylor, III
Lecture Outline
The Sales and Operations Planning
Process
Strategies for Adjusting Capacity
Strategies for Managing Demand
Quantitative Techniques for Aggregate
Planning
Hierarchical Nature of Planning
Aggregate Planning for Services
14-704
14-
Sales and Operations Planning
Determines the resource capacity needed to
meet demand over an intermediate time
horizon
Aggregate refers to sales and operations planning
for product lines or families
Sales and Operations planning (S&OP) matches
supply and demand

Objectives
Establish a company wide game plan for allocating
resources
Develop an economic strategy for meeting
demand

14-705
14-
Sales and Operations Planning
Process

14-706
14-
The Monthly S&OP Planning
Process

14-707
14-
Meeting Demand Strategies
Adjusting capacity
Resources necessary to meet demand
are acquired and maintained over the
time horizon of the plan
Minor variations in demand are handled
with overtime or under-time
under-

Managing demand
Proactive demand management

14-708
14-
Strategies for Adjusting Capacity
Level production
Producing at a constant rate
and using inventory to
absorb fluctuations in
demand

Chase demand
Hiring and firing workers to
match demand

Peak demand
Maintaining resources for
highhigh-demand levels

Overtime and under-time
underIncreasing or decreasing
working hours

Subcontracting
Let outside companies
complete the work

PartPart-time workers
Hiring part time workers to
complete the work

Backordering
Providing the service or
product at a later time period

14-709
14-
Level Production
Demand

Units

Production

Time

14-710
14-
Chase Demand
Demand

Units

Production

Time

14-711
14-
Strategies for Managing Demand
Shifting demand into
other time periods
Incentives
Sales promotions
Advertising campaigns

Offering products or
services with countercyclical demand patterns
Partnering with suppliers
to reduce information
distortion along the
supply chain
14-712
14-
Quantitative Techniques For AP
Pure Strategies
Mixed Strategies
Linear Programming
Transportation Method
Other Quantitative
Techniques

14-713
14-
Pure Strategies
Example:

QUARTER
Spring
Summer
Fall
Winter

SALES FORECAST (LB)
80,000
50,000
120,000
150,000

Hiring cost = $100 per worker
Firing cost = $500 per worker
Inventory carrying cost = $0.50 pound per quarter
Regular production cost per pound = $2.00
Production per employee = 1,000 pounds per quarter
Beginning work force = 100 workers

14-714
14-
Level Production Strategy
Level production
(50,000 + 120,000 + 150,000 + 80,000)
= 100,000 pounds
4

QUARTER
Spring
Summer
Fall
Winter

SALES
FORECAST

PRODUCTION
PLAN
INVENTORY

80,000
50,000
120,000
150,000

100,000
20,000
100,000
70,000
100,000
50,000
100,000
0
400,000
140,000
Cost of Level Production Strategy
(400,000 X $2.00) + (140,00 X $.50) = $870,000
14-715
14-
Chase Demand Strategy
QUARTER

Spring
Summer
Fall
Winter

SALES PRODUCTION
FORECAST
PLAN

80,000
50,000
120,000
150,000

80,000
50,000
120,000
150,000

WORKERS WORKERS WORKERS
NEEDED
HIRED
FIRED

80
50
120
150

0
0
70
30

20
30
0
0

100

50

Cost of Chase Demand Strategy
(400,000 X $2.00) + (100 x $100) + (50 x $500) = $835,000

14-716
14-
Level Production with Excel

14-717
14-
Chase Demand with Excel

14-718
14-
Mixed Strategy
Combination of Level Production and
Chase Demand strategies
Examples of management policies
no more than x% of the workforce can be
laid off in one quarter
inventory levels cannot exceed x dollars

Many industries may simply shut down
manufacturing during the low demand
season and schedule employee
vacations during that time
14-719
14-
Mixed Strategies with Excel

14-720
14-
Mixed Strategies with Excel
(cont.)

14-721
14-
General Linear Programming (LP)
Model
LP gives an optimal solution, but demand
and costs must be linear
Let
Wt = workforce size for period t
Pt =units produced in period t
It =units in inventory at the end of period t
Ft =number of workers fired for period t
Ht = number of workers hired for period t
14-722
14-
LP MODEL
Minimize Z = $100 (H1 + H2 + H3 + H4)
+ $500 (F1 + F2 + F3 + F4)
+ $0.50 (I1 + I2 + I3 + I4)
+ $2 (P1 + P2 + P3 + P4)
Subject to

Demand
constraints
Production
constraints

Work force
constraints

P1 - I1
I1 + P2 - I2
I2 + P3 - I3
I3 + P4 - I4
1000 W1
1000 W2
1000 W3
1000 W4
100 + H1 - F1
W1 + H2 - F2
W2 + H3 - F3
W3 + H4 - F4

= 80,000
= 50,000
= 120,000
= 150,000
= P1
= P2
= P3
= P4
= W1
= W2
= W3
= W4

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)

14-723
14-
Setting up the Spreadsheet

14-724
14-
The LP Solution

14-725
14-
Transportation Method
EXPECTED
QUARTER
DEMAND

1
2
3
4

900
1500
1600
3000

REGULAR
OVERTIME SUBCONTRACT
CAPACITY
CAPACITY
CAPACITY

1000
1200
1300
1300

100
150
200
200

500
500
500
500

Regular production cost per unit
$20
Overtime production cost per unit
$25
Subcontracting cost per unit
$28
Inventory holding cost per unit per period
$3
Beginning inventory
300 units
14-726
14-
Transportation Tableau
PERIOD OF USE

PERIOD OF PRODUCTION

1

2

Beginning

0

Inventory
1

3

300

Regular

600

3

—
20

300

6

—
23

100

—

29

1000

100

34

100

37

500

28

31

Subcontract

28

31

34

Subcontract

—

26

1200

28

150

31

150

28

1200

23

25

Regular
Overtime

3

31

Regular

—

1300

Overtime

200

20
25
28

Subcontract
4

Regular

250
—
—
500
1300

Overtime

200

Subcontract

500

Demand

300

26

25

20

9

—

Overtime

2

Unused
Capacity
Capacity

4

900

1500

1600

34

250

500

23

1300

28

200

31

500

20

1300

25

200

28
3000

500
250

14-727
14-
Burruss’ Production Plan
REGULAR
SUBSUBENDING
PERIOD DEMAND PRODUCTION OVERTIME CONTRACT INVENTORY

1
2
3
4
Total

900
1500
1600
3000
7000

1000
1200
1300
1300
4800

100
150
200
200
650

0
250
500
500
1250

500
600
1000
0
2100

14-728
14-
Using Excel for the Transportation
Method of Aggregate Planning

14-729
14-
Other Quantitative Techniques
Linear decision rule (LDR)
Search decision rule (SDR)
Management coefficients model

14-730
14-
Hierarchical Nature of Planning
Production
Planning

Capacity
Planning

Resource
Level

Product lines
or families

Sales and
Operations
Plan

Resource
requirements
plan

Plants

Individual
products

Master
production
schedule

Rough-cut
capacity
plan

Critical
work
centers

Components

Material
requirements
plan

Capacity
requirements
plan

All
work
centers

Manufacturing
operations

Shop
floor
schedule

Input/
output
control

Individual
machines

Items

Disaggregation: process of breaking an aggregate plan into more detailed plans
14-731
14-
Collaborative Planning
Sharing information and synchronizing
production across supply chain
Part of CPFR (collaborative planning,
forecasting, and replenishment)
involves selecting products to be jointly
managed, creating a single forecast of
customer demand, and synchronizing
production across supply chain

14-732
14-
Available-to-Promise (ATP)
Quantity of items that can be promised to customer
Difference between planned production and customer
orders already received
AT in period 1 = (On-hand quantity + MPS in period 1) –
(CO until the next period of planned production)
ATP in period n = (MPS in period n) –
(CO until the next period of planned production)

Capable-to-promise
quantity of items that can be produced and mad available at
a later date
14-733
14-
ATP: Example

14-734
14-
ATP: Example (cont.)

14-735
14-
ATP: Example (cont.)

Take excess units from April

ATP in April = (10+100) – 70 = 40
= 30
ATP in May = 100 – 110 = -10
=0
ATP in June = 100 – 50 = 50

14-736
14-
Rule Based ATP
Product
Request

Yes

Is the product
available at
this location?

No

Availableto-promise

Yes

Is an alternative
product available
at this location?

No

Allocate
inventory
Yes

Is this product
available at a
different
location?
No

Is an alternative
product available
at an alternate
location?

Yes

No

Allocate
inventory

Capable-topromise date

Is the customer
willing to wait for
the product?

No

Availableto-promise

Yes

Revise master
schedule

Trigger production

Lose sale

14-737
14-
Aggregate Planning for Services
1. Most services cannot be inventoried
2. Demand for services is difficult to predict
3. Capacity is also difficult to predict
4. Service capacity must be provided at the
appropriate place and time
5. Labor is usually the most constraining
resource for services

14-738
14-
Yield Management

14-739
14-
Yield Management (cont.)

14-740
14-
Yield Management: Example
NO-SHOWS
NO-

PROBABILITY

0
1
2
3

P(N < X)

.15
.25
.30
.30

.00
.15
.40
.70

.517

Optimal probability of no-shows
noP(n < x) ≤
P(n

Cu
75
=
= .517
Cu + Co
75 + 70

Hotel should be overbooked by two rooms
14-741
14-
Chapter 14 Supplement
Linear Programming
Operations Management
Roberta Russell & Bernard W. Taylor, III
Lecture Outline
Model Formulation
Graphical Solution Method
Linear Programming Model Solution
Solving Linear Programming Problems
with Excel
Sensitivity Analysis

Supplement 14-743
14-
Linear Programming (LP)
A model consisting of linear relationships
representing a firm’s objective and resource constraints

LP is a mathematical modeling technique used to determine a
level of operational activity in order to achieve an objective,
subject to restrictions called constraints

Supplement 14-744
14-
Types of LP

Supplement 14-745
14-
Types of LP (cont.)

Supplement 14-746
14-
Types of LP (cont.)

Supplement 14-747
14-
LP Model Formulation
Decision variables
mathematical symbols representing levels of activity of an
operation

Objective function
a linear relationship reflecting the objective of an operation
most frequent objective of business firms is to maximize profit
most frequent objective of individual operational units (such as
a production or packaging department) is to minimize cost

Constraint
a linear relationship representing a restriction on decision
making

Supplement 14-748
14-
LP Model Formulation (cont.)
Max/min

z = c1x1 + c2x2 + ... + cnxn

subject to:
a11x1 + a12x2 + ... + a1nxn (≤, =, ≥) b1
a21x1 + a22x2 + ... + a2nxn (≤, =, ≥) b2
:
an1x1 + an2x2 + ... + annxn (≤, =, ≥) bn
xj = decision variables
bi = constraint levels
cj = objective function coefficients
aij = constraint coefficients

Supplement 14-749
14-
LP Model: Example
RESOURCE REQUIREMENTS
PRODUCT
Bowl
Mug

Labor
(hr/unit)
1
2

Clay
(lb/unit)
4
3

Revenue
($/unit)
40
50

There are 40 hours of labor and 120 pounds of clay
available each day
Decision variables
x1 = number of bowls to produce
x2 = number of mugs to produce

Supplement 14-750
14-
LP Formulation: Example
Maximize Z = $40 x1 + 50 x2
Subject to
x1 +
4x1 +

2x2 ≤ 40 hr
3x2 ≤ 120 lb
x1 , x2 ≥ 0

Solution is x1 = 24 bowls
Revenue = $1,360

(labor constraint)
(clay constraint)
x2 = 8 mugs

Supplement 14-751
14-
Graphical Solution Method
1. Plot model constraint on a set of coordinates
in a plane
2. Identify the feasible solution space on the
graph where all constraints are satisfied
simultaneously
3. Plot objective function to find the point on
boundary of this space that maximizes (or
minimizes) value of objective function

Supplement 14-752
14-
Graphical Solution: Example
x2
50 –
40 –

4 x1 + 3 x2 ≤ 120 lb

30 –
Area common to
both constraints

20 –

x1 + 2 x2 ≤ 40 hr

10 –
0–

|
10

|
20

|
30

|
40

|
50

|
60

x1
Supplement 14-753
14-
Computing Optimal Values
x1 +
4x1 +

40 – 4 x1 + 3 x2 = 120 lb
30 –
20 –

x1 + 2 x2 = 40 hr

2x 2 =
3x 2 =

40
120

4x1 +
-4x1 -

8x 2 =
3x 2 =

160
-120

5x 2 =
x2 =

x2

40
8

x1 + 2(8) =
x1
=

40
24

10 – 8
0–

|
10

| 24 |
20
30

| x1
40
Z = $40(24) + $50(8) = $1,360
Supplement 14-754
14-
Extreme Corner Points
x1 = 0 bowls
x2 = 20 mugs
Z = $1,000

x2
40 –
30 –
20 –

A
B

10 –
0–

x1 = 224 bowls
x2 = 8 mugs
Z = $1,360
x1 = 30 bowls
x2 = 0 mugs
Z = $1,200

|
10

|
20

| C|
30 40

x1

Supplement 14-755
14-
Objective Function
x2
40 –

4x1 + 3x2 = 120 lb
3x
Z = 70x1 + 20x2
70x 20x

30 –

Optimal point:
x1 = 30 bowls
x2 = 0 mugs
Z = $2,100

A
20 –

B

10 –

0–

|
10

|
20

x1 + 2x2 = 40 hr
2x
| C
|
30
40
x
1

Supplement 14-756
14-
Minimization Problem
CHEMICAL CONTRIBUTION
Brand

Nitrogen (lb/bag)

GroGro-plus
CropCrop-fast

Phosphate (lb/bag)

2
4

4
3

Minimize Z = $6x1 + $3x2
subject to
2x1 + 4x2 ≥ 16 lb of nitrogen
4x1 + 3x2 ≥ 24 lb of phosphate
x 1, x 2 ≥ 0
Supplement 14-757
14-
Graphical Solution
x2
14 –

x1 = 0 bags of Gro-plus
GroCrop12 – x2 = 8 bags of Crop-fast
Z = $24
10 –
A

Z = 6x1 + 3x2
6x 3x

8–
6–
4–
2–
0–

B
|
2

|
4

|
6

|
8

C

|
10

|
12

|
14

x1
Supplement 14-758
14-
Simplex Method
A mathematical procedure for solving linear programming
problems according to a set of steps
Slack variables added to ≤ constraints to represent unused
resources
x1 + 2x2 + s1 =40 hours of labor
40
4x1 + 3x2 + s2 =120 lb of clay
120

Surplus variables subtracted from ≥ constraints to represent
excess above resource requirement. For example,
2x1 + 4x2 ≥ 16 is transformed into
4x
16
2x1 + 4x2 - s1 = 16
4x
16

Slack/surplus variables have a 0 coefficient in the objective
function
Z = $40x1 + $50x2 + 0s1 + 0s2

Supplement 14-759
14-
Solution
Points with
Slack
Variables

Supplement 14-760
14-
Solution
Points with
Surplus
Variables

Supplement 14-761
14-
Solving LP Problems with Excel

Supplement 14-762
14-
Solving LP Problems with Excel
(cont.)

Supplement 14-763
14-
Solving LP Problems with Excel
(cont.)

Supplement 14-764
14-
Sensitivity Range for Labor
Hours

Supplement 14-765
14-
Sensitivity Range for
Bowls

Supplement 14-766
14-
Chapter 15
Resource Planning
Operations Management
Roberta Russell & Bernard W. Taylor, III
Lecture Outline
Material Requirements Planning (MRP)
Capacity Requirements Planning (CRP)
Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP)
Customer Relationship Management (CRM)
Supply Chain Management (SCM)
Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)

15-768
15-
Resource
Planning for
Manufacturing

15-769
15-
Material Requirements
Planning (MRP)
Computerized inventory control and
production planning system
When to use MRP?
Dependent demand items
Discrete demand items
Complex products
Job shop production
Assemble-to-order environments
15-770
15-
Demand Characteristics
Independent demand

Dependent demand

100 x 1 =
100 tabletops

100 x 4 = 400 table legs

100 tables

Continuous demand

Discrete demand

400 –
300 –
No. of tables

No. of tables

400 –

200 –
100 –
1

2

3

4
Week

300 –
200 –
100 –

5
M T W Th F

M T W Th F

15-771
15-
Material
Requirements
Planning
Product
structure
file

Master
production
schedule

Material
requirements
planning

Item
master
file

Planned
order
releases

Work
orders

Purchase
orders

Rescheduling
notices

15-772
15-
MRP Inputs and Outputs
Inputs
Master production
schedule
Product structure file
Item master file

Outputs
Planned order
releases
Work orders
Purchase orders
Rescheduling notices

15-773
15-
Master Production Schedule
Drives MRP process with a schedule of
finished products
Quantities represent production not demand
Quantities may consist of a combination of
customer orders and demand forecasts
Quantities represent what needs to be
produced, not what can be produced
Quantities represent end items that may or
may not be finished products

15-774
15-
Master Production Schedule
(cont.)
MPS ITEM
Pencil Case
Clipboard
Lapboard
Lapdesk

1

2

125
85
75
0

125
95
120
50

PERIOD
3
4
125
120
47
0

125
100
20
50

5
125
100
17
0

15-775
15-
Product Structure File

15-776
15-
Product Structure
Clipboard

Top clip (1)

Pivot (1)

Bottom clip (1)

Spring (1)

Rivets (2)
Finished clipboard

Pressboard (1)

15-777
15-
Product Structure Tree
Level 0

Clipboard

Pressboard
(1)

Top Clip
(1)

Clip Ass’y
(1)

Bottom Clip
(1)

Rivets
(2)

Pivot
(1)

Level 1

Spring
(1)

Level 2

15-778
15-
Multilevel Indented BOM
LEVEL

0----1----2---2---2---2--1---1---

ITEM

Clipboard
Clip Assembly
Top Clip
Bottom Clip
Pivot
Spring
Rivet
Press Board

UNIT OF MEASURE

QUANTITY

ea
ea
ea
ea
ea
ea
ea
ea

1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1

15-779
15-
Specialized BOMs
Phantom bills
Transient subassemblies
Never stocked
Immediately consumed in next stage

K-bills
Group small, loose parts under pseudo-item
pseudonumber
Reduces paperwork, processing time, and file
space

15-780
15-
Specialized BOMs (cont.)
Modular bills
Product assembled from major subassemblies and
customer options
Modular bill kept for each major subassembly
Simplifies forecasting and planning
X10 automobile example
3 x 8 x 3 x 8 x 4 = 2,304 configurations
3 + 8 + 3 + 8 + 4 = 26 modular bills

15-781
15-
Modular BOMs
X10
Automobile

Engines
(1 of 3)

4-Cylinder (.40)

Exterior color
(1 of 8)

Interior
(1 of 3)

Bright red (.10)

Leather (.20)

Interior color
(1 of 8)

Body
(1 of 4)

Grey (.10)

Sports coupe (.20)

6-Cylinder (.50)

White linen (.10)

Tweed (.40)

Light blue (.10)

Two-door (.20)
Two-

8-Cylinder (.10)

Sulphur yellow (.10)

Plush (.40)

Rose (.10)

Four-door (.30)
Four-

Off-white (.20)
Off-

Station wagon (.30)

Neon orange (.10)
Metallic blue (.10)

Cool green (.10)

Emerald green (.10)

Black (.20)

Jet black (.20)

Brown (.10)

Champagne (.20)

B/W checked (.10)

15-782
15-
Time-phased Bills
an assembly chart shown against a time
scale

Forward scheduling: start at today‘s date and schedule forward to determine
the earliest date the job can be finished. If each item takes one period to
complete, the clipboards can be finished in three periods
Backward scheduling: start at the due date and schedule backwards to
determine when to begin work. If an order for clipboards is due by period three,
we should start production now
15-783
15-
Item Master File
DESCRIPTION
Item
Pressboard
Item no.
7341
Item type
Purch
Product/sales class
Comp
Value class
B
Buyer/planner
RSR
Vendor/drawing
07142
Phantom code
N
Unit price/cost
1.25
Pegging
Y
LLC
1

INVENTORY POLICY
Lead time
Annual demand
Holding cost
Ordering/setup cost
Safety stock
Reorder point
EOQ
Minimum order qty
Maximum order qty
Multiple order qty
Policy code

1
5000
1
50
0
39
316
100
500
1
3

15-784
15-
Item Master File (cont.)
PHYSICAL INVENTORY
On hand
Location
On order
Allocated
Cycle
Last count
Difference

150
W142
100
75
3
9/5
-2

USAGE/SALES
YTD usage/sales
MTD usage/sales
YTD receipts
MTD receipts
Last receipt
Last issue
CODES

Cost acct.
Routing
Engr

1100
75
1200
0
8/25
10/5

00754
00326
07142

15-785
15-
MRP Processes
Exploding the bill
of material
Netting out inventory
Lot sizing
TimeTime-phasing
requirements

Netting
process of subtracting ononhand quantities and
scheduled receipts from
gross requirements to
produce net requirements

Lot sizing
determining the quantities
in which items are usually
made or purchased

15-786
15-
MRP Matrix

15-787
15-
MRP: Example
Master Production Schedule
1
Clipboard
Lapdesk

85
0

2
95
60

3
120
0

4
100
60

5
100
0

Item Master File
On hand
On order
LLC
Lot size
Lead time

CLIPBOARD
LAPDESK
25
20
175 (Period 1)
0
(sch receipt)
0
0
L4L
Mult 50
1
1

PRESSBOARD
150
0
1
Min 100
1
15-788
15-
MRP: Example (cont.)
Product Structure Record

Level 0

Clipboard

Pressboard
(1)

Clip Ass’y
(1)

Rivets
(2)

Level 1

Level 0

Lapdesk

Pressboard
(2)

Trim
(3’)

Beanbag
(1)

Glue
(4 oz)

Level 1

15-789
15-
MRP: Example (cont.)
ITEM: CLIPBOARD
LOT SIZE: L4L

LLC: 0
LT: 1

Gross Requirements

PERIOD
1

2

3

4

5

85

95

120

100

100

Scheduled Receipts
Projected on Hand

175
25

Net Requirements
Planned Order Receipts
Planned Order Releases

15-790
15-
MRP: Example (cont.)
ITEM: CLIPBOARD
LOT SIZE: L4L

LLC: 0
LT: 1

Gross Requirements

PERIOD
1

2

3

4

5

85

95

120

100

100

Scheduled Receipts
Projected on Hand
Net Requirements

175
25

115
0

Planned Order Receipts
Planned Order Releases

(25 + 175) = 200 units available
(200 - 85) = 115 on hand at the end of Period 1

15-791
15-
MRP: Example (cont.)
ITEM: CLIPBOARD
LOT SIZE: L4L

LLC: 0
LT: 1

PERIOD
1

3

4

5

85

Gross Requirements

2
95

120

100

100

Scheduled Receipts
Projected on Hand

25

Net Requirements

175
115

20

0

0

Planned Order Receipts
Planned Order Releases

115 units available
(115 - 85) = 20 on hand at the end of Period 2

15-792
15-
MRP: Example (cont.)
ITEM: CLIPBOARD
LOT SIZE: L4L

LLC: 0
LT: 1

PERIOD
1

3

4

5

85

Gross Requirements

2
95

120

100

100

Scheduled Receipts
Projected on Hand

25

Net Requirements

175
115

20

0

0

0

100

Planned Order Receipts
Planned Order Releases

100
100

20 units available
(20 - 120) = -100 — 100 additional Clipboards are required
Order must be placed in Period 2 to be received in Period 3
15-793
15-
MRP: Example (cont.)
ITEM: CLIPBOARD
LOT SIZE: L4L

LLC: 0
LT: 1

PERIOD
2

3

4

5

85

Gross Requirements

1

95

120

100

100

Scheduled Receipts
Projected on Hand

25

Net Requirements

175
115

20

0

0

0

0

0

100

100

100

100

100

100

Planned Order Receipts
Planned Order Releases

100

100

100

Following the same logic Gross Requirements in Periods 4
and 5 develop Net Requirements, Planned Order Receipts, and
Planned Order Releases
15-794
15-
MRP: Example (cont.)
ITEM: LAPDESK
LOT SIZE: MULT 50

LLC: 0
LT: 1

Gross Requirements

PERIOD
1

2

0

60

3
0

4
60

5
0

Scheduled Receipts
Projected on Hand

20

Net Requirements
Planned Order Receipts
Planned Order Releases

15-795
15-
MRP: Example (cont.)
ITEM: LAPDESK
LOT SIZE: MULT 50

LLC: 0
LT: 1

Gross Requirements

PERIOD
1

2

3

4

5

0

60

0

60

0

20

10

10

0

0

Scheduled Receipts
Projected on Hand

20

Net Requirements

0

Planned Order Releases

50

50

50

Planned Order Receipts

40

50
50

Following the same logic, the Lapdesk MRP matrix is
completed as shown

15-796
15-
MRP: Example (cont.)
ITEM: CLIPBOARD
LLC: 0
LOT SIZE: L4L
LT: 1

2
100

Planned Order Releases
ITEM: LAPDESK
LOT SIZE: MULT 50

LLC: 0
LT: 1

Planned Order Releases
ITEM: PRESSBOARD LLC: 0
LOT SIZE: MIN 100
LT: 1
Gross Requirements
Scheduled Receipts
Projected on Hand
Net Requirements
Planned Order Receipts
Planned Order Releases

1

100

2

1

PERIOD
3
4
PERIOD
3
4

50
1

5

100
5

50
2

PERIOD
3
4

5

150

15-797
15-
MRP: Example (cont.)
ITEM: CLIPBOARD
LLC: 0
LOT SIZE: L4L
LT: 1
Planned Order Releases
ITEM: LAPDESK
LOT SIZE: MULT 50

LLC: 0
LT: 1

Planned Order Releases

2
100

1

PERIOD
3
4
100

2

PERIOD
x1
3
4

x1
1
50

x2
x2
ITEM: PRESSBOARD LLC: 0
LOT SIZE: MIN 100
LT: 1
1
2
Gross Requirements
100
100
Scheduled Receipts
Projected on Hand
150
Net Requirements
Planned Order Receipts
Planned Order Releases

5

100

x1
5

50
PERIOD
3
4
200
100

5
0

15-798
15-
MRP: Example (cont.)
ITEM: CLIPBOARD
LLC: 0
LOT SIZE: L4L
LT: 1

2
100

Planned Order Releases
ITEM: LAPDESK
LOT SIZE: MULT 50

LLC: 0
LT: 1

Planned Order Releases
ITEM: PRESSBOARD LLC: 0
LOT SIZE: MIN 100
LT: 1
Gross Requirements
Scheduled Receipts
Projected on Hand
150
Net Requirements
Planned Order Receipts
Planned Order Releases

1

100

2

1

PERIOD
3
4
PERIOD
3
4

50

100
5

50

1
100
50

PERIOD
3
4
200
100

2
100
50

100

5

50
100
150

0
150
150
100

0

5
0
0

100
100

15-799
15-
MRP: Example (cont.)
Planned Order Report
PERIOD
ITEM
Clipboard
Lapdesk
Pressboard

1

2

3

4

5

100 100 100
50
50
100 150 100

15-800
15-
Lot Sizing in MRP Systems
Lot-for-lot ordering policy
Fixed-size lot ordering policy
Minimum order quantities
Maximum order quantities
Multiple order quantities
Economic order quantity
Periodic order quantity
15-801
15-
Using Excel for MRP Calculations

15-802
15-
Advanced Lot Sizing Rules: L4L

Total cost of L4L = (4 X $60) + (0 X $1) = $240
15-803
15-
Advanced Lot Sizing Rules: EOQ
EO Q =

2(30)(60
= 60
1

minimum order quantity

Total cost of EOQ = (2 X $60) + [(10 + 50 + 40) X $1)] = $220
15-804
15-
Advanced Lot Sizing Rules: POQ
POQ = Q / d = 60 / 30 = 2 periods worth of requirements

Total cost of POQ = (2 X $60) + [(20 + 40) X $1] = $180

15-805
15-
Planned Order Report
Item
#2740
On hand
100
On order
200
Allocated
50
DATE

10-08
10-

10-27
10-

ORDER NO.
9-26
9-30
10-01
10SR 7542
10-10
1010-15
1010-23
10GR 6473

Date
9 - 25 - 05
Lead time
2 weeks
Lot size
200
Safety stock
50
GROSS REQS.

AL 4416
AL 4174
GR 6470

SCHEDULED PROJECTED
RECEIPTS
ON HAND
ACTION
25
25
50
200

CO 4471
GR 6471
GR 6471
50

Key: AL = allocated
CO = customer order
PO = purchase order

150

75
50
25
- 50

50
25
0
- 50
Expedite SR 10-01
1075
25
0
Release PO 10-13
10-

WO = work order
SR = scheduled receipt
GR = gross requirement
15-806
15-
MRP Action Report
Current date 9-25-08
9-25ITEM
#2740
#3616
#2412
#3427
#2516
#2740
#3666

DATE

10-08
1010-09
1010-10
1010-15
1010-20
1010-27
1010-31
10-

ORDER NO. QTY.
7542

200

7648

100
200
50

Expedite
Move forward
Move forward
Move backward
De-expedite
DeRelease
Release

ACTION
SR
PO
PO
PO
SR
PO
WO

10-01
1010-07
1010-05
1010-25
1010-30
1010-13
1010-24
10-

15-807
15-
Capacity Requirements
Planning (CRP)
Creates a load profile
Identifies under-loads and over-loads
Inputs
Planned order releases
Routing file
Open orders file

15-808
15-
CRP
MRP planned
order
releases

Routing
file

Capacity
requirements
planning

Open
orders
file

Load profile for
each process
15-809
15-
Calculating Capacity
Maximum capability to produce
Rated Capacity
Theoretical output that could be attained if a process were
operating at full speed without interruption, exceptions, or
downtime

Effective Capacity
Takes into account the efficiency with which a particular
product or customer can be processed and the utilization of
the scheduled hours or work
Effective Daily Capacity = (no. of machines or workers) x
(hours per shift) x (no. of shifts) x (utilization) x ( efficiency)
15-810
15-
Calculating Capacity (cont.)
Utilization
Percent of available time spent working

Efficiency
How well a machine or worker performs compared to a
standard output level

Load
Standard hours of work assigned to a facility

Load Percent
Ratio of load to capacity
load
Load Percent =
capacity

x 100%

15-811
15-
Load Profiles
graphical comparison of load versus
capacity
Leveling underloaded conditions:
Acquire more work
Pull work ahead that is scheduled for later
time periods
Reduce normal capacity
15-812
15-
Reducing Over-load Conditions
Over1. Eliminating unnecessary requirements
2. Rerouting jobs to alternative machines,
workers, or work centers
3. Splitting lots between two or more machines
4. Increasing normal capacity
5. Subcontracting
6. Increasing efficiency of the operation
7. Pushing work back to later time periods
8. Revising master schedule
15-813
15-
Hours of capacity

Initial Load Profile
120 –
110 –
100 –
90 –
80 –
70 –
60 –
50 –
40 –
30 –
20 –
10 –
0–

Normal
capacity

1

2

3

4

5

6

Time (weeks)

15-814
15-
Hours of capacity

Adjusted Load Profile
120 –
110 –
100 –
90 –
80 –
70 –
60 –
50 –
40 –
30 –
20 –
10 –
0–

Pull ahead
Overtime

1

2

Work
an
extra
shift

Push back
Push back

3

4

Normal
capacity

5

6

Time (weeks)

Load leveling
process of balancing underloads and overloads
15-815
15-
Relaxing MRP Assumptions
Material is not always the most constraining
resource
Lead times can vary
Not every transaction needs to be recorded
Shop floor may require a more sophisticated
scheduling system
Scheduling in advance may not be appropriate
for on-demand production.
15-816
15-
Enterprise Resource Planning
(ERP)
Software that organizes and manages
a company’s business processes by
sharing information across functional
areas
integrating business processes
facilitating customer interaction
providing benefit to global companies

15-817
15-
Organizational Data Flows

Source: Adapted from Joseph Brady, Ellen Monk, and Bret Wagner, Concepts in
Enterprise Resource Planning (Boston: Course Technology, 2001), pp. 7–12
15-818
15-
ERP’s Central Database

15-819
15-
Selected Enterprise Software
Vendors

15-820
15-
ERP Implementation
Analyze business processes
Choose modules to implement
Which processes have the biggest impact on
customer relations?
Which process would benefit the most from
integration?
Which processes should be standardized?

Align level of sophistication
Finalize delivery and access
Link with external partners
15-821
15-
Customer Relationship
Management (CRM)
Software that
Plans and executes business processes
Involves customer interaction
Changes focus from managing products to
managing customers
Analyzes point-of-sale data for patterns
point-ofused to predict future behavior

15-822
15-
Supply Chain Management
Software that plans and executes business
processes related to supply chains
Includes
Supply chain planning
Supply chain execution
Supplier relationship management

Distinctions between ERP and SCM are
becoming increasingly blurred
15-823
15-
Product Lifecycle Management
(PLM)
Software that
Incorporates new product design and
development and product life cycle
management
Integrates customers and suppliers in the
design process though the entire product life
cycle

15-824
15-
ERP and Software Systems

15-825
15-
Connectivity
Application programming interfaces (APIs)
give other programs well-defined ways of speaking to
wellthem

Enterprise Application Integration (EAI) solutions
EDI is being replaced by XML, business
language of Internet
ServiceService-oriented architecture (SOA)
collection of “services” that communicate with each
other within software or between software

15-826
15-
Chapter 16
Lean Systems
Operations Management
Roberta Russell & Bernard W. Taylor, III
Lecture Outline
Basic Elements of Lean Production
Benefits of Lean Production
Implementing Lean Production
Lean Services
Leaning the Supply Chain
Lean Six Sigma
Lean and the Environment
Lean Consumption

16-828
16-
Lean Production
Doing more with less inventory, fewer
workers, less space
Just-in-time (JIT)
smoothing the flow of material to arrive
just as it is needed
“JIT” and “Lean Production” are used
interchangeably

Muda
waste, anything other than that which
adds value to product or service

16-829
16-
Waste in Operations

16-830
16-
Waste in Operations (cont.)

16-831
16-
Waste in Operations (cont.)

16-832
16-
Basic Elements
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

Flexible resources
Cellular layouts
Pull system
Kanbans
Small lots
Quick setups
Uniform production levels
Quality at the source
Total productive
maintenance
Supplier networks

16-833
16-
Flexible Resources
Multifunctional workers
perform more than one job
general-purpose machines perform
several basic functions

Cycle time
time required for the worker to complete
one pass through the operations
assigned

Takt time
paces production to customer demand

16-834
16-
Standard Operating
Routine for a Worker

16-835
16-
Cellular Layouts
Manufacturing cells
comprised of dissimilar machines brought
together to manufacture a family of parts

Cycle time is adjusted to match takt time
by changing worker paths

16-836
16-
Cells with Worker Routes

16-837
16-
Worker Routes Lengthen as
Volume Decreases

16-838
16-
Pull System
Material is pulled through the system when
needed
Reversal of traditional push system where
material is pushed according to a schedule
Forces cooperation
Prevent over and underproduction
While push systems rely on a predetermined
schedule, pull systems rely on customer
requests

16-839
16-
Kanbans
Card which indicates standard quantity
of production
Derived from two-bin inventory system
twoMaintain discipline of pull production
Authorize production and movement of
goods

16-840
16-
Sample Kanban

16-841
16-
Origin of Kanban
a) Two-bin inventory system
Two-

b) Kanban inventory system

Bin 1
Kanban
Bin 2
Reorder
card

Q-R
R

R

Q = order quantity
R = reorder point - demand during lead time

16-842
16-
Types of Kanban
Production kanban
authorizes production of
goods

Withdrawal kanban
authorizes movement of
goods

Kanban square
a marked area designated
to hold items

Signal kanban
a triangular kanban
used to signal
production at the
previous workstation

Material kanban
used to order material in
advance of a process

Supplier kanban
rotates between the
factory and suppliers
16-843
16-
16-844
16-
16-845
16-
16-846
16-
Determining Number of
Kanbans
No. of Kanbans =

average demand during lead time + safety stock
container size
dL + S
C
where

N =

N = number of kanbans or containers
d = average demand over some time period
L = lead time to replenish an order
S = safety stock
C = container size

16-847
16-
Determining Number of
Kanbans: Example
d = 150 bottles per hour
L = 30 minutes = 0.5 hours
S = 0.10(150 x 0.5) = 7.5
C = 25 bottles
(150 x 0.5) + 7.5
dL + S
N=
=
25
C
= 75 + 7.5 = 3.3 kanbans or containers
25
Round up to 4 (to allow some slack) or
down to 3 (to force improvement)
16-848
16-
Small Lots
Require less space and capital
investment
Move processes closer together
Make quality problems easier to
detect
Make processes more dependent
on each other
16-849
16-
Inventory Hides Problems

16-850
16-
Less Inventory Exposes Problems

16-851
16-
Components of Lead Time
Processing time
Reduce number of items or improve efficiency

Move time
Reduce distances, simplify movements, standardize
routings

Waiting time
Better scheduling, sufficient capacity

Setup time
Generally the biggest bottleneck
16-852
16-
Quick Setups
Internal setup
Can be performed
only when a
process is stopped

External setup
Can be performed
in advance

SMED Principles
Separate internal setup from
external setup
Convert internal setup to external
setup
Streamline all aspects of setup
Perform setup activities in
parallel or eliminate them entirely

16-853
16-
Common Techniques for Reducing
Setup Time

16-854
16-
Common Techniques for Reducing
Setup Time (cont.)

16-855
16-
Common Techniques for Reducing
Setup Time (cont.)

16-856
16-
Uniform Production Levels
Result from smoothing production
requirements on final assembly line
Kanban systems can handle +/- 10%
+/demand changes
Reduce variability with more accurate
forecasts
Smooth demand across planning
horizon
MixedMixed-model assembly steadies
component production
16-857
16-
MixedMixed-Model Sequencing

16-858
16-
Quality at the Source
Visual control
makes problems visible

Poka-yokes
prevent defects from
occurring

Kaizen
a system of continuous
improvement; “change for
the good of all”

Jidoka
authority to stop the
production line

Andons
call lights that signal
quality problems

Under-capacity
scheduling
leaves time for planning,
problem solving, and
maintenance

16-859
16-
Examples of Visual
Control

16-860
16-
Examples of Visual
Control (cont.)

16-861
16-
Examples of Visual
Control (cont.)

16-862
16-
5 Whys
One of the keys to an effective Kaizen is
finding the root cause of a problem and
eliminating it
A practice of asking “why?” repeatedly
until the underlying cause is identified
(usually requiring five questions)
Simple, yet powerful technique for finding
the root cause of a problem
16-863
16-
Total Productive
Maintenance (TPM)
Breakdown maintenance
Repairs to make failed machine operational

Preventive maintenance
System of periodic inspection and
maintenance to keep machines operating

TPM combines preventive maintenance
and total quality concepts
16-864
16-
TPM Requirements
Design products that can be easily produced
on existing machines
Design machines for easier operation,
changeover, maintenance
Train and retrain workers to operate machines
Purchase machines that maximize productive
potential
Design preventive maintenance plan spanning
life of machine

16-865
16-
5S Scan

Goal

Eliminate or Correct

Seiri(sort)

Keep only what you
need

Seiton(set in order)

A place for
everything and
everything in its
place
Cleaning, and looking
for ways to keep
clean and organized

Unneeded equipment, tools, furniture;
unneeded items on walls, bulletins; items
blocking aisles or stacked in corners;
unneeded inventory, supplies, parts; safety
hazards
Items not in their correct places; correct places
not obvious; aisles, workstations, & equipment
locations not indicated; items not put away
immediately after use
Floors, walls, stairs, equipment, & surfaces not
clean; cleaning materials not easily
accessible; lines, labels, signs broken or
unclean; other cleaning problems
Necessary information not visible; standards
not known; checklists missing; quantities and
limits not easily recognizable; items can’t be
located within 30 seconds
Number of workers without 5S training; number
of daily 5S inspections not performed; number
of personal items not stored; number of times
job aids not available or up-to-date

Seisou (shine)

Seiketsu
(standardize)
Shisuke (sustain)

Maintaining and
monitoring the first
three categories
Sticking to the rules

16-866
16-
Supplier Networks
Long-term supplier contracts
Synchronized production
Supplier certification
Mixed loads and frequent deliveries
Precise delivery schedules
Standardized, sequenced delivery
Locating in close proximity to the customer

16-867
16-
Benefits of Lean
Production
Reduced inventory
Improved quality
Lower costs
Reduced space requirements
Shorter lead time
Increased productivity

16-868
16-
Benefits of Lean
Production (cont.)
Greater flexibility
Better relations with suppliers
Simplified scheduling and control activities
Increased capacity
Better use of human resources
More product variety

16-869
16-
Implementing Lean Production
Use lean production to finely tune an
operating system
Somewhat different in USA than Japan
Lean production is still evolving
Lean production is not for everyone

16-870
16-
Lean Services
Basic elements of lean
production apply equally to
services
Most prevalent applications
lean retailing
lean banking
lean health care
16-871
16-
Leaning the Supply Chain
“pulling” a smooth flow of material through a
series of suppliers to support frequent
replenishment orders and changes in customer
demand
Firms need to share information and
coordinate demand forecasts, production
planning, and inventory replenishment with
suppliers and supplier’s suppliers throughout
supply chain
16-872
16-
Leaning the Supply Chain (cont.)
Steps in Leaning the Supply Chain:
Build a highly collaborative business
environment
Adopt the technology to support your
system

16-873
16-
Lean Six Sigma
Lean and Six Sigma are natural partners for
process improvement
Lean
Eliminates waste and creates flow
More continuous improvement

Six Sigma
Reduces variability and enhances process
capabilities
Requires breakthrough improvements
16-874
16-
Lean and the Environment
Lean’s mandate to eliminate waste and
operate only with those resources that
are absolutely necessary aligns well with
environmental initiatives
Environmental waste is often an indicator
of poor process design and inefficient
production
16-875
16-
EPA Recommendations
Commit to eliminate environmental waste through lean
implementation
Recognize new improvement opportunities by
incorporating environmental, heath and safety (EHS)
icons and data into value stream maps
Involve staff with EHS expertise in planning
Find and drive out environmental wastes in specific
process by using lean process-improvement tools
processEmpower and enable workers to eliminate
environmental wastes in their work areas

16-876
16-
Lean Consumption
Consumptions process involves locating,
buying, installing, using, maintaining, repairing,
and recycling.
Lean Consumption seeks to:
Provide customers what they want, where and
when they want it
Resolve customer problems quickly and completely
Reduce the number of problems customers need to
solve

16-877
16-
Chapter 17
Scheduling
Operations Management
Roberta Russell & Bernard W. Taylor, III
Lecture Outline
Objectives in Scheduling
Loading
Sequencing
Monitoring
Advanced Planning and Scheduling Systems
Theory of Constraints
Employee Scheduling

17-879
17-
What is Scheduling?
Last stage of planning before production
occurs
Specifies when labor, equipment, and
facilities are needed to produce a
product or provide a service

17-880
17-
Scheduled Operations
Process Industry
Linear programming
EOQ with non-instantaneous
nonreplenishment

Mass Production
Assembly line balancing

Project
Project -scheduling
techniques (PERT, CPM)

Batch Production
Aggregate planning
Master scheduling
Material requirements
planning (MRP)
Capacity requirements
planning (CRP)

17-881
17-
Objectives in Scheduling
Meet customer due
dates
Minimize job lateness
Minimize response time
Minimize completion
time
Minimize time in the
system

Minimize overtime
Maximize machine or
labor utilization
Minimize idle time
Minimize work-inwork-inprocess inventory

17-882
17-
Shop Floor Control (SFC)
scheduling and monitoring of day-to-day production
day-toin a job shop
also called production control and production
activity control (PAC)
usually performed by production control department
Loading
Check availability of material, machines, and labor

Sequencing
Release work orders to shop and issue dispatch lists for
individual machines

Monitoring
Maintain progress reports on each job until it is complete
17-883
17-
Loading
Process of assigning work to limited
resources
Perform work with most efficient
resources
Use assignment method of linear
programming to determine allocation

17-884
17-
Assignment Method
1. Perform row reductions

4. If number of lines equals number
of rows in matrix, then optimum
subtract minimum value in each
solution has been found. Make
row from all other row values
assignments where zeros appear
2. Perform column reductions
subtract minimum value in each
column from all other column
values

3. Cross out all zeros in matrix
use minimum number of
horizontal and vertical lines

Else modify matrix
subtract minimum uncrossed value
from all uncrossed values
add it to all cells where two lines
intersect
other values in matrix remain
unchanged

5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until
optimum solution is reached

17-885
17-
Assignment Method: Example
Initial
Matrix
Bryan
Kari
Noah
Chris
Row reduction
5
4
2
5

0
0
1
1

1
2
0
0

1
10
6
7
9

PROJECT
3
4
6
10
4
6
5
6
4
10

2
5
2
6
5

Column reduction
5
4
1
6

3
2
0
3

0
0
1
1

1
2
0
0

4
3
0
5

Cover all zeros
3
2
0
3

0
0
1
1

1
2
0
0

4
3
0
5

Number lines ≠ number of rows so modify matrix

17-886
17-
Assignment Method: Example (cont.)
Modify matrix
1
0
0
1

0
0
3
1

1
2
2
0

Cover all zeros
2
1
0
3

1
0
0
1

0
0
3
1

1
2
2
0

2
1
0
3

Number of lines = number of rows so at optimal solution
PROJECT
Bryan
Kari
Noah
Chris

1
1
0
0
1

2
0
0
3
1

3
1
2
2
0

PROJECT
4
2
1
0
3

Bryan
Kari
Noah
Chris

1
10
6
7
9

2
5
2
6
5

3
6
4
5
4

4
10
6
6
10

Project Cost = (5 + 6 + 4 + 6) X $100 = $2,100
17-887
17-
Sequencing
Prioritize jobs assigned to a resource
If no order specified use first-come first-served (FCFS)
Other Sequencing Rules
FCFS - first-come, first-served
LCFS - last come, first served
DDATE - earliest due date
CUSTPR - highest customer priority
SETUP - similar required setups
SLACK - smallest slack
CR - smallest critical ratio
SPT - shortest processing time
LPT - longest processing time
17-888
17-
Minimum Slack and
Smallest Critical Ratio
SLACK considers both work and time remaining
SLACK = (due date – today’s date) – (processing time)

CR recalculates sequence as processing
continues and arranges information in ratio form
time remaining
CR = remaining
work

due date - today’s date
=
remaining processing time

If CR > 1, job ahead of schedule
If CR < 1, job behind schedule
If CR = 1, job on schedule
17-889
17-
Sequencing Jobs through One Process
Flow time (completion time)
Time for a job to flow through system

Makespan
Time for a group of jobs to be completed

Tardiness
Difference between a late job’s due date
and its completion time
17-890
17-
Simple Sequencing Rules

JOB

PROCESSING
TIME

DUE
DATE

A
B
C
D
E

5
10
2
8
6

10
15
5
12
8

17-891
17-
Simple Sequencing
Rules: FCFS
FCFS
START PROCESSING COMPLETION
SEQUENCE TIME
TIME
TIME
DATE

A
B
C
D
E
Total
Average

0
5
15
17
25

5
10
2
8
6

5
15
17
25
31
93
93/5 = 18.60

10
15
5
12
8

DUE
TARDINESS

0
0
12
13
23
48
48/5 = 9.6

17-892
17-
Simple Sequencing
Rules: DDATE
DDATE
START PROCESSING COMPLETION
SEQUENCE TIME
TIME
TIME
DATE

C
E
A
D
B
Total
Average

0
2
8
13
21

2
6
5
8
10

2
8
13
21
31
75
75/5 = 15.00

5
8
10
12
15

DUE
TARDINESS

0
0
3
9
16
28
28/5 = 5.6

17-893
17-
Simple Sequencing
Rules: SLACK

A(10-0) – 5 = 5
B(15-0) – 10 = 5
C(5-0) – 2 = 3
D(12-0) – 8 = 4
E(8-0) – 6 = 2

SLACK
START PROCESSING COMPLETION
SEQUENCE TIME
TIME
TIME
DATE

E
C
D
A
B
Total
Average

0
6
8
16
21

6
2
8
5
10

6
8
16
21
31
82
82/5 = 16.40

8
5
12
10
15

DUE
TARDINESS

0
3
4
11
16
34
34/5 = 6.8

17-894
17-
Simple Sequencing
Rules: SPT
SPT
START PROCESSING COMPLETION
SEQUENCE TIME
TIME
TIME
DATE

C
A
E
D
B
Total
Average

0
2
7
13
21

2
5
6
8
10

2
7
13
21
31
74
74/5 = 14.80

5
10
8
12
15

DUE
TARDINESS

0
0
5
9
16
30
30/5 = 6

17-895
17-
Simple Sequencing
Rules: Summary
RULE

AVERAGE
COMPLETION TIME

FCFS
DDATE
SLACK
SPT

18.60
15.00
16.40
14.80

AVERAGE
TARDINESS

9.6
5.6
6.8
6.0

NO. OF
JOBS TARDY

3
3
4
3

MAXIMUM
TARDINESS

23
16
16
16

17-896
17-
Sequencing Jobs Through
Two Serial Process
Johnson’s Rule
1. List time required to process each job at each machine.
Set up a one-dimensional matrix to represent desired
onesequence with # of slots equal to # of jobs.
2. Select smallest processing time at either machine. If
that time is on machine 1, put the job as near to
beginning of sequence as possible.
3. If smallest time occurs on machine 2, put the job as
near to the end of the sequence as possible.
4. Remove job from list.
5. Repeat steps 2-4 until all slots in matrix are filled and all
2jobs are sequenced.

17-897
17-
Johnson’s Rule

JOB
A
B
C
D
E

PROCESS 1
6
11
7
9
5

PROCESS 2
8
6
3
7
10

E

A D

B

C

17-898
17-
Johnson’s Rule (cont.)
E
E

A
5

A

D

D
11

B

C

B

Process 1
(sanding)

C

20

31

38

Idle time
E
5

A
15

D
23

B
30

Process 2
(painting)

C
37

41

Completion time = 41
Idle time = 5+1+1+3=10
17-899
17-
Guidelines for Selecting a
Sequencing Rule
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

SPT most useful when shop is highly congested
Use SLACK for periods of normal activity
Use DDATE when only small tardiness values can
be tolerated
Use LPT if subcontracting is anticipated
Use FCFS when operating at low-capacity levels
lowDo not use SPT to sequence jobs that have to be
assembled with other jobs at a later date

17-900
17-
Monitoring
Work package
Shop paperwork that travels with a job

Gantt Chart
Shows both planned and completed
activities against a time scale

Input/Output Control
Monitors the input and output from each
work center
17-901
17-
Gantt Chart
Job 32B
Behind schedule

Facility

3
Job 23C

Ahead of schedule

2
Job 11C

Job 12A
On schedule

1

1
Key:

2

3

4

5

6
8
Today’s Date

9

10

11

12

Days

Planned activity
Completed activity
17-902
17-
Input/Output Control
Input/Output Report
PERIOD
Planned input
Actual input
Deviation
Planned output
Actual output
Deviation
Backlog

1

2

3

4

65

65

70

70

75

75

75

75

30

20

10

5

TOTAL
270
0
0
300
0
0
0

17-903
17-
Input/Output Control (cont.)
Input/Output Report
PERIOD
Planned input
Actual input
Deviation
Planned output
Actual output
Deviation
Backlog

1

2

3

4

65
60
-5
75
75
-0
30

65
60
-5
75
75
-0
15

70
65
-5
75
65
-10
0

70
65
-5
75
65
-10
0

TOTAL
270
250
-20
300
280
-20
0

17-904
17-
Advanced Planning and
Scheduling Systems
Infinite - assumes infinite capacity
Loads without regard to capacity
Then levels the load and sequences jobs

Finite - assumes finite (limited) capacity
Sequences jobs as part of the loading
decision
Resources are never loaded beyond
capacity
17-905
17-
Advanced Planning and
Scheduling Systems (cont.)
Advanced planning and scheduling (APS)
AddAdd-ins to ERP systems
ConstraintConstraint-based programming (CBP) identifies a
solution space and evaluates alternatives
Genetic algorithms based on natural selection
properties of genetics
Manufacturing execution system (MES) monitors
status, usage, availability, quality

17-906
17-
Theory of Constraints

Not all resources are used evenly
Concentrate on the” bottleneck” resource
Synchronize flow through the bottleneck
Use process and transfer batch sizes to
move product through facility

17-907
17-
Drum-Buffer-Rope
Drum
Bottleneck, beating to set the pace of production for
the rest of the system

Buffer
Inventory placed in front of the bottleneck to ensure
it is always kept busy
Determines output or throughput of the system

Rope
Communication signal; tells processes upstream
when they should begin production

17-908
17-
TOC Scheduling Procedure
Identify bottleneck
Schedule job first whose lead time to
bottleneck is less than or equal to
bottleneck processing time
Forward schedule bottleneck machine
Backward schedule other machines to
sustain bottleneck schedule
Transfer in batch sizes smaller than
process batch size

17-909
17-
A

B

D

B3 1 7

C3 2 15

D3 3 5

B2 2 3

C2 1 10

D2 2 8

B1 1 5

Synchronous
Manufacturing

C

C1 3 2

D1 3 10

Key:

i

ij k l

Item i
Operation j of item i performed at
machine center k takes l minutes
to process

17-910
17-
Synchronous
Manufacturing (cont.)
Demand = 100 A’s
Machine setup time = 60 minutes
MACHINE 1 MACHINE 2 MACHINE 3
B1
B3
C2
Sum

5
7
10
22

B2
C3
D2

3
15
8
26*

C1
D3
D1

2
5
10
17

* Bottleneck

17-911
17-
Synchronous Manufacturing (cont.)
Setup

Machine 1
C2

Setup
B1

2

B3
1562

1002

2322

Idle
Setup

Machine 2
C3

B2
1512

12
Machine 3
Setup
C1
0 200

Setup
D2
1872

2732

Setup
D1

Idle
1260

D3
1940

Completion
time

2737

17-912
17-
Employee Scheduling
Labor is very flexible
resource
Scheduling workforce is
complicated, repetitive
task
Assignment method can
be used
Heuristics are commonly
used

17-913
17-
Employee Scheduling Heuristic
1. Let N = no. of workers available
Di = demand for workers on day i
X = day working
O = day off
2. Assign the first N - D1 workers day 1 off. Assign the next N - D2
workers day 2 off. Continue in a similar manner until all days are
have been scheduled
3. If number of workdays for full time employee < 5, assign
remaining workdays so consecutive days off are possible
4. Assign any remaining work to part-time employees
part5. If consecutive days off are desired, consider switching schedules
among days with the same demand requirements

17-914
17-
Employee Scheduling
DAY OF WEEK
WORKERS REQUIRED

M

T
W
MIN NO. OF
3
3
4

TH

F

SA

SU

3

4

5

3

Taylor
Smith
Simpson
Allen
Dickerson

17-915
17-
Employee Scheduling (cont.)
DAY OF WEEK
WORKERS REQUIRED
Taylor
Smith
Simpson
Allen
Dickerson

M

T
W
MIN NO. OF
3
3
4

O
O
X
X
X

X
X
O
O
X

X
X
X
X
O

TH

F

SA

SU

3

4

5

3

O
O
X
X
X

X
X
O
X
X

X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
O
O

Completed schedule satisfies requirements but has no
consecutive days off

17-916
17-
Employee Scheduling (cont.)
DAY OF WEEK
WORKERS REQUIRED
Taylor
Smith
Simpson
Allen
Dickerson

M

T
W
MIN NO. OF
3
3
4

O
O
X
X
X

O
O
X
X
X

X
X
O
X
X

TH

F

SA

SU

3

4

5

3

X
X
O
O
X

X
X
X
X
O

X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
O
O

Revised schedule satisfies requirements with consecutive
days off for most employees

17-917
17-
Automated Scheduling Systems
Staff Scheduling
Schedule Bidding
Schedule
Optimization

17-918
17-
Thank You
www.bookfiesta4u.com

2-919

More Related Content

PPTX
Global supply chain management an overview
PPTX
VERTICAL INTEGRATION
PPTX
Business Process Reengineering Complete
PPT
Challenges in International Marketing and Sales by
PDF
SAP Revenue Accounting and Reporting and IFRS 15.pdf
PPT
Chapter17 quality
PPTX
Supplier management
PPTX
Change in buying situations
Global supply chain management an overview
VERTICAL INTEGRATION
Business Process Reengineering Complete
Challenges in International Marketing and Sales by
SAP Revenue Accounting and Reporting and IFRS 15.pdf
Chapter17 quality
Supplier management
Change in buying situations

What's hot (20)

PPTX
Returns management
PDF
Supply chain mngt
PPTX
Vendor selection
PPT
Chapter 3 Supply Chain Drivers and Obstacles
PPTX
Li & Fung Situational Analysis
PPTX
Outsourcing of Supply Chain Management
PPT
Demand chain management
PPTX
Situational Analysis and Types of Retail Institutes
DOC
Product and brand management notes
PPT
Process Analysis
PPT
Chapter 2 Supply Chain Performance: Achieving Strategic Fit and Scope
PPTX
Nature and scope of industrial marketing
PPT
WAREHOUSING DECISION
PPT
Market Research Process
PPTX
Process view of scm & value chain analysis
PPTX
Case study solving technique
PPT
Heizer 14
PPTX
Objectives of supply chain management
PPT
SUPPLIER SELECTION AND EVALUATION
PPT
Operations management
Returns management
Supply chain mngt
Vendor selection
Chapter 3 Supply Chain Drivers and Obstacles
Li & Fung Situational Analysis
Outsourcing of Supply Chain Management
Demand chain management
Situational Analysis and Types of Retail Institutes
Product and brand management notes
Process Analysis
Chapter 2 Supply Chain Performance: Achieving Strategic Fit and Scope
Nature and scope of industrial marketing
WAREHOUSING DECISION
Market Research Process
Process view of scm & value chain analysis
Case study solving technique
Heizer 14
Objectives of supply chain management
SUPPLIER SELECTION AND EVALUATION
Operations management
Ad

Viewers also liked (9)

PPTX
Mis jaiswal-chapter-11
PDF
Selenium私房菜(新手入门教程)
PPT
S4 starmatching
PDF
Business Opportunity Presentation
PPTX
Aditya birla
PPT
Joint ventures and strategic alliances
PPTX
Mis jaiswal-chapter-09
PDF
CII continuous improvement aug13
PPT
Chapter 20 hr new
Mis jaiswal-chapter-11
Selenium私房菜(新手入门教程)
S4 starmatching
Business Opportunity Presentation
Aditya birla
Joint ventures and strategic alliances
Mis jaiswal-chapter-09
CII continuous improvement aug13
Chapter 20 hr new
Ad

Similar to Operationsmanagement 919slidespresentation-090928145353-phpapp01 (20)

PPT
Chapter 1 introduction to production management
PPTX
Supply Chain Planning ^0 Operations Part 9.pptx
PPTX
Aminullah Assagaf_P1-Ch.1_ Introduction & Suppl Ch Mng_32.pptx
PPTX
Aminullah Assagaf_P1-Ch.1_ Introduction & Suppl Ch Mng_32.pptx
PDF
Operationsmanagement 919slidespresentation-090928145353-phpapp01
PDF
2_Ch1-17_Operations Management_6 Jan 2023.pdf
PPT
Operations Management PPT RVU 2022.ppt
PPTX
C01
PDF
Operationsmanagement 919slidespresentation-090928145353-phpapp01
PDF
Operations management
PDF
Operationsmanagement 919slidespresentation 090928145353 Phpapp01
PPT
1. introduction into om
PDF
1 Operations Managementjncsickhbfijofcndw.pdf
PPTX
Module-1 Introduction to Operations Management
PPT
operations management
PDF
Supply chain management
PDF
Operations Management.pdf So you can download it
PPT
1_Mak_Operations_Management_day_1_1.ppt
PPT
Operation Management- Introduction
PPT
Operations and competitiveness
Chapter 1 introduction to production management
Supply Chain Planning ^0 Operations Part 9.pptx
Aminullah Assagaf_P1-Ch.1_ Introduction & Suppl Ch Mng_32.pptx
Aminullah Assagaf_P1-Ch.1_ Introduction & Suppl Ch Mng_32.pptx
Operationsmanagement 919slidespresentation-090928145353-phpapp01
2_Ch1-17_Operations Management_6 Jan 2023.pdf
Operations Management PPT RVU 2022.ppt
C01
Operationsmanagement 919slidespresentation-090928145353-phpapp01
Operations management
Operationsmanagement 919slidespresentation 090928145353 Phpapp01
1. introduction into om
1 Operations Managementjncsickhbfijofcndw.pdf
Module-1 Introduction to Operations Management
operations management
Supply chain management
Operations Management.pdf So you can download it
1_Mak_Operations_Management_day_1_1.ppt
Operation Management- Introduction
Operations and competitiveness

More from Amit Fogla (20)

PPT
Section 3 chapter 21 - financial management - teaching aid
PPT
Ppt01
PPT
Erp overview
PPT
Competitive strategies in different types of industries
PPT
The new venture exploration plan
PPT
Csr13 5(imple)
PDF
Session rural marketing final
PPT
Student presentation
PPTX
Mis jaiswal-chapter-13
PPT
Environmental analysis
PPS
Chapter37 internationalfinancialmanagement
PPTX
Mis jaiswal-chapter-05
PPTX
Mis jaiswal-chapter-10
PPTX
Mis jaiswal-chapter-03
PPTX
Mis jaiswal-chapter-04
PPTX
Mis jaiswal-chapter-12
PPTX
Mis jaiswal-chapter-08
PPT
PPTX
Mis jaiswal-chapter-06
PPTX
Mis jaiswal-chapter-02
Section 3 chapter 21 - financial management - teaching aid
Ppt01
Erp overview
Competitive strategies in different types of industries
The new venture exploration plan
Csr13 5(imple)
Session rural marketing final
Student presentation
Mis jaiswal-chapter-13
Environmental analysis
Chapter37 internationalfinancialmanagement
Mis jaiswal-chapter-05
Mis jaiswal-chapter-10
Mis jaiswal-chapter-03
Mis jaiswal-chapter-04
Mis jaiswal-chapter-12
Mis jaiswal-chapter-08
Mis jaiswal-chapter-06
Mis jaiswal-chapter-02

Recently uploaded (20)

PDF
kom-180-proposal-for-a-directive-amending-directive-2014-45-eu-and-directive-...
PPTX
Slide gioi thieu VietinBank Quy 2 - 2025
PPTX
sales presentation، Training Overview.pptx
PDF
THE COMPLETE GUIDE TO BUILDING PASSIVE INCOME ONLINE
PPTX
Astra-Investor- business Presentation (1).pptx
PPTX
Principles of Marketing, Industrial, Consumers,
PDF
Keppel_Proposed Divestment of M1 Limited
PDF
Solaris Resources Presentation - Corporate August 2025.pdf
PPTX
Sales & Distribution Management , LOGISTICS, Distribution, Sales Managers
PPTX
Slide gioi thieu VietinBank Quy 2 - 2025
PDF
How to Get Approval for Business Funding
PDF
Ôn tập tiếng anh trong kinh doanh nâng cao
PPT
Lecture 3344;;,,(,(((((((((((((((((((((((
PDF
Deliverable file - Regulatory guideline analysis.pdf
PPTX
Board-Reporting-Package-by-Umbrex-5-23-23.pptx
PPTX
svnfcksanfskjcsnvvjknsnvsdscnsncxasxa saccacxsax
PDF
SIMNET Inc – 2023’s Most Trusted IT Services & Solution Provider
PDF
Technical Architecture - Chainsys dataZap
PDF
ANALYZING THE OPPORTUNITIES OF DIGITAL MARKETING IN BANGLADESH TO PROVIDE AN ...
PDF
How to Get Business Funding for Small Business Fast
kom-180-proposal-for-a-directive-amending-directive-2014-45-eu-and-directive-...
Slide gioi thieu VietinBank Quy 2 - 2025
sales presentation، Training Overview.pptx
THE COMPLETE GUIDE TO BUILDING PASSIVE INCOME ONLINE
Astra-Investor- business Presentation (1).pptx
Principles of Marketing, Industrial, Consumers,
Keppel_Proposed Divestment of M1 Limited
Solaris Resources Presentation - Corporate August 2025.pdf
Sales & Distribution Management , LOGISTICS, Distribution, Sales Managers
Slide gioi thieu VietinBank Quy 2 - 2025
How to Get Approval for Business Funding
Ôn tập tiếng anh trong kinh doanh nâng cao
Lecture 3344;;,,(,(((((((((((((((((((((((
Deliverable file - Regulatory guideline analysis.pdf
Board-Reporting-Package-by-Umbrex-5-23-23.pptx
svnfcksanfskjcsnvvjknsnvsdscnsncxasxa saccacxsax
SIMNET Inc – 2023’s Most Trusted IT Services & Solution Provider
Technical Architecture - Chainsys dataZap
ANALYZING THE OPPORTUNITIES OF DIGITAL MARKETING IN BANGLADESH TO PROVIDE AN ...
How to Get Business Funding for Small Business Fast

Operationsmanagement 919slidespresentation-090928145353-phpapp01

  • 1. Chapter 1-17 Operations Management Roberta Russell & Bernard W. Taylor, III
  • 2. Organization of This Text: Part I – Operations Management Intro. to Operations and Supply Chain Management: Quality Management: Statistical Quality Control: Product Design: Service Design: Processes and Technology: Facilities: Human Resources: Project Management: Chapter 1 (Slide 5) Chapter 2 (Slide 67) Chapter 3 (Slide 120) Chapter 4 (Slide 186) Chapter 5 (Slide 231) Chapter 6 (Slide 276) Chapter 7 (Slide 321) Chapter 8 (Slide 402) Chapter 9 (Slide 450) 1 -2
  • 3. Organization of This Text: Part II – Supply Chain Management Supply Chain Strategy and Design: Global Supply Chain Procurement and Distribution: Forecasting: Inventory Management: Sales and Operations Planning: Resource Planning: Lean Systems: Scheduling: Chapter 10 (Slide 507) Chapter 11 (Slide 534) Chapter 12 (Slide 575) Chapter 13 (Slide 641) Chapter 14 (Slide 703) Chapter 15 (Slide 767) Chapter 16 (Slide 827) Chapter 17 (Slide 878) 1 -3
  • 4. Learning Objectives of this Course Gain an appreciation of strategic importance of operations and supply chain management in a global business environment Understand how operations relates to other business functions Develop a working knowledge of concepts and methods related to designing and managing operations and supply chains Develop a skill set for quality and process improvement 1 -4
  • 5. Chapter 1 Introduction to Operations and Supply Chain Management Operations Management Roberta Russell & Bernard W. Taylor, III
  • 6. Lecture Outline What Operations and Supply Chain Managers Do Operations Function Evolution of Operations and Supply Chain Management Globalization and Competitiveness Operations Strategy and Organization of the Text Learning Objectives for This Course 1 -6
  • 7. What Operations and Supply Chain Managers Do What is Operations Management? design, operation, and improvement of productive systems What is Operations? a function or system that transforms inputs into outputs of greater value What is a Transformation Process? a series of activities along a value chain extending from supplier to customer activities that do not add value are superfluous and should be eliminated 1 -7
  • 8. Transformation Process Physical: as in manufacturing operations Locational: as in transportation or warehouse operations Exchange: as in retail operations Physiological: as in health care Psychological: as in entertainment Informational: as in communication 1 -8
  • 9. Operations as a Transformation Process INPUT •Material •Machines •Labor •Management •Capital TRANSFORMATION PROCESS OUTPUT •Goods •Services Feedback & Requirements 1 -9
  • 11. How is Operations Relevant to my Major? Accounting Information Technology Management “As an auditor you must understand the fundamentals of operations management.” “IT is a tool, and there’s no better place to apply it than in operations.” “We use so many things you learn in an operations class— class— scheduling, lean production, theory of constraints, and tons of quality tools.” 1-11
  • 12. How is Operations Relevant to my Major? (cont.) Economics Marketing Finance “It’s all about processes. I live by flowcharts and Pareto analysis.” “How can you do a good job marketing a product if you’re unsure of its quality or delivery status?” “Most of our capital budgeting requests are from operations, and most of our cost savings, too.” 1-12
  • 13. Evolution of Operations and Supply Chain Management Craft production process of handcrafting products or services for individual customers Division of labor dividing a job into a series of small tasks each performed by a different worker Interchangeable parts standardization of parts initially as replacement parts; enabled mass production 1-13
  • 14. Evolution of Operations and Supply Chain Management (cont.) Scientific management systematic analysis of work methods Mass production highhigh-volume production of a standardized product for a mass market Lean production adaptation of mass production that prizes quality and flexibility 1-14
  • 15. Historical Events in Operations Management Era Industrial Revolution Events/Concepts Dates Originator Steam engine Division of labor Interchangeable parts Principles of scientific management 1769 1776 1790 James Watt 1911 Frederick W. Taylor Time and motion studies Scientific Management Activity scheduling chart Moving assembly line 1911 1912 1913 Adam Smith Eli Whitney Frank and Lillian Gilbreth Henry Gantt Henry Ford 1-15
  • 16. Historical Events in Operations Management (cont.) Era Operations Research Dates Originator Hawthorne studies Human Relations Events/Concepts 1930 1940s 1950s 1960s 1947 1951 Elton Mayo Abraham Maslow Frederick Herzberg Douglas McGregor George Dantzig Remington Rand 1950s Operations research groups 1960s, 1970s Joseph Orlicky, IBM and others Motivation theories Linear programming Digital computer Simulation, waiting line theory, decision theory, PERT/CPM MRP, EDI, EFT, CIM 1-16
  • 17. Historical Events in Operations Management (cont.) Era Events/Concepts Dates Originator JIT (just-in-time) TQM (total quality management) Strategy and Quality Revolution operations Business process reengineering Six Sigma 1970s 1980s 1980s 1990s 1990s Taiichi Ohno (Toyota) W. Edwards Deming, Joseph Juran Wickham Skinner, Robert Hayes Michael Hammer, James Champy GE, Motorola 1-17
  • 18. Historical Events in Operations Management (cont.) Era Events/Concepts Internet Revolution Internet, WWW, ERP, 1990s supply chain management E-commerce Dates Originator 2000s Globalization WTO, European Union, 1990s and other trade 2000s agreements, global supply chains, outsourcing, BPO, Services Science ARPANET, Tim Berners-Lee SAP, i2 Technologies, ORACLE Amazon, Yahoo, eBay, Google, and others Numerous countries and companies 1-18
  • 19. Evolution of Operations and Supply Chain Management (cont.) Supply chain management management of the flow of information, products, and services across a network of customers, enterprises, and supply chain partners 1-19
  • 20. Globalization and Competitiveness Why “go global”? favorable cost access to international markets response to changes in demand reliable sources of supply latest trends and technologies Increased globalization results from the Internet and falling trade barriers 1-20
  • 21. Globalization and Competitiveness (cont.) Hourly Compensation Costs for Production Workers Source: U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics, 2005. 1-21
  • 22. Globalization and Competitiveness (cont.) World Population Distribution Source: U.S. Census Bureau, 2006. 1-22
  • 23. Globalization and Competitiveness (cont.) Trade in Goods as % of GDP (sum of merchandise exports and imports divided by GDP, valued in U.S. dollars) 1-23
  • 24. Productivity and Competitiveness Competitiveness degree to which a nation can produce goods and services that meet the test of international markets Productivity ratio of output to input Output sales made, products produced, customers served, meals delivered, or calls answered Input labor hours, investment in equipment, material usage, or square footage 1-24
  • 26. Productivity and Competitiveness (cont.) Average Annual Growth Rates in Productivity, 1995-2005. 1995Source: Bureau of Labor Statistics. A Chartbook of International Labor Comparisons. January 2007, p. 28. 1-26
  • 27. Productivity and Competitiveness (cont.) Average Annual Growth Rates in Output and Input, 1995-2005 1995Source: Bureau of Labor Statistics. A Chartbook of International Labor Comparisons, January 2007, p. 26. Dramatic Increase in Output w/ Decrease in Labor Hours 1-27
  • 28. Productivity and Competitiveness (cont.) Retrenching productivity is increasing, but both output and input decrease with input decreasing at a faster rate Assumption that more input would cause output to increase at the same rate certain limits to the amount of output may not be considered output produced is emphasized, not output sold; sold; increased inventories 1-28
  • 29. Strategy and Operations Strategy Provides direction for achieving a mission Five Steps for Strategy Formulation Defining a primary task What is the firm in the business of doing? Assessing core competencies What does the firm do better than anyone else? Determining order winners and order qualifiers What qualifies an item to be considered for purchase? What wins the order? Positioning the firm How will the firm compete? Deploying the strategy 1-29
  • 31. Order Winners and Order Qualifiers Source: Adapted from Nigel Slack, Stuart Chambers, Robert Johnston, and Alan Betts, Operations and Process Management, Prentice Hall, 2006, p. 47 Management, 1-31
  • 33. Positioning the Firm: Cost Waste elimination relentlessly pursuing the removal of all waste Examination of cost structure looking at the entire cost structure for reduction potential Lean production providing low costs through disciplined operations 1-33
  • 34. Positioning the Firm: Speed fast moves, fast adaptations, tight linkages Internet conditioned customers to expect immediate responses Service organizations always competed on speed (McDonald’s, LensCrafters, and Federal Express) Manufacturers timetime-based competition: build-to-order production and build-toefficient supply chains Fashion industry twotwo-week design-to-rack lead time of Spanish retailer, Zara design-to- 1-34
  • 35. Positioning the Firm: Quality Minimizing defect rates or conforming to design specifications; please the customer RitzRitz-Carlton - one customer at a time Service system is designed to “move heaven and earth” to satisfy customer Every employee is empowered to satisfy a guest’s wish Teams at all levels set objectives and devise quality action plans Each hotel has a quality leader 1-35
  • 36. Positioning the Firm: Flexibility ability to adjust to changes in product mix, production volume, or design National Bicycle Industrial Company offers 11,231,862 variations delivers within two weeks at costs only 10% above standard models mass customization: the mass production of customization: customized parts 1-36
  • 37. Policy Deployment Policy deployment translates corporate strategy into measurable objectives Hoshins action plans generated from the policy deployment process 1-37
  • 38. Policy Deployment Derivation of an Action Plan Using Policy Deployment 1-38
  • 39. Balanced Scorecard Balanced scorecard measuring more than financial performance finances customers processes learning and growing Key performance indicators a set of measures that help managers evaluate performance in critical areas 1-39
  • 43. Chapter 1 Supplement Decision Analysis Operations Management Roberta Russell & Bernard W. Taylor, III
  • 44. Lecture Outline Decision Analysis Decision Making without Probabilities Decision Analysis with Excel Decision Analysis with OM Tools Decision Making with Probabilities Expected Value of Perfect Information Sequential Decision Tree Supplement 1-44 1-
  • 45. Decision Analysis Quantitative methods a set of tools for operations manager Decision analysis a set of quantitative decision-making decisiontechniques for decision situations in which uncertainty exists Example of an uncertain situation demand for a product may vary between 0 and 200 units, depending on the state of market Supplement 1-45 1-
  • 46. Decision Making Without Probabilities States of nature Events that may occur in the future Examples of states of nature: high or low demand for a product good or bad economic conditions Decision making under risk probabilities can be assigned to the occurrence of states of nature in the future Decision making under uncertainty probabilities can NOT be assigned to the occurrence of states of nature in the future Supplement 1-46 1-
  • 47. Payoff Table Payoff table method for organizing and illustrating payoffs from different decisions given various states of nature Payoff outcome of a decision States Of Nature Decision a b 1 Payoff 1a Payoff 1b 2 Payoff 2a Payoff 2b Supplement 1-47 1-
  • 48. Decision Making Criteria Under Uncertainty Maximax choose decision with the maximum of the maximum payoffs Maximin choose decision with the maximum of the minimum payoffs Minimax regret choose decision with the minimum of the maximum regrets for each alternative Supplement 1-48 1-
  • 49. Decision Making Criteria Under Uncertainty (cont.) Hurwicz choose decision in which decision payoffs are weighted by a coefficient of optimism, alpha coefficient of optimism is a measure of a decision maker’s optimism, from 0 (completely pessimistic) to 1 (completely optimistic) Equal likelihood (La Place) choose decision in which each state of nature is weighted equally Supplement 1-49 1-
  • 50. Southern Textile Company STATES OF NATURE Good Foreign DECISION Expand Maintain status quo Sell now Poor Foreign Competitive Conditions Competitive Conditions $ 800,000 1,300,000 320,000 $ 500,000 -150,000 320,000 Supplement 1-50 1-
  • 51. Maximax Solution STATES OF NATURE Good Foreign DECISION Expand Maintain status quo Sell now Expand: Status quo: Sell: Poor Foreign Competitive Conditions Competitive Conditions $ 800,000 1,300,000 320,000 $800,000 1,300,000 320,000 $ 500,000 -150,000 320,000 ← Maximum Decision: Maintain status quo Supplement 1-51 1-
  • 52. Maximin Solution STATES OF NATURE Good Foreign DECISION Expand Maintain status quo Sell now Expand: Status quo: Sell: Poor Foreign Competitive Conditions Competitive Conditions $ 800,000 1,300,000 320,000 $500,000 -150,000 320,000 $ 500,000 -150,000 320,000 ← Maximum Decision: Expand Supplement 1-52 1-
  • 53. Minimax Regret Solution Good Foreign Competitive Conditions Poor Foreign Competitive Conditions $1,300,000 - 800,000 = 500,000 $500,000 - 500,000 = 0 1,300,000 - 1,300,000 = 0 500,000 - (-150,000)= 650,000 1,300,000 - 320,000 = 980,000 500,000 - 320,000= 180,000 Expand: Status quo: Sell: $500,000 650,000 980,000 ← Minimum Decision: Expand Supplement 1-53 1-
  • 54. Hurwicz Criteria STATES OF NATURE Good Foreign DECISION Expand Maintain status quo Sell now α = 0.3 Poor Foreign Competitive Conditions Competitive Conditions $ 800,000 1,300,000 320,000 $ 500,000 -150,000 320,000 1 - α = 0.7 Expand: $800,000(0.3) + 500,000(0.7) = $590,000 ← Maximum Status quo: 1,300,000(0.3) -150,000(0.7) = 285,000 Sell: 320,000(0.3) + 320,000(0.7) = 320,000 Decision: Expand Supplement 1-54 1-
  • 55. Equal Likelihood Criteria STATES OF NATURE Good Foreign DECISION Expand Maintain status quo Sell now Poor Foreign Competitive Conditions Competitive Conditions $ 800,000 1,300,000 320,000 $ 500,000 -150,000 320,000 Two states of nature each weighted 0.50 Expand: $800,000(0.5) + 500,000(0.5) = $650,000 ← Maximum Status quo: 1,300,000(0.5) -150,000(0.5) = 575,000 Sell: 320,000(0.5) + 320,000(0.5) = 320,000 Decision: Expand Supplement 1-55 1-
  • 57. Decision Analysis with OM Tools Supplement 1-57 1-
  • 58. Decision Making with Probabilities Risk involves assigning probabilities to states of nature Expected value a weighted average of decision outcomes in which each future state of nature is assigned a probability of occurrence Supplement 1-58 1-
  • 59. Expected value EV (x) = (x p(xi)xi n ∑ i =1 where xi = outcome i p(xi) = probability of outcome i Supplement 1-59 1-
  • 60. Decision Making with Probabilities: Example STATES OF NATURE Good Foreign Competitive Conditions DECISION Expand Maintain status quo Sell now Poor Foreign Competitive Conditions $ 800,000 1,300,000 320,000 p(good) = 0.70 $ 500,000 -150,000 320,000 p(poor) = 0.30 EV(expand): $800,000(0.7) + 500,000(0.3) = $710,000 EV(status quo): 1,300,000(0.7) -150,000(0.3) = 865,000 ← Maximum EV(sell): 320,000(0.7) + 320,000(0.3) = 320,000 Decision: Status quo Supplement 1-60 1-
  • 61. Decision Making with Probabilities: Excel Supplement 1-61 1-
  • 62. Expected Value of Perfect Information EVPI maximum value of perfect information to the decision maker maximum amount that would be paid to gain information that would result in a decision better than the one made without perfect information Supplement 1-62 1-
  • 63. EVPI Example Good conditions will exist 70% of the time choose maintain status quo with payoff of $1,300,000 Poor conditions will exist 30% of the time choose expand with payoff of $500,000 Expected value given perfect information = $1,300,000 (0.70) + 500,000 (0.30) = $1,060,000 Recall that expected value without perfect information was $865,000 (maintain status quo) EVPI= EVPI= $1,060,000 - 865,000 = $195,000 Supplement 1-63 1-
  • 64. Sequential Decision Trees A graphical method for analyzing decision situations that require a sequence of decisions over time Decision tree consists of Square nodes - indicating decision points Circles nodes - indicating states of nature Arcs - connecting nodes Supplement 1-64 1-
  • 65. Evaluations at Nodes Compute EV at nodes 6 & 7 EV(node 6)= 0.80($3,000,000) + 0.20($700,000) = $2,540,000 EV( 6)= EV(node 7)= 0.30($2,300,000) + 0.70($1,000,000)= $1,390,000 EV( 7)= Decision at node 4 is between $2,540,000 for Expand and $450,000 for Sell land Choose Expand Repeat expected value calculations and decisions at remaining nodes Supplement 1-65 1-
  • 66. Decision Tree Analysis $2,000,000 $1,290,000 0.60 Market growth 2 0.40 $225,000 $2,540,000 $3,000,000 0.80 $1,740,000 6 0.20 1 $700,000 4 $1,160,000 $450,000 0.60 3 $1,360,000 $1,390,000 0.40 $790,000 $2,300,000 0.30 7 0.70 $1,000,000 5 $210,000 Supplement 1-66 1-
  • 67. Chapter 2 Quality Management Operations Management Roberta Russell & Bernard W. Taylor, III
  • 68. Lecture Outline What Is Quality? Evolution of Quality Management Quality Tools TQM and QMS Focus of Quality Management— Management— Customers Role of Employees in Quality Improvement Quality in Service Companies Six Sigma Cost of Quality Effect of Quality Management on Productivity Quality Awards ISO 9000 2-68
  • 69. What Is Quality? Oxford American Dictionary a degree or level of excellence American Society for Quality totality of features and characteristics that satisfy needs without deficiencies Consumer’s and producer’s perspective 2-69
  • 70. What Is Quality: Customer’s Perspective Fitness for use how well product or service does what it is supposed to Quality of design designing quality characteristics into a product or service A Mercedes and a Ford are equally “fit for use,” but with different design dimensions. 2-70
  • 71. Dimensions of Quality: Manufactured Products Performance basic operating characteristics of a product; how well a car handles or its gas mileage Features “extra” items added to basic features, such as a stereo CD or a leather interior in a car Reliability probability that a product will operate properly within an expected time frame; that is, a TV will work without repair for about seven years 2-71
  • 72. Dimensions of Quality: Manufactured Products (cont.) Conformance degree to which a product meets pre–established pre– standards Durability how long product lasts before replacement; with care, L.L.Bean boots may last a lifetime Serviceability ease of getting repairs, speed of repairs, courtesy and competence of repair person 2-72
  • 73. Dimensions of Quality: Manufactured Products (cont.) Aesthetics how a product looks, feels, sounds, smells, or tastes Safety assurance that customer will not suffer injury or harm from a product; an especially important consideration for automobiles Perceptions subjective perceptions based on brand name, advertising, and like 2-73
  • 74. Dimensions of Quality: Services Time and timeliness how long must a customer wait for service, and is it completed on time? is an overnight package delivered overnight? Completeness: is everything customer asked for provided? is a mail order from a catalogue company complete when delivered? 2-74
  • 75. Dimensions of Quality: Service (cont.) Courtesy: how are customers treated by employees? are catalogue phone operators nice and are their voices pleasant? Consistency is same level of service provided to each customer each time? is your newspaper delivered on time every morning? 2-75
  • 76. Dimensions of Quality: Service (cont.) Accessibility and convenience how easy is it to obtain service? does service representative answer you calls quickly? Accuracy is service performed right every time? is your bank or credit card statement correct every month? Responsiveness how well does company react to unusual situations? how well is a telephone operator able to respond to a customer’s questions? 2-76
  • 77. What Is Quality: Producer’s Perspective Quality of conformance making sure product or service is produced according to design if new tires do not conform to specifications, they wobble if a hotel room is not clean when a guest checks in, hotel is not functioning according to specifications of its design 2-77
  • 79. What Is Quality: A Final Perspective Customer’s and producer’s perspectives depend on each other Producer’s perspective: production process and COST Customer’s perspective: fitness for use and PRICE Customer’s view must dominate 2-79
  • 80. Evolution of Quality Management: Quality Gurus Walter Shewart In 1920s, developed control charts Introduced term “quality assurance” “quality W. Edwards Deming Developed courses during World War II to teach statistical quality-control techniques to engineers and qualityexecutives of companies that were military suppliers After war, began teaching statistical quality control to Japanese companies Joseph M. Juran Followed Deming to Japan in 1954 Focused on strategic quality planning Quality improvement achieved by focusing on projects to solve problems and securing breakthrough solutions 2-80
  • 81. Evolution of Quality Management: Quality Gurus (cont.) Armand V. Feigenbaum In 1951, introduced concepts of total quality control and continuous quality improvement Philip Crosby In 1979, emphasized that costs of poor quality far outweigh cost of preventing poor quality In 1984, defined absolutes of quality management— management— conformance to requirements, prevention, and “zero defects” Kaoru Ishikawa Promoted use of quality circles Developed “fishbone” diagram Emphasized importance of internal customer 2-81
  • 82. Deming’s 14 Points 1. Create constancy of purpose 2. Adopt philosophy of prevention 3. Cease mass inspection 4. Select a few suppliers based on quality 5. Constantly improve system and workers 2-82
  • 83. Deming’s 14 Points (cont.) 6. Institute worker training 7. Instill leadership among supervisors 8. Eliminate fear among employees 9. Eliminate barriers between departments 10. Eliminate slogans 2-83
  • 84. Deming’s 14 Points (cont.) 11. Remove numerical quotas 12. Enhance worker pride 13. Institute vigorous training and education programs 14. Develop a commitment from top management to implement above 13 points 2-84
  • 85. Deming Wheel: PDCA Cycle 2-85
  • 86. Quality Tools Process Flow Chart Cause-andCause-andEffect Diagram Check Sheet Pareto Analysis Histogram Scatter Diagram Statistical Process Control Chart 2-86
  • 88. Cause-andCause-and-Effect Diagram Cause-andCause-and-effect diagram (“fishbone” diagram) chart showing different categories of problem causes 2-88
  • 89. Cause-andCause-and-Effect Matrix Cause-andCause-and-effect matrix grid used to prioritize causes of quality problems 2-89
  • 90. Check Sheets and Histograms 2-90
  • 91. Pareto Analysis Pareto analysis most quality problems result from a few causes 2-91
  • 95. TQM and QMS Total Quality Management (TQM) customercustomer-oriented, leadership, strategic planning, employee responsibility, continuous improvement, cooperation, statistical methods, and training and education Quality Management System (QMS) system to achieve customer satisfaction that complements other company systems 2-95
  • 96. Focus of Quality Management— Management— Customers TQM and QMSs serve to achieve customer satisfaction Partnering a relationship between a company and its supplier based on mutual quality standards Measuring customer satisfaction important component of any QMS customer surveys, telephone interviews 2-96
  • 97. Role of Employees in Quality Improvement Participative problem solving employees involved in qualityquality-management every employee has undergone extensive training to provide quality service to Disney’s guests Kaizen involves everyone in process of continuous improvement 2-97
  • 98. Quality Circles and QITs Organization 8-10 members Same area Supervisor/moderator Quality circle group of workers and supervisors from same area who address quality problems Implementation Monitoring Group processes Data collection Problem analysis Process/Quality improvement teams (QITs) Solution Problem Identification focus attention on business processes rather than separate company functions Training Presentation Problem results Problem Analysis List alternatives Consensus Brainstorming Cause and effect Data collection and analysis 2-98
  • 99. Quality in Services Service defects are not always easy to measure because service output is not usually a tangible item Services tend to be labor intensive Services and manufacturing companies have similar inputs but different processes and outputs 2-99
  • 100. Quality Attributes in Services Principles of TQM apply equally well to services and manufacturing Timeliness how quickly a service is provided? Benchmark “best” level of quality achievement in one company that other companies seek to achieve “quickest, friendliest, most accurate service available.” 2-100
  • 101. Six Sigma A process for developing and delivering virtually perfect products and services Measure of how much a process deviates from perfection 3.4 defects per million opportunities Six Sigma Process four basic steps of Six Sigma—align, Sigma— mobilize, accelerate, and govern Champion an executive responsible for project success 2-101
  • 103. Six Sigma: Black Belts and Green Belts Black Belt project leader Master Black Belt a teacher and mentor for Black Belts Green Belts project team members 2-103
  • 104. Six Sigma Design for Six Sigma (DFSS) a systematic approach to designing products and processes that will achieve Six Sigma Profitability typical criterion for selection Six Sigma project one of the factors distinguishing Six Sigma from TQM “Quality is not only free, it is an honest-tohonest-to-everything profit maker.” 2-104
  • 105. Cost of Quality Cost of Achieving Good Quality Prevention costs costs incurred during product design Appraisal costs costs of measuring, testing, and analyzing Cost of Poor Quality Internal failure costs include scrap, rework, process failure, downtime, and price reductions External failure costs include complaints, returns, warranty claims, liability, and lost sales 2-105
  • 106. Prevention Costs Quality planning costs costs of developing and implementing quality management program ProductProduct-design costs costs of designing products with quality characteristics Process costs costs expended to make sure productive process conforms to quality specifications Training costs costs of developing and putting on quality training programs for employees and management Information costs costs of acquiring and maintaining data related to quality, and development and analysis of reports on quality performance 2-106
  • 107. Appraisal Costs Inspection and testing costs of testing and inspecting materials, parts, and product at various stages and at end of process Test equipment costs costs of maintaining equipment used in testing quality characteristics of products Operator costs costs of time spent by operators to gather data for testing product quality, to make equipment adjustments to maintain quality, and to stop work to assess quality 2-107
  • 108. Internal Failure Costs Scrap costs costs of poor-quality poorproducts that must be discarded, including labor, material, and indirect costs Rework costs costs of fixing defective products to conform to quality specifications Process failure costs costs of determining why production process is producing poor-quality poorproducts Process downtime costs costs of shutting down productive process to fix problem PricePrice-downgrading costs costs of discounting poorpoorquality products—that is, products— selling products as “seconds” 2-108
  • 109. External Failure Costs Customer complaint costs costs of investigating and satisfactorily responding to a customer complaint resulting from a poor-quality product poor- Product return costs costs of handling and replacing poorpoor-quality products returned by customer Warranty claims costs costs of complying with product warranties Product liability costs litigation costs resulting from product liability and customer injury Lost sales costs costs incurred because customers are dissatisfied with poorpoor-quality products and do not make additional purchases 2-109
  • 110. Measuring and Reporting Quality Costs Index numbers ratios that measure quality costs against a base value labor index ratio of quality cost to labor hours cost index ratio of quality cost to manufacturing cost sales index ratio of quality cost to sales production index ratio of quality cost to units of final product 2-110
  • 111. Quality– Quality–Cost Relationship Cost of quality difference between price of nonconformance and conformance cost of doing things wrong 20 to 35% of revenues cost of doing things right 3 to 4% of revenues 2-111
  • 112. Effect of Quality Management on Productivity Productivity ratio of output to input Quality impact on productivity fewer defects increase output, and quality improvement reduces inputs Yield a measure of productivity Yield=(total input)(% good units) + (total input)(1-%good units)(% reworked) or Y=(I)(%G)+(I)(1Y=(I)(%G)+(I)(1-%G)(%R) 2-112
  • 113. Computing Product Cost per Unit Product Cost (Kd )(I) +(Kr )(R) = Y where: Kd = direct manufacturing cost per unit I = input Kr = rework cost per unit R = reworked units Y = yield 2-113
  • 114. Computing Product Yield for Multistage Processes Y = (I)(%g1)(%g2) … (%gn) where: I = input of items to the production process that will result in finished products gi = good-quality, work-in-process products at stage i 2-114
  • 115. Quality– Quality–Productivity Ratio QPR productivity index that includes productivity and quality costs QPR = (good-quality units) (input) (processing cost) + (reworked units) (rework cost) (100) 2-115
  • 116. Malcolm Baldrige Award Created in 1987 to stimulate growth of quality management in United States Categories Leadership Information and analysis Strategic planning Human resource focus Process management Business results Customer and market focus 2-116
  • 117. Other Awards for Quality National individual awards Armand V. Feigenbaum Medal Deming Medal E. Jack Lancaster Medal Edwards Medal Shewart Medal Ishikawa Medal International awards European Quality Award Canadian Quality Award Australian Business Excellence Award Deming Prize from Japan 2-117
  • 118. ISO 9000 A set of procedures and policies for international quality certification of suppliers Standards ISO 9000:2000 Quality Management Systems— Systems—Fundamentals and Vocabulary defines fundamental terms and definitions used in ISO 9000 family ISO 9001:2000 Quality Management Systems— Systems—Requirements standard to assess ability to achieve customer satisfaction ISO 9004:2000 Quality Management Systems— Systems—Guidelines for Performance Improvements guidance to a company for continual improvement of its qualityquality-management system 2-118
  • 119. ISO 9000 Certification, Implications, and Registrars ISO 9001:2000—only 9001:2000— standard that carries thirdthirdparty certification Many overseas companies will not do business with a supplier unless it has ISO 9000 certification ISO 9000 accreditation ISO registrars 2-119
  • 120. Chapter 3 Statistical Process Control Operations Management Roberta Russell & Bernard W. Taylor, III
  • 121. Lecture Outline Basics of Statistical Process Control Control Charts Control Charts for Attributes Control Charts for Variables Control Chart Patterns SPC with Excel and OM Tools Process Capability 3-121
  • 122. Basics of Statistical Process Control Statistical Process Control (SPC) monitoring production process to detect and prevent poor quality UCL Sample subset of items produced to use for inspection LCL Control Charts process is within statistical control limits 3-122
  • 123. Basics of Statistical Process Control (cont.) Random inherent in a process depends on equipment and machinery, engineering, operator, and system of measurement natural occurrences NonNon-Random special causes identifiable and correctable include equipment out of adjustment, defective materials, changes in parts or materials, broken machinery or equipment, operator fatigue or poor work methods, or errors due to lack of training 3-123
  • 124. SPC in Quality Management SPC tool for identifying problems in order to make improvements contributes to the TQM goal of continuous improvements 3-124
  • 125. Quality Measures: Attributes and Variables Attribute a product characteristic that can be evaluated with a discrete response good – bad; yes - no Variable measure a product characteristic that is continuous and can be measured weight - length 3-125
  • 126. SPC Applied to Services Nature of defect is different in services Service defect is a failure to meet customer requirements Monitor time and customer satisfaction 3-126
  • 127. SPC Applied to Services (cont.) Hospitals timeliness and quickness of care, staff responses to requests, accuracy of lab tests, cleanliness, courtesy, accuracy of paperwork, speed of admittance and checkouts Grocery stores waiting time to check out, frequency of out-of-stock items, out-ofquality of food items, cleanliness, customer complaints, checkout register errors Airlines flight delays, lost luggage and luggage handling, waiting time at ticket counters and check-in, agent and flight attendant checkcourtesy, accurate flight information, passenger cabin cleanliness and maintenance 3-127
  • 128. SPC Applied to Services (cont.) FastFast-food restaurants waiting time for service, customer complaints, cleanliness, food quality, order accuracy, employee courtesy CatalogueCatalogue-order companies order accuracy, operator knowledge and courtesy, packaging, delivery time, phone order waiting time Insurance companies billing accuracy, timeliness of claims processing, agent availability and response time 3-128
  • 129. Where to Use Control Charts Process has a tendency to go out of control Process is particularly harmful and costly if it goes out of control Examples at the beginning of a process because it is a waste of time and money to begin production process with bad supplies before a costly or irreversible point, after which product is difficult to rework or correct before and after assembly or painting operations that might cover defects before the outgoing final product or service is delivered 3-129
  • 130. Control Charts A graph that establishes control limits of a process Control limits upper and lower bands of a control chart Types of charts Attributes p-chart c-chart Variables mean (x bar – chart) range (R-chart) (R- 3-130
  • 131. Process Control Chart Out of control Upper control limit Process average Lower control limit 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Sample number 3-131
  • 132. Normal Distribution 95% 99.74% - 3σ - 2σ - 1σ µ=0 1σ 2σ 3σ 3-132
  • 133. A Process Is in Control If … 1. … no sample points outside limits 2. … most points near process average 3. … about equal number of points above and below centerline 4. … points appear randomly distributed 3-133
  • 134. Control Charts for Attributes p-chart uses portion defective in a sample c-chart uses number of defective items in a sample 3-134
  • 135. p-Chart UCL = p + zσp LCL = p - zσp z = number of standard deviations from process average p = sample proportion defective; an estimate of process average σp = standard deviation of sample proportion σp = p(1 - p) n 3-135
  • 136. Construction of p-Chart pSAMPLE 1 2 3 : : 20 NUMBER OF DEFECTIVES PROPORTION DEFECTIVE 6 0 4 : : 18 200 .06 .00 .04 : : .18 20 samples of 100 pairs of jeans 3-136
  • 137. Construction of p-Chart (cont.) pp= total defectives total sample observations UCL = p + z p(1 - p) n = 200 / 20(100) = 0.10 = 0.10 + 3 0.10(1 - 0.10) 100 UCL = 0.190 LCL = p - z p(1 - p) n = 0.10 - 3 0.10(1 - 0.10) 100 LCL = 0.010 3-137
  • 138. 0.20 UCL = 0.190 0.18 Construction of p-Chart p(cont.) Proportion defective 0.16 0.14 0.12 0.10 p = 0.10 0.08 0.06 0.04 0.02 LCL = 0.010 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 Sample number 16 18 20 3-138
  • 139. c-Chart UCL = c + zσc LCL = c - zσc σc = c where c = number of defects per sample 3-139
  • 140. c-Chart (cont.) Number of defects in 15 sample rooms SAMPLE 1 2 3 NUMBER OF DEFECTS : : 15 c= 12 8 16 : : 15 190 190 15 = 12.67 UCL = c + zσc = 12.67 + 3 = 23.35 12.67 = c - zσ c = 12.67 - 3 = 1.99 12.67 LCL 3-140
  • 141. 24 UCL = 23.35 c-Chart (cont.) Number of defects 21 18 c = 12.67 15 12 9 6 LCL = 1.99 3 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 Sample number 3-141
  • 142. Control Charts for Variables Range chart ( R-Chart ) Ruses amount of dispersion in a sample Mean chart ( x -Chart ) uses process average of a sample 3-142
  • 143. x-bar Chart: Standard Deviation Known = UCL = x + zσx LCL = = - zσx x x1 + x2 + ... xn n = x = where = x = average of sample means 3-143
  • 144. x-bar Chart Example: Standard Deviation Known (cont.) 3-144
  • 145. x-bar Chart Example: Standard Deviation Known (cont.) 3-145
  • 146. x-bar Chart Example: Standard Deviation Unknown = UCL = x + A2R = LCL = x - A2R where x = average of sample means 3-146
  • 148. x-bar Chart Example: Standard Deviation Unknown OBSERVATIONS (SLIP- RING DIAMETER, CM) (SLIPSAMPLE k 1 2 3 4 5 x R 1 5.02 5.01 4.94 4.99 4.96 4.98 0.08 2 5.01 5.03 5.07 4.95 4.96 5.00 0.12 3 4.99 5.00 4.93 4.92 4.99 4.97 0.08 4 5.03 4.91 5.01 4.98 4.89 4.96 0.14 5 4.95 4.92 5.03 5.05 5.01 4.99 0.13 6 4.97 5.06 5.06 4.96 5.03 5.01 0.10 7 5.05 5.01 5.10 4.96 4.99 5.02 0.14 8 5.09 5.10 5.00 4.99 5.08 5.05 0.11 9 5.14 5.10 4.99 5.08 5.09 5.08 0.15 10 5.01 4.98 5.08 5.07 4.99 5.03 0.10 50.09 1.15 Example 15.4 3-148
  • 149. x-bar Chart Example: Standard Deviation Unknown (cont.) ∑R R= = x= k ∑x k = = 1.15 10 = 0.115 50.09 5.01 cm = 10 = UCL = x + A2R = 5.01 + (0.58)(0.115) = 5.08 LCL = x = A2R = 5.01 - (0.58)(0.115) = 4.94 Retrieve Factor Value A2 3-149
  • 150. 5.10 – 5.08 – UCL = 5.08 5.06 – Mean 5.04 – = x = 5.01 5.02 – 5.00 – x- bar Chart Example (cont.) 4.98 – 4.96 – LCL = 4.94 4.94 – 4.92 – | 1 | 2 | 3 | | | | 4 5 6 7 Sample number | 8 | 9 | 10 3-150
  • 151. R- Chart UCL = D4R R= LCL = D3R ∑R k where R = range of each sample k = number of samples 3-151
  • 152. R-Chart Example OBSERVATIONS (SLIP-RING DIAMETER, CM) (SLIPSAMPLE k 1 2 3 4 5 x R 1 5.02 5.01 4.94 4.99 4.96 4.98 0.08 2 5.01 5.03 5.07 4.95 4.96 5.00 0.12 3 4.99 5.00 4.93 4.92 4.99 4.97 0.08 4 5.03 4.91 5.01 4.98 4.89 4.96 0.14 5 4.95 4.92 5.03 5.05 5.01 4.99 0.13 6 4.97 5.06 5.06 4.96 5.03 5.01 0.10 7 5.05 5.01 5.10 4.96 4.99 5.02 0.14 8 5.09 5.10 5.00 4.99 5.08 5.05 0.11 9 5.14 5.10 4.99 5.08 5.09 5.08 0.15 10 5.01 4.98 5.08 5.07 4.99 5.03 0.10 50.09 1.15 Example 15.3 3-152
  • 153. R-Chart Example (cont.) UCL = D4R = 2.11(0.115) = 0.243 LCL = D3R = 0(0.115) = 0 Retrieve Factor Values D3 and D4 Example 15.3 3-153
  • 154. R-Chart Example (cont.) 0.28 – 0.24 – UCL = 0.243 Range 0.20 – 0.16 – R = 0.115 0.12 – 0.08 – 0.04 – 0– LCL = 0 | | | 1 2 3 | | | | 4 5 6 7 Sample number | 8 | 9 | 10 3-154
  • 155. Using x- bar and R-Charts xRTogether Process average and process variability must be in control It is possible for samples to have very narrow ranges, but their averages might be beyond control limits It is possible for sample averages to be in control, but ranges might be very large It is possible for an R-chart to exhibit a distinct downward Rtrend, suggesting some nonrandom cause is reducing variation 3-155
  • 156. Control Chart Patterns Run sequence of sample values that display same characteristic Pattern test determines if observations within limits of a control chart display a nonrandom pattern To identify a pattern: 8 consecutive points on one side of the center line 8 consecutive points up or down 14 points alternating up or down 2 out of 3 consecutive points in zone A (on one side of center line) 4 out of 5 consecutive points in zone A or B (on one side of center line) 3-156
  • 157. Control Chart Patterns (cont.) UCL UCL LCL Sample observations consistently below the center line LCL Sample observations consistently above the center line 3-157
  • 158. Control Chart Patterns (cont.) UCL UCL LCL Sample observations consistently increasing LCL Sample observations consistently decreasing 3-158
  • 159. Zones for Pattern Tests = 3 sigma = x + A2R UCL Zone A = 2 2 sigma = x + (A (A2R) 3 Zone B = 1 1 sigma = x + (A (A2R) 3 Zone C = x Process average Zone C = 1 1 sigma = x - (A2R) 3 Zone B = 2 2 sigma = x - (A2R) 3 Zone A = 3 sigma = x - A2R LCL | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 | 11 | 12 | 13 Sample number 3-159
  • 160. Performing a Pattern Test SAMPLE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 x ABOVE/BELOW UP/DOWN ZONE 4.98 5.00 4.95 4.96 4.99 5.01 5.02 5.05 5.08 5.03 B B B B B — A A A A — U D D U U U U U D B C A A C C C B A B 3-160
  • 161. Sample Size Determination Attribute charts require larger sample sizes 50 to 100 parts in a sample Variable charts require smaller samples 2 to 10 parts in a sample 3-161
  • 163. SPC with Excel and OM Tools 3-163
  • 164. Process Capability Tolerances design specifications reflecting product requirements Process capability range of natural variability in a process— process— what we measure with control charts 3-164
  • 165. Process Capability (cont.) Design Specifications (a) Natural variation exceeds design specifications; process is not capable of meeting specifications all the time. Process Design Specifications (b) Design specifications and natural variation the same; process is capable of meeting specifications most of the time. Process 3-165
  • 166. Process Capability (cont.) Design Specifications (c) Design specifications greater than natural variation; process is capable of always conforming to specifications. Process Design Specifications (d) Specifications greater than natural variation, but process off center; capable but some output will not meet upper specification. Process 3-166
  • 167. Process Capability Measures Process Capability Ratio Cp = tolerance range process range upper specification limit lower specification limit = 6σ 3-167
  • 168. Computing Cp Net weight specification = 9.0 oz ± 0.5 oz Process mean = 8.80 oz Process standard deviation = 0.12 oz Cp = = upper specification limit lower specification limit 6σ 9.5 - 8.5 = 1.39 6(0.12) 3-168
  • 169. Process Capability Measures Process Capability Index = Cpk = minimum x - lower specification limit 3σ , upper specification limit - x = 3σ 3-169
  • 170. Computing Cpk Net weight specification = 9.0 oz ± 0.5 oz Process mean = 8.80 oz Process standard deviation = 0.12 oz = x - lower specification limit Cpk = minimum , 3σ = upper specification limit - x 3σ 8.80 - 8.50 = minimum 3(0.12) , 9.50 - 8.80 3(0.12) = 0.83 3-170
  • 172. Process Capability with Excel and OM Tools 3-172
  • 173. Chapter 3 Supplement Acceptance Sampling Operations Management Roberta Russell & Bernard W. Taylor, III
  • 174. Lecture Outline SingleSingle-Sample Attribute Plan Operating Characteristic Curve Developing a Sampling Plan with Excel Average Outgoing Quality Double - and Multiple-Sampling Plans Multiple- Supplement 3-174 3-
  • 175. Acceptance Sampling Accepting or rejecting a production lot based on the number of defects in a sample Not consistent with TQM or Zero Defects philosophy producer and customer agree on the number of acceptable defects a means of identifying not preventing poor quality percent of defective parts versus PPM Sampling plan provides guidelines for accepting a lot Supplement 3-175 3-
  • 176. Single– Single–Sample Attribute Plan Single sampling plan N = lot size n = sample size (random) c = acceptance number d = number of defective items in sample If d ≤ c, accept lot; else reject Supplement 3-176 3-
  • 177. Producer’s and Consumer’s Risk AQL or acceptable quality level proportion of defects consumer will accept in a given lot α or producer’s risk probability of rejecting a good lot LTPD or lot tolerance percent defective limit on the number of defectives the customer will accept β or consumer’s risk probability of accepting a bad lot Supplement 3-177 3-
  • 178. Producer’s and Consumer’s Risk (cont.) Good Lot Reject No Error Type I Error Producer’ Risk Bad Lot Accept Type II Error Consumer’s Risk No Error Sampling Errors Supplement 3-178 3-
  • 179. Operating Characteristic (OC) Curve shows probability of accepting lots of different quality levels with a specific sampling plan assists management to discriminate between good and bad lots exact shape and location of the curve is defined by the sample size (n) and (n acceptance level (c) for the sampling (c plan Supplement 3-179 3-
  • 180. OC Curve (cont.) 1.00 – α = 0.05 Probability of acceptance, Pa 0.80 – OC curve for n and c 0.60 – 0.40 – 0.20 – β = 0.10 | – | | | | | | | | | 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.10 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.20 AQL Proportion defective LTPD Supplement 3-180 3-
  • 181. Developing a Sampling Plan with OM Tools ABC Company produces mugs in lots of 10,000. Performance measures for quality of mugs sent to stores call for a producer’s risk of 0.05 with an AQL of 1% defective and a consumer’s risk of 0.10 with a LTPD of 5% defective. What size sample and what acceptance number should ABC use to achieve performance measures called for in the sampling plan? N = 10,000 α = 0.05 ? β = 0.10 AQL = 1% LTPD = 5% n=? c= Supplement 3-181 3-
  • 182. Average Outgoing Quality (AOQ) Expected number of defective items that will pass on to customer with a sampling plan Average outgoing quality limit (AOQL) maximum point on the curve worst level of outgoing quality Supplement 3-182 3-
  • 184. DoubleDouble-Sampling Plans Take small initial sample If # defective ≤ lower limit, accept If # defective > upper limit, reject If # defective between limits, take second sample Accept or reject based on 2 samples Less costly than single-sampling plans single- Supplement 3-184 3-
  • 185. MultipleMultiple-Sampling Plans Uses smaller sample sizes Take initial sample If # defective ≤ lower limit, accept If # defective > upper limit, reject If # defective between limits, resample Continue sampling until accept or reject lot based on all sample data Supplement 3-185 3-
  • 186. Chapter 4 Product Design Operations Management Roberta Russell & Bernard W. Taylor, III
  • 187. Lecture Outline Design Process Concurrent Design Technology in Design Design Reviews Design for Environment Design for Robustness Quality Function Deployment 4-187
  • 188. Design Process Effective design can provide a competitive edge matches product or service characteristics with customer requirements ensures that customer requirements are met in the simplest and least costly manner reduces time required to design a new product or service minimizes revisions necessary to make a design workable Copyright 2009 John Wiley & Sons, Inc. 4-188
  • 189. Design Process (cont.) Product design defines appearance of product sets standards for performance specifies which materials are to be used determines dimensions and tolerances 4-189
  • 191. Idea Generation Company’s own R&D department Customer complaints or suggestions Marketing research Suppliers Salespersons in the field Factory workers New technological developments Competitors 4-191
  • 192. Idea Generation (cont.) Perceptual Maps Visual comparison of customer perceptions Benchmarking Comparing product/process against best-in-class best-in- Reverse engineering Dismantling competitor’s product to improve your own product 4-192
  • 193. Perceptual Map of Breakfast Cereals 4-193
  • 194. Feasibility Study Market analysis Economic analysis Technical/strategic analyses Performance specifications 4-194
  • 195. Rapid Prototyping testing and revising a preliminary design model Build a prototype form design functional design production design Test prototype Revise design Retest 4-195
  • 196. Form and Functional Design Form Design how product will look? Functional Design how product will perform? reliability maintainability usability 4-196
  • 197. Computing Reliability Components in series 0.90 0.90 0.90 x 0.90 = 0.81 4-197
  • 198. Computing Reliability (cont.) Components in parallel 0.90 R2 0.95 + 0.90(1-0.95) = 0.995 0.90(1- 0.95 R1 4-198
  • 200. System Availability (SA) SA = MTBF MTBF + MTTR where: MTBF = mean time between failures MTTR = mean time to repair 4-200
  • 201. System Availability (cont.) PROVIDER MTBF (HR) MTTR (HR) A B C 60 36 24 4.0 2.0 1.0 SAA = 60 / (60 + 4) = .9375 or 94% SAB = 36 / (36 + 2) = .9473 or 95% SAC = 24 / (24 + 1) = .96 or 96% 4-201
  • 202. Usability Ease of use of a product or service ease of learning ease of use ease of remembering how to use frequency and severity of errors user satisfaction with experience 4-202
  • 203. Production Design How the product will be made Simplification reducing number of parts, assemblies, or options in a product Standardization using commonly available and interchangeable parts Modular Design combining standardized building blocks, or modules, to create unique finished products Design for Manufacture (DFM) • Designing a product so that it can be produced easily and economically 4-203
  • 204. Design Simplification (a) Original design Assembly using common fasteners Source: Adapted from G. Boothroyd and P. Dewhurst, “Product Design…. Key to Successful Robotic Assembly.” Assembly Engineering (September 1986), pp. 909093. (b) Revised design (c) Final design OneOne-piece base & elimination of fasteners Design for push-andpush-and-snap assembly 4-204
  • 205. Final Design and Process Plans Final design detailed drawings and specifications for new product or service Process plans workable instructions necessary equipment and tooling component sourcing recommendations job descriptions and procedures computer programs for automated machines 4-205
  • 207. Concurrent Design A new approach to design that involves simultaneous design of products and processes by design teams Improves quality of early design decisions Involves suppliers Incorporates production process Uses a price-minus pricesystem Scheduling and management can be complex as tasks are done in parallel Uses technology to aid design 4-207
  • 208. Technology in Design Computer Aided Design (CAD) assists in creation, modification, and analysis of a design computercomputer-aided engineering (CAE) tests and analyzes designs on computer screen computercomputer-aided manufacturing (CAD/CAM) ultimate design-to-manufacture connection design-to- product life cycle management (PLM) managing entire lifecycle of a product collaborative product design (CPD) 4-208
  • 209. Collaborative Product Design (CPD) A software system for collaborative design and development among trading partners With PML, manages product data, sets up project workspaces, and follows life cycle of the product Accelerates product development, helps to resolve product launch issues, and improves quality of design Designers can conduct virtual review sessions test “what if” scenarios assign and track design issues communicate with multiple tiers of suppliers create, store, and manage project documents 4-209
  • 210. Design Review Review designs to prevent failures and ensure value Failure mode and effects analysis (FMEA) a systematic method of analyzing product failures Fault tree analysis (FTA) a visual method for analyzing interrelationships among failures Value analysis (VA) helps eliminate unnecessary features and functions 4-210
  • 211. FMEA for Potato Chips Failure Mode Cause of Failure Effect of Failure Corrective Action Stale low moisture content expired shelf life poor packaging tastes bad won’t crunch thrown out lost sales add moisture cure longer better package seal shorter shelf life Broken too thin too brittle rough handling rough use poor packaging can’t dip poor display injures mouth chocking perceived as old lost sales change recipe change process change packaging Too Salty outdated receipt process not in control uneven distribution of salt eat less drink more health hazard lost sales experiment with recipe experiment with process introduce low salt version 4-211
  • 212. Fault tree analysis (FTA) 4-212
  • 213. Value analysis (VA) Can we do without it? Does it do more than is required? Does it cost more than it is worth? Can something else do a better job? Can it be made by a less costly method? with less costly tooling? with less costly material? Can it be made cheaper, better, or faster by someone else? 4-213
  • 214. Value analysis (VA) (cont.) Updated versions also include: Is it recyclable or biodegradable? Is the process sustainable? Will it use more energy than it is worth? Does the item or its by-product harm the byenvironment? 4-214
  • 215. Design for Environment and Extended Producer Responsibility Design for environment designing a product from material that can be recycled design from recycled material design for ease of repair minimize packaging minimize material and energy used during manufacture, consumption and disposal Extended producer responsibility holds companies responsible for their product even after its useful life 4-215
  • 217. Sustainability Ability to meet present needs without compromising those of future generations Green product design Use fewer materials Use recycled materials or recovered components Don’t assume natural materials are always better Don’t forget energy consumption Extend useful life of product Involve entire supply chain Change paradigm of design Source: Adapted from the Business Social Responsibility Web site, www.bsr.org, www.bsr.org, accessed April 1, 2007. 4-217
  • 218. Quality Function Deployment (QFD) Translates voice of customer into technical design requirements Displays requirements in matrix diagrams first matrix called “house of quality” series of connected houses 4-218
  • 219. House of Quality Importance 5 TradeTrade-off matrix 3 Design characteristics 1 4 2 Customer requirements Relationship matrix Competitive assessment 6 Target values 4-219
  • 220. Competitive Assessment of Customer Requirements Competitive Assessment Customer Requirements 1 2 3 9 Removes wrinkles 8 AB Doesn’t stick to fabric 6 X BA 8 AB Doesn’t spot fabric 6 X AB Doesn’t scorch fabric 9 A XB Heats quickly 6 Automatic shut-off shut- 3 Quick cool-down cool- 3 X Doesn’t break when dropped 5 AB Doesn’t burn when touched 5 AB X Not too heavy 8 X 5 X Provides enough steam Irons well Presses quickly Easy and safe to use B A 4 X X B X A ABX ABX A B X 4-220 A B
  • 221. Presses quickly - + Doesn’t stick to fabric - Provides enough steam + + + + - - - + - + + - Automatic shut-off shut- + Quick cool-down coolDoesn’t break when dropped - - + + + + Doesn’t burn when touched Not too heavy + + - - - + + + + + + -4-221 Automatic shutoff Protective cover for soleplate + + + + + + - Heats quickly Time to go from 450º to 100º + + + + Doesn’t scorch fabric Time required to reach 450º F Flow of water from holes Size of holes Number of holes - + Doesn’t spot fabric Easy and safe to use Material used in soleplate Thickness of soleplate - + + + Removes wrinkles Irons well Size of soleplate Weight of iron Customer Requirements Energy needed to press From Customer Requirements to Design Characteristics
  • 222. 4-222 Automatic shutoff Protective cover for soleplate Time to go from 450º to 100º Time required to reach 450º Flow of water from holes + Size of holes - Number of holes Material used in soleplate Thickness of soleplate Size of soleplate Weight of iron Energy needed to press Tradeoff Matrix + +
  • 223. Units of measure lb in. cm ty ea Iron A 3 1.4 8x4 2 SS 27 15 0.5 45 500 N Y Iron B 4 1.2 8x4 1 MG 27 15 0.3 35 350 N Y Our Iron (X) 2 1.7 9x5 4 T 35 15 0.7 50 600 N Y Estimated impact 3 4 4 4 5 4 3 2 5 5 3 0 Estimated cost 3 3 3 3 4 3 3 3 4 4 5 2 1.2 8x5 3 SS 30 30 500 * * * * * * * Objective measures ft-lb ft- Targets Design changes mm oz/s sec sec Y/N Y/N 4-223 Automatic shutoff Protective cover for soleplate Time to go from 450º to 100º Time required to reach 450º Flow of water from holes Size of holes Number of holes Material used in soleplate Thickness of soleplate Size of soleplate Weight of iron Energy needed to press Targeted Changes in Design
  • 224. Completed House of Quality SS = Silverstone MG = Mirorrglide T = Titanium 4-224
  • 225. A Series of Connected QFD Houses Part characteristics Process characteristics A-2 Parts deployment Operations A-3 Process planning Process characteristics House of quality Part characteristics A-1 Product characteristics Customer requirements Product characteristics A-4 Operating requirements 4-225
  • 226. Benefits of QFD Promotes better understanding of customer demands Promotes better understanding of design interactions Involves manufacturing in design process Provides documentation of design process 4-226
  • 227. Design for Robustness Robust product designed to withstand variations in environmental and operating conditions Robust design yields a product or service designed to withstand variations Controllable factors design parameters such as material used, dimensions, and form of processing Uncontrollable factors user’s control (length of use, maintenance, settings, etc.) 4-227
  • 228. Design for Robustness (cont.) Tolerance allowable ranges of variation in the dimension of a part Consistency consistent errors are easier to correct than random errors parts within tolerances may yield assemblies that are not within limits consumers prefer product characteristics near their ideal values 4-228
  • 229. Quantifies customer preferences toward quality Emphasizes that customer preferences are strongly oriented toward consistently Design for Six Sigma (DFSS) Quality Loss Taguchi’s Quality Loss Function Lower tolerance limit Target Upper tolerance limit 4-229
  • 230. Copyright 2009 John Wiley & Sons, Inc. All rights reserved. Reproduction or translation of this work beyond that permitted in section 117 of the 1976 United States Copyright Act without express permission of the copyright owner is unlawful. Request for further information should be addressed to the Permission Department, John Wiley & Sons, Inc. The purchaser may make back-up copies for his/her own use only and not for backdistribution or resale. The Publisher assumes no responsibility for errors, omissions, or damages caused by the use of these programs or from the use of the information herein. 4-230
  • 231. Chapter 5 Service Design Operations Management Roberta Russell & Bernard W. Taylor, III
  • 232. Lecture Outline Service Economy Characteristics of Services Service Design Process Tools for Service Design Waiting Line Analysis for Service Improvement 5-232
  • 233. Service Economy Source: U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics, IBM Almaden Research Center 5-233
  • 234. 5-234
  • 235. Characteristics of Services Services acts, deeds, or performances Goods tangible objects Facilitating services accompany almost all purchases of goods Facilitating goods accompany almost all service purchases 5-235
  • 236. Continuum from Goods to Services Source: Adapted from Earl W. Sasser, R.P. Olsen, and D. Daryl Wyckoff, Management of Service Operations (Boston: Allyn Bacon, 1978), p.11. 5-236
  • 237. Characteristics of Services (cont.) Services are intangible Service output is variable Services have higher customer contact Services are perishable Service inseparable from delivery Services tend to be decentralized and dispersed Services are consumed more often than products Services can be easily emulated 5-237
  • 239. Service Design Process (cont.) Service concept purpose of a service; it defines target market and customer experience Service package mixture of physical items, sensual benefits, and psychological benefits Service specifications performance specifications design specifications delivery specifications 5-239
  • 241. High v. Low Contact Services Design Decision Facility location Facility layout High-Contact Service Convenient to customer Must look presentable, accommodate customer needs, and facilitate interaction with customer Low-Contact Service Near labor or transportation source Designed for efficiency Source: Adapted from R. Chase, N. Aquilano, and R. Jacobs, Operations Management for Compensative Advantage (New York:McGraw-Hill, 2001), p. 210 5-241
  • 242. High v. Low Contact Services (cont.) Design Decision High-Contact Service Quality control More variable since customer is involved in process; customer expectations and perceptions of quality may differ; customer present when defects occur Capacity Excess capacity required to handle peaks in demand Low-Contact Service Measured against established standards; testing and rework possible to correct defects Planned for average demand Source: Adapted from R. Chase, N. Aquilano, and R. Jacobs, Operations Management for Compensative Advantage (New York:McGraw-Hill, 2001), p. 210 5-242
  • 243. High v. Low Contact Services (cont.) Design Decision High-Contact Service Low-Contact Service Worker skills Must be able to interact well with customers and use judgment in decision making Technical skills Scheduling Must accommodate customer schedule Customer concerned only with completion date Source: Adapted from R. Chase, N. Aquilano, and R. Jacobs, Operations Management for Compensative Advantage (New York:McGraw-Hill, 2001), p. 210 5-243
  • 244. High v. Low Contact Services (cont.) Design Decision Service process Service package High-Contact Service Low-Contact Service Mostly front-room activities; service may change during delivery in response to customer Mostly back-room activities; planned and executed with minimal interference Varies with customer; includes environment as well as actual service Fixed, less extensive Source: Adapted from R. Chase, N. Aquilano, and R. Jacobs, Operations Management for Compensative Advantage (New York:McGraw-Hill, 2001), p. 210 5-244
  • 245. Tools for Service Design Service blueprinting line of influence line of interaction line of visibility line of support Front-office/BackFront-office/Backoffice activities Servicescapes space and function ambient conditions signs, symbols, and artifacts Quantitative techniques 5-245
  • 248. Elements of Waiting Line Analysis Operating characteristics average values for characteristics that describe performance of waiting line system Queue a single waiting line Waiting line system consists of arrivals, servers, and waiting line structure Calling population source of customers; infinite or finite 5-248
  • 249. 5-249
  • 250. Elements of Waiting Line Analysis (cont.) Arrival rate (λ) (λ frequency at which customers arrive at a waiting line according to a probability distribution, usually Poisson Service time (µ) (µ time required to serve a customer, usually described by negative exponential distribution Service rate must be shorter than arrival rate (λ < µ) (λ Queue discipline order in which customers are served Infinite queue can be of any length; length of a finite queue is limited 5-250
  • 251. Elements of Waiting Line Analysis (cont.) Channels number of parallel servers for servicing customers Phases number of servers in sequence a customer must go through 5-251
  • 252. Operating Characteristics Operating characteristics are assumed to approach a steady state 5-252
  • 253. Traditional Cost Relationships as service improves, cost increases 5-253
  • 254. Psychology of Waiting Waiting rooms magazines and newspapers televisions Bank of America Disney costumed characters mobile vendors accurate wait times special passes mirrors Supermarkets magazines “impulse purchases” 5-254
  • 255. Psychology of Waiting (cont.) Preferential treatment Grocery stores: express lanes for customers with few purchases Airlines/Car rental agencies: special cards available to frequent-users or for an additional fee frequentPhone retailers: route calls to more or less experienced salespeople based on customer’s sales history Critical service providers services of police department, fire department, etc. waiting is unacceptable; cost is not important 5-255
  • 256. Waiting Line Models SingleSingle-server model simplest, most basic waiting line structure Frequent variations (all with Poisson arrival rate) exponential service times general (unknown) distribution of service times constant service times exponential service times with finite queue exponential service times with finite calling population 5-256
  • 257. Basic Single-Server Model SingleAssumptions Poisson arrival rate exponential service times firstfirst-come, firstfirstserved queue discipline infinite queue length infinite calling population Computations λ = mean arrival rate µ = mean service rate n = number of customers in line 5-257
  • 258. Basic Single-Server Model (cont.) Singleprobability that no customers are in queuing system ( ) P0 = λ 1– µ λ L= µ–λ probability of n customers in queuing system average number of customers in waiting line ( ) ( )( ) Pn = λ µ n · P0 = λ µ average number of customers in queuing system n 1– λ µ Lq = λ2 µ ( µ – λ) 5-258
  • 259. Basic Single-Server Model (cont.) Singleaverage time customer spends in queuing system W= 1 µ–λ = L λ average time customer spends waiting in line λ Wq = µ ( µ – λ) probability that server is busy and a customer has to wait (utilization factor) λ ρ= µ probability that server is idle and customer can be served I=1– ρ =1– λ µ = P0 5-259
  • 262. Service Improvement Analysis waiting time (8 min.) is too long hire assistant for cashier? increased service rate hire another cashier? reduced arrival rate Is improved service worth the cost? 5-262
  • 264. Advanced Single-Server Models SingleConstant service times occur most often when automated equipment or machinery performs service Finite queue lengths occur when there is a physical limitation to length of waiting line Finite calling population number of “customers” that can arrive is limited 5-264
  • 266. Basic Multiple-Server Model Multiplesingle waiting line and service facility with several independent servers in parallel same assumptions as single-server model singlesµ > λ s = number of servers servers must be able to serve customers faster than they arrive 5-266
  • 267. Basic Multiple-Server Model Multiple(cont.) probability that there are no customers in system 1 P0 = n = s – 1 1 λ n 1 λ s sµ ∑ n=0 () n! + µ ( )( ) s! µ sµ - λ probability of n customers in system 1 λ n P0, for n > s n–s s!s µ Pn = 1 λ n P0, for n ≤ s n! µ { () () 5-267
  • 268. Basic Multiple-Server Model Multiple(cont.) probability that customer must wait Pw = L= () 1 s! λ µ s sµ sµ – λ λµ (λ/µ)s (s – 1)! (sµ – λ)2 (s L W= λ P0 P0 + Lq = L – λ µ λ µ Wq = W – 1 µ = Lq λ λ ρ= sµ 5-268
  • 274. Basic Multiple-Server Model MultipleExample (cont.) To cut wait time, add another service representative now, s = 4 Therefore: 5-274
  • 276. Chapter 6 Processes and Technology Operations Management Roberta Russell & Bernard W. Taylor, III
  • 277. Lecture Outline Process Planning Process Analysis Process Innovation Technology Decisions 6-277
  • 278. Process Planning Process a group of related tasks with specific inputs and outputs Process design what tasks need to be done and how they are coordinated among functions, people, and organizations Process strategy an organization’s overall approach for physically producing goods and services Process planning converts designs into workable instructions for manufacture or delivery 6-278
  • 279. Process Strategy Vertical integration extent to which firm will produce inputs and control outputs of each stage of production process Capital intensity mix of capital (i.e., equipment, automation) and labor resources used in production process Process flexibility ease with which resources can be adjusted in response to changes in demand, technology, products or services, and resource availability Customer involvement role of customer in production process 6-279
  • 281. Process Selection Projects one-of-a-kind production of a product to customer order Batch production processes many different jobs at the same time in groups or batches Mass production produces large volumes of a standard product for a mass market Continuous production used for very-high volume commodity products 6-281
  • 283. ProductProduct-Process Matrix Source: Adapted from Robert Hayes and Steven Wheelwright, Restoring the Competitive Edge Competing through Manufacturing (New York, John Wiley & Sons, 1984), p. 209. 6-283
  • 284. Types of Processes PROJECT Type of product Type of customer Product demand BATCH MASS CONT. CONT. Unique Made-toMade-toorder Made-toMade-tostock Commodity (customized) (standardized ) Few individual customers Mass market Mass market Fluctuates Stable Very stable One-atOne-at-atime Infrequent Source: Adapted from R. Chase, N. Aquilano, and R. Jacobs, Operations Management for Competitive Advantage (New York:McGraw-Hill, 2001), p. 210 York:McGraw- 6-284
  • 285. Types of Processes (cont.) PROJECT BATCH MASS CONT. CONT. Demand volume Very low Low to medium High Very high No. of different products Infinite variety Many, varied Few Very few Production system LongLong-term project Discrete, job shops Repetitive, assembly lines Continuous, process industries Source: Adapted from R. Chase, N. Aquilano, and R. Jacobs, Operations Management for Competitive Advantage (New York:McGraw-Hill, 2001), p. 210 York:McGraw- 6-285
  • 286. Types of Processes (cont.) PROJECT BATCH MASS CONT. CONT. Equipment Varied GeneralGeneralpurpose SpecialSpecialpurpose Highly automated Primary type of work Specialized contracts Fabrication Assembly Mixing, treating, refining Worker skills Experts, craftscraftspersons Wide range of skills Limited range of skills Equipment monitors Source: Adapted from R. Chase, N. Aquilano, and R. Jacobs, Operations Management for Competitive Advantage (New York:McGraw-Hill, 2001), p. 210 York:McGraw- 6-286
  • 287. Types of Processes (cont.) PROJECT Advantages DisDisadvantages Examples BATCH MASS CONT. CONT. Custom work, latest technology Flexibility, quality Efficiency, speed, low cost Highly efficient, large capacity, ease of control NonNon-repetitive, small customer base, expensive Costly, slow, difficult to manage Capital investment; lack of responsiveness Difficult to change, far-reaching errors, farlimited variety Construction, shipbuilding, spacecraft Machine shops, print shops, bakeries, education Automobiles, televisions, computers, fast food Paint, chemicals, foodstuffs Source: Adapted from R. Chase, N. Aquilano, and R. Jacobs, Operations Management for Competitive Advantage (New York:McGrawYork:McGraw-Hill, 2001), p. 210 6-287
  • 288. Process Selection with BreakBreak-Even Analysis examines cost trade-offs associated with demand volume Cost Fixed costs constant regardless of the number of units produced Variable costs vary with the volume of units produced Revenue price at which an item is sold Total revenue is price times volume sold Profit difference between total revenue and total cost 6-288
  • 289. Process Selection with BreakBreak-Even Analysis (cont.) Total cost = fixed cost + total variable cost TC = cf + vcv Total revenue = volume x price TR = vp Profit = total revenue - total cost Z = TR – TC = vp - (cf + vcv) 6-289
  • 290. Process Selection with BreakBreak-Even Analysis (cont.) TR = TC vp = cf + vcv vp - vcv = cf v ( p - c v) = c f v= cf p - cv Solving for Break-Even Point (Volume) Break6-290
  • 291. BreakBreak-Even Analysis: Example Fixed cost = cf = $2,000 Variable cost = cv = $5 per raft Price = p = $10 per raft BreakBreak-even point is v= cf p - cv = 2000 = 400 rafts 10 - 5 6-291
  • 292. BreakBreak-Even Analysis: Graph Dollars Total cost line $3,000 — $2,000 — $1,000 — Total revenue line 400 BreakBreak-even point Units 6-292
  • 293. Process Plans Set of documents that detail manufacturing and service delivery specifications assembly charts operations sheets quality-control check-sheets 6-293
  • 294. Process Selection Process A Process B $2,000 + $5v = $10,000 + $3v $5v $3v $2v = $8,000 $2v v = 4,000 rafts Below or equal to 4,000, choose A Above or equal to 4,000, choose B 6-294
  • 295. Process Analysis • systematic examinatio n of all aspects of process to improve operation 6-295
  • 296. An Operations Sheet for a Plastic Part Part name Crevice Tool Part No. 52074 Usage Hand-Vac Hand- Assembly No. 520 Oper. No. Description Dept. Machine/Tools Time 10 Pour in plastic bits 041 Injection molding 2 min 20 Insert mold 041 #076 2 min 30 Check settings & start machine 041 113, 67, 650 20 min 40 Collect parts & lay flat 051 Plastics finishing 10 min 50 Remove & clean mold 042 Parts washer 15 min 60 Break off rough edges 051 Plastics finishing 10 min 6-296
  • 297. Process Analysis Building a flowchart Determine objectives Define process boundaries Define units of flow Choose type of chart Observe process and collect data Map out process Validate chart 6-297
  • 298. Process Flowcharts look at manufacture of product or delivery of service from broad perspective Incorporate nonproductive activities (inspection, transportation, delay, storage) productive activities (operations) 6-298
  • 301. 6-301
  • 302. Simple Value Chain Flowchart 6-302
  • 303. Process Innovation Continuous improvement refines the breakthrough Breakthrough Improvement Total redesign of a process for breakthrough improvements Continuous improvement activities peak; time to reengineer process 6-303
  • 304. From Function to Process Sales Manufacturing Purchasing Accounting Product Development Order Fulfillment Supply Chain Management Customer Service Function Process 6-304
  • 305. Process Innovation Customer Requirements Strategic Directives Baseline Data Benchmark Data Goals for Process Performance High - level Process map Innovative Ideas Detailed Process Map Model Validation Pilot Study of New Design No Goals Met? Yes Design Principles Key Performance Measures Full Scale Implementation 6-305
  • 307. Principles for Redesigning Processes Remove waste, simplify, and consolidate similar activities Link processes to create value Let the swiftest and most capable enterprise execute the process Flex process for any time, any place, any way Capture information digitally at the source and propagate it through process 6-307
  • 308. Principles for Redesigning Processes (cont.) Provide visibility through fresher and richer information about process status Fit process with sensors and feedback loops that can prompt action Add analytic capabilities to process Connect, collect, and create knowledge around process through all who touch it Personalize process with preferences and habits of participants 6-308
  • 309. Techniques for Generating Innovative Ideas Vary the entry point to a problem in trying to untangle fishing lines, it’s best to start from the fish, not the poles Draw analogies a previous solution to an old problem might work Change your perspective think like a customer bring in persons who have no knowledge of process 6-309
  • 310. Techniques for Generating Innovative Ideas (cont.) Try inverse brainstorming what would increase cost what would displease the customer Chain forward as far as possible if I solve this problem, what is the next problem Use attribute brainstorming how would this process operate if. . . our workers were mobile and flexible there were no monetary constraints we had perfect knowledge 6-310
  • 311. Technology Decisions Financial justification of technology Purchase cost Operating Costs Annual Savings Revenue Enhancement Replacement Analysis Risk and Uncertainty Piecemeal Analysis 6-311
  • 313. A Technology Primer Product Technology Computer-aided design (CAD) Group technology (GT) Computer-aided engineering (CAE) Collaborative product commerce (CPC) Creates and communicates designs electronically Classifies designs into families for easy retrieval and modification Tests functionality of CAD designs electronically Facilitates electronic communication and exchange of information among designers and suppliers 6-313
  • 314. A Technology Primer (cont.) Product Technology Product data management (PDM) Product life cycle management (PLM) Product configuration Keeps track of design specs and revisions for the life of the product Integrates decisions of those involved in product development, manufacturing, sales, customer service, recycling, and disposal Defines products “configured” by customers who have selected among various options, usually from a Web site 6-314
  • 315. A Technology Primer (cont.) Process Technology Standard for exchange of product model data (STEP) Computer-aided design and manufacture (CAD/CAM) Computer aided process (CAPP) E-procurement Set standards for communication among different CAD vendors; translates CAD data into requirements for automated inspection and manufacture Electronic link between automated design (CAD) and automated manufacture (CAM) Generates process plans based on database of similar requirements Electronic purchasing of items from eemarketplaces, auctions, or company websites 6-315
  • 316. A Technology Primer (cont.) Manufacturing Technology Computer numerically control (CNC) Flexible manufacturing system (FMS) Robots Conveyors Machines controlled by software code to perform a variety of operations with the help of automated tool changers; also collects processing information and quality data A collection of CNC machines connected by an automated material handling system to produce a wide variety of parts Manipulators that can be programmed to perform repetitive tasks; more consistent than workers but less flexible FixedFixed-path material handling; moves items along a belt or overhead chain; “reads” packages and diverts them to different directions; can be very fast 6-316
  • 317. A Technology Primer (cont.) Manufacturing Technology Automatic guided vehicle (AGV) A driverless truck that moves material along a specified path; directed by wire or tape embedded in floor or by radio frequencies; very flexible Automated storage and retrieval system (ASRS) An automated warehouse—some 26 stores high— warehouse— high— in which items are placed in a carousel-type carouselstorage system and retrieved by fast-moving faststacker cranes; controlled by computer Process Control Continuous monitoring of automated equipment; makes real-time decisions on ongoing operation, realmaintenance, and quality Computer-integrated manufacturing (CIM) Automated manufacturing systems integrated through computer technology; also called eemanufacturing 6-317
  • 318. A Technology Primer (cont.) Information Technology Business – to – Business (B2B) Business – to – Consumer (B2C) Internet Electronic transactions between businesses usually over the Internet Intranet Communication networks internal to an organization; can be password (i.e., firewall) protected sites on the Internet Extranet Electronic transactions between businesses and their customers usually over the Internet A global information system of computer networks that facilitates communication and data transfer Intranets connected to the Internet for shared access with select suppliers, customers, and trading partners 6-318
  • 319. A Technology Primer (cont.) Information Technology Bar Codes Radio Frequency Identification tags (RFID) Electronic data interchange (EDI) Extensive markup language (XML) Enterprise resource planning (ERP) A series of vertical lines printed on most packages that identifies item and other information when read by a scanner An integrated circuit embedded in a tag that can send and receive information; a twenty-first century bar code twentywith read/write capabilities A computer-to-computer exchange of business computer-todocuments over a proprietary network; very expensive and inflexible A programming language that enables computer – to computer communication over the Internet by tagging data before its is sent Software for managing basic requirements of an enterprise, including sales & marketing, finance and accounting, production & materials management, and human resources 6-319
  • 320. A Technology Primer (cont.) Information Technology Supply chain management (SCM) Customer relationship management (CRM) Decision support systems (DSS) Expert systems (ES) Artificial intelligence (AI) Software for managing flow of goods and information among a network of suppliers, manufacturers and distributors Software for managing interactions with customers and compiling and analyzing customer data An information system that helps managers make decisions; includes a quantitative modeling component and an interactive component for what-if analysis whatA computer system that uses an expert knowledge base to diagnose or solve a problem A field of study that attempts to replicate elements of human thought in computer processes; includes expert systems, genetic algorithms, neural networks, and fuzzy logic 6-320
  • 321. Chapter 7 Capacity and Facilities Operations Management Roberta Russell & Bernard W. Taylor, III
  • 322. Lecture Outline Capacity Planning Basic Layouts Designing Process Layouts Designing Service Layouts Designing Product Layouts Hybrid Layouts
  • 323. Capacity Maximum capability to produce Capacity planning establishes overall level of productive resources for a firm 3 basic strategies for timing of capacity expansion in relation to steady growth in demand (lead, lag, and average)
  • 325. Capacity (cont.) Capacity increase depends on volume and certainty of anticipated demand strategic objectives costs of expansion and operation Best operating level % of capacity utilization that minimizes unit costs Capacity cushion % of capacity held in reserve for unexpected occurrences
  • 326. Economies of Scale it costs less per unit to produce high levels of output fixed costs can be spread over a larger number of units production or operating costs do not increase linearly with output levels quantity discounts are available for material purchases operating efficiency increases as workers gain experience
  • 327. Best Operating Level for a Hotel
  • 328. Machine Objectives of Facility Layout Arrangement of areas within a facility to: Minimize material-handling costs Utilize space efficiently Utilize labor efficiently Eliminate bottlenecks Facilitate communication and interaction Reduce manufacturing cycle time Reduce customer service time Eliminate wasted or redundant movement Increase capacity Facilitate entry, exit, and placement of material, products, and people Incorporate safety and security measures Promote product and service quality Encourage proper maintenance activities Provide a visual control of activities Provide flexibility to adapt to changing conditions
  • 329. BASIC LAYOUTS Process layouts group similar activities together according to process or function they perform Product layouts arrange activities in line according to sequence of operations for a particular product or service Fixed-position layouts are used for projects in which product cannot be moved
  • 330. Process Layout in Services Women’s lingerie Shoes Housewares Women’s dresses Cosmetics and jewelry Children’s department Women’s sportswear Entry and display area Men’s department
  • 333. Comparison of Product and Process Layouts Product Description Type of process Product Demand Volume Equipment Process Sequential arrangement of activities Continuous, mass production, mainly assembly Functional grouping of activities Intermittent, job shop, batch production, mainly fabrication Varied, made to order Fluctuating Low General purpose Standardized, made to stock Stable High Special purpose
  • 334. Comparison of Product and Process Layouts Product Workers Inventory Storage space Material handling Aisles Scheduling Layout decision Goal Advantage Limited skills Low in-process, high infinished goods Small Fixed path (conveyor) Narrow Part of balancing Line balancing Equalize work at each station Efficiency Process Varied skills High in-process, low infinished goods Large Variable path (forklift) Wide Dynamic Machine location Minimize material handling cost Flexibility
  • 335. FixedFixed-Position Layouts Typical of projects in which product produced is too fragile, bulky, or heavy to move Equipment, workers, materials, other resources brought to the site Low equipment utilization Highly skilled labor Typically low fixed cost Often high variable costs 7-335
  • 336. Designing Process Layouts Goal: minimize material handling costs Block Diagramming minimize nonadjacent loads use when quantitative data is available Relationship Diagramming based on location preference between areas use when quantitative data is not available
  • 337. Block Diagramming Unit load quantity in which material is normally moved Nonadjacent load distance farther than the next block STEPS create load summary chart calculate composite (two way) movements develop trial layouts minimizing number of nonadjacent loads
  • 338. Block Diagramming: Example Load Summary Chart 4 2 5 3 DEPARTMENT Department 1 1 FROM/TO 2 3 100 — 50 200 — 1 2 3 4 5 — 60 100 50 4 50 40 — 5 50 60 —
  • 339. Block Diagramming: Example (cont.) 2 2 1 1 4 3 2 3 1 1 3 4 3 2 5 5 5 4 4 5 200 loads 150 loads 110 loads 100 loads 60 loads 50 loads 50 loads 40 loads 0 loads 0 loads Nonadjacent Loads: 110+40=150 0 110 1 4 Grid 1 2 100 2 150 200 3 4 150 200 50 50 40 60 50 110 50 60 3 5 5 40
  • 340. Block Diagramming: Example (cont.) Block Diagram type of schematic layout diagram; includes space requirements (a) Initial block diagram 1 (b) Final block diagram 2 4 3 5 1 4 2 3 5
  • 341. Relationship Diagramming Schematic diagram that uses weighted lines to denote location preference Muther’s grid format for displaying manager preferences for department locations
  • 343. Relationship A Absolutely necessary E Especially important Diagramming: Example I Important O Okay U Unimportant X Undesirable Production O A Offices U I A Shipping and receiving U U O O O A X U Locker room Toolroom E O Stockroom
  • 344. Relationship Diagrams: Example (cont.) (a) Relationship diagram of original layout Offices Stockroom Locker room Toolroom Shipping and receiving Key: A E I Production O U X
  • 345. Relationship Diagrams: Example (cont.) (b) Relationship diagram of revised layout Stockroom Shipping and receiving Offices Toolroom Production Locker room Key: A E I O U X
  • 346. Computerized layout Solutions CRAFT Computerized Relative Allocation of Facilities Technique CORELAP Computerized Relationship Layout Planning PROMODEL and EXTEND visual feedback allow user to quickly test a variety of scenarios Three-D modeling and CAD integrated layout analysis available in VisFactory and similar software
  • 347. Designing Service Layouts Must be both attractive and functional Types Free flow layouts encourage browsing, increase impulse purchasing, are flexible and visually appealing Grid layouts encourage customer familiarity, are low cost, easy to clean and secure, and good for repeat customers Loop and Spine layouts both increase customer sightlines and exposure to products, while encouraging customer to circulate through the entire store
  • 348. Types of Store Layouts
  • 349. Designing Product Layouts Objective Balance the assembly line Line balancing tries to equalize the amount of work at each workstation Precedence requirements physical restrictions on the order in which operations are performed Cycle time maximum amount of time a product is allowed to spend at each workstation
  • 350. Cycle Time Example Cd = Cd = production time available desired units of output (8 hours x 60 minutes / hour) (120 units) Cd = 480 120 = 4 minutes
  • 351. Flow Time vs Cycle Time Cycle time = max time spent at any station Flow time = time to complete all stations 1 2 3 4 minutes 4 minutes 4 minutes Flow time = 4 + 4 + 4 = 12 minutes Cycle time = max (4, 4, 4) = 4 minutes
  • 352. Efficiency of Line and Balance Delay Efficiency Minimum number of workstations i ∑ E= i=1 nCa i ∑ ti N= ti i=1 Cd where ti j n Ca Cd = completion time for element i = number of work elements = actual number of workstations = actual cycle time = desired cycle time Balance delay total idle time of line calculated as (1 efficiency)
  • 353. Line Balancing Procedure 1. Draw and label a precedence diagram 2. Calculate desired cycle time required for line 3. Calculate theoretical minimum number of workstations 4. Group elements into workstations, recognizing cycle time and precedence constraints 5. Calculate efficiency of line 6. Determine if theoretical minimum number of workstations or an acceptable efficiency level has been reached. If not, go back to step 4.
  • 354. Line Balancing: Example WORK ELEMENT A B C D PRECEDENCE TIME (MIN) — A A B, C 0.1 0.2 0.4 0.3 Press out sheet of fruit Cut into strips Outline fun shapes Roll up and package B 0.2 0.1 A D C 0.4 0.3
  • 355. Line Balancing: Example (cont.) WORK ELEMENT A B C D PRECEDENCE TIME (MIN) — A A B, C 0.1 0.2 0.4 0.3 Press out sheet of fruit Cut into strips Outline fun shapes Roll up and package Cd = N= 40 hours x 60 minutes / hour = 6,000 units 0.1 + 0.2 + 0.3 + 0.4 0.4 2400 = 0.4 minute 6000 = 1.0 0.4 = 2.5 3 workstations
  • 356. Line Balancing: Example (cont.) WORKSTATION 1 2 3 ELEMENT A B C D B REMAINING TIME 0.3 0.1 0.0 0.1 0.2 0.1 A Cd = 0.4 N = 2.5 D C 0.4 REMAINING ELEMENTS B, C C, D D none 0.3
  • 357. Line Balancing: Example (cont.) Work station 1 Work station 3 A, B C D 0.3 minute E= Work station 2 0.4 minute 0.3 minute 0.1 + 0.2 + 0.3 + 0.4 3(0.4) = 1.0 1.2 Cd = 0.4 N = 2.5 = 0.833 = 83.3%
  • 358. Computerized Line Balancing Use heuristics to assign tasks to workstations Longest operation time Shortest operation time Most number of following tasks Least number of following tasks Ranked positional weight
  • 359. Hybrid Layouts Cellular layouts group dissimilar machines into work centers (called cells) that process families of parts with similar shapes or processing requirements Production flow analysis (PFA) reorders part routing matrices to identify families of parts with similar processing requirements Flexible manufacturing system automated machining and material handling systems which can produce an enormous variety of items Mixed-model assembly line processes more than one product model in one line
  • 360. Cellular Layouts 1. Identify families of parts with similar flow paths 2. Group machines into cells based on part families 3. Arrange cells so material movement is minimized 4. Locate large shared machines at point of use
  • 361. Parts Families A family of similar parts A family of related grocery items
  • 363. Part Routing Matrix Parts 1 2 A B C D E F G H x x Figure 5.8 8 x 3 Machines 4 5 6 7 x x x x x x x 10 11 12 x x x x x x x 9 x x x x x x x x x x x x x
  • 364. Revised Cellular Layout Assembly 8 10 9 12 11 4 Cell 1 Cell 2 6 Cell 3 7 2 1 3 A B C Raw materials 5
  • 365. Reordered Routing Matrix Parts 1 2 4 Machines 8 10 3 6 A D F C G B H E x x x x x x x x x x x 9 5 7 11 12 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
  • 367. Advantages and Disadvantages of Cellular Layouts Advantages Reduced material handling and transit time Reduced setup time Reduced work-inwork-inprocess inventory Better use of human resources Easier to control Easier to automate Disadvantages Inadequate part families Poorly balanced cells Expanded training and scheduling of workers Increased capital investment
  • 368. Automated Manufacturing Cell Source: J. T. Black, “Cellular Manufacturing Systems Reduce Setup Time, Make Small Lot Production Economical.” Industrial Engineering (November 1983)
  • 369. Flexible Manufacturing Systems (FMS) FMS consists of numerous programmable machine tools connected by an automated material handling system and controlled by a common computer network FMS combines flexibility with efficiency FMS layouts differ based on variety of parts that the system can process size of parts processed average processing time required for part completion
  • 371. Mixed Model Assembly Lines Produce multiple models in any order on one assembly line Issues in mixed model lines Line balancing U-shaped lines Flexible workforce Model sequencing
  • 372. Balancing U-Shaped Lines UPrecedence diagram: B Cycle time = 12 min C D A E (a) Balanced for a straight line (b) Balanced for a U-shaped line U- A,B C,D E 9 min 12 min 3 min Efficiency = 24 3(12) = 24 A,B = .6666 = 66.7 % C,D 36 E Efficiency = 24 2(12) = 24 24 = 100 % 12 min 12 min
  • 373. Chapter 7 Supplement Facility Location Models Operations Management Roberta Russell & Bernard W. Taylor, III
  • 374. Lecture Outline Types of Facilities Site Selection: Where to Locate Location Analysis Techniques Supplement 7-374 7-
  • 375. Types of Facilities HeavyHeavy-manufacturing facilities large, require a lot of space, and are expensive LightLight-industry facilities smaller, cleaner plants and usually less costly Retail and service facilities smallest and least costly Supplement 7-375 7-
  • 376. Factors in Heavy Manufacturing Location Construction costs Land costs Raw material and finished goods shipment modes Proximity to raw materials Utilities Means of waste disposal Labor availability Supplement 7-376 7-
  • 377. Factors in Light Industry Location Land costs Transportation costs Proximity to markets depending on delivery requirements including frequency of delivery required by customer Supplement 7-377 7-
  • 378. Factors in Retail Location Proximity to customers Location is everything Supplement 7-378 7-
  • 379. Site Selection: Where to Locate Infrequent but important being “in the right place at the right time” Must consider other factors, especially financial considerations Location decisions made more often for service operations than manufacturing facilities Location criteria for service access to customers Location criteria for manufacturing facility nature of labor force labor costs proximity to suppliers and markets distribution and transportation costs energy availability and cost community infrastructure quality of life in community government regulations and taxes Supplement 7-379 7-
  • 380. Global Location Factors Government stability Government regulations Political and economic systems Economic stability and growth Exchange rates Culture Climate Export/import regulations, duties and tariffs Raw material availability Number and proximity of suppliers Transportation and distribution system Labor cost and education Available technology Commercial travel Technical expertise CrossCross-border trade regulations Group trade agreements Supplement 7-380 7-
  • 381. Regional and Community Location Factors in U.S. Labor (availability, education, cost, and unions) Proximity of customers Number of customers Construction/leasing costs Land cost Modes and quality of transportation Transportation costs Community government Local business regulations Government services (e.g., Chamber of Commerce) Supplement 7-381 7-
  • 382. Regional and Community Location Factors in U.S. (cont.) Business climate Community services Incentive packages Government regulations Environmental regulations Raw material availability Commercial travel Climate Infrastructure (e.g., roads, water, sewers) Quality of life Taxes Availability of sites Financial services Community inducements Proximity of suppliers Education system Supplement 7-382 7-
  • 383. Location Incentives Tax credits Relaxed government regulation Job training Infrastructure improvement Money Supplement 7-383 7-
  • 384. Geographic Information Systems (GIS) Computerized system for storing, managing, creating, analyzing, integrating, and digitally displaying geographic, i.e., spatial, data Specifically used for site selection enables users to integrate large quantities of information about potential sites and analyze these data with many different, powerful analytical tools Supplement 7-384 7-
  • 386. Location Analysis Techniques Location factor rating Center-ofCenter-of-gravity LoadLoad-distance Supplement 7-386 7-
  • 387. Location Factor Rating Identify important factors Weight factors (0.00 - 1.00) Subjectively score each factor (0 - 100) Sum weighted scores Supplement 7-387 7-
  • 388. Location Factor Rating: Example SCORES (0 TO 100) LOCATION FACTOR Labor pool and climate Proximity to suppliers Wage rates Community environment Proximity to customers Shipping modes Air service WEIGHT Site 1 Site 2 Site 3 .30 .20 .15 .15 .10 .05 .05 80 100 60 75 65 85 50 65 91 95 80 90 92 65 90 75 72 80 95 65 90 Weighted Score for “Labor pool and climate” for Site 1 = (0.30)(80) = 24 Supplement 7-388 7-
  • 389. Location Factor Rating: Example (cont.) WEIGHTED SCORES Site 1 Site 2 Site 3 24.00 20.00 9.00 11.25 6.50 4.25 2.50 77.50 19.50 18.20 14.25 12.00 9.00 4.60 3.25 80.80 27.00 15.00 10.80 12.00 9.50 3.25 4.50 82.05 Site 3 has the highest factor rating Supplement 7-389 7-
  • 390. Location Factor Rating with Excel and OM Tools Supplement 7-390 7-
  • 391. Center-ofCenter-of-Gravity Technique Locate facility at center of movement in geographic area Based on weight and distance traveled; establishes grid-map of gridarea Identify coordinates and weights shipped for each location Supplement 7-391 7-
  • 392. GridGrid-Map Coordinates y n ∑ xiWi x= n ∑ Wi i=1 1 (x1, y1), W1 (x 3 (x3, y3), W3 (x y3 x1 x2 x3 ∑ yiWi i=1 2 (x2, y2), W2 (x y2 y1 n i=1 y= n ∑ Wi i=1 where, x, y = coordinates of new facility at center of gravity xi, yi = coordinates of existing facility i Wi = annual weight shipped from facility i x Supplement 7-392 7-
  • 394. Center-ofCenter-of-Gravity Technique: Example (cont.) n ∑ xiWi x= i=1 n = ∑ Wi (200)(75) + (100)(105) + (250)(135) + (500)(60) 75 + 105 + 135 + 60 = 238 i=1 n ∑ yiWi y= i=1 n ∑ Wi = (200)(75) + (500)(105) + (600)(135) + (300)(60) 75 + 105 + 135 + 60 = 444 i=1 Supplement 7-394 7-
  • 396. Center-ofCenter-of-Gravity Technique with Excel and OM Tools Supplement 7-396 7-
  • 397. LoadLoad-Distance Technique Compute (Load x Distance) for each site Choose site with lowest (Load x Distance) Distance can be actual or straight-line straight- Supplement 7-397 7-
  • 398. LoadLoad-Distance Calculations n ∑ ld LD = i i i=1 where, LD = loadload-distance value li load expressed as a weight, number of trips or units being shipped from proposed site and location i distance between proposed site and location i = di = di = (xi - x)2 + (yi - y)2 (y where, (x,y) = coordinates of proposed site x,y) (xi , yi) = coordinates of existing facility Supplement 7-398 7-
  • 399. LoadLoad-Distance: Example Potential Sites Site X 1 360 2 420 3 250 Y 180 450 400 A 200 200 75 X Y Wt Suppliers B C 100 250 500 600 105 135 D 500 300 60 Compute distance from each site to each supplier Site 1 dA = dB = = (200(200-360)2 + (200-180)2 = 161.2 (200- (xB - x1)2 + (yB - y1)2 = (100(100-360)2 + (500-180)2 = 412.3 (500- (xA - x1)2 + (yA - y1)2 dC = 434.2 dD = 184.4 Supplement 7-399 7-
  • 400. LoadLoad-Distance: Example (cont.) Site 2 dA = 333 dB = 323.9 dC = 226.7 dD = 170 Site 3 dA = 206.2 dB = 180.3 dC = 200 dD = 269.3 Compute load-distance load- n LD = ∑ ld i i i=1 Site 1 = (75)(161.2) + (105)(412.3) + (135)(434.2) + (60)(434.4) = 125,063 Site 2 = (75)(333) + (105)(323.9) + (135)(226.7) + (60)(170) = 99,789 Site 3 = (75)(206.2) + (105)(180.3) + (135)(200) + (60)(269.3) = 77,555* * Choose site 3 Supplement 7-400 7-
  • 401. LoadLoad-Distance Technique with Excel and OM Tools Supplement 7-401 7-
  • 402. Chapter 8 Human Resources Operations Management Roberta Russell & Bernard W. Taylor, III
  • 403. Lecture Outline Human Resources and Quality Management Changing Nature of Human Resources Management Contemporary Trends in Human Resources Management Employee Compensation Managing Diversity in Workplace Job Design Job Analysis Learning Curves 8-403
  • 404. Human Resources and Quality Management Employees play important role in quality management Malcolm Baldrige National Quality Award winners have a pervasive human resource focus Employee training and education are recognized as necessary long-term investments Employees have power to make decisions that will improve quality and customer service Strategic goals for quality and customer satisfaction require teamwork and group participation 8-404
  • 405. Changing Nature of Human Resources Management Scientific management Breaking down jobs into elemental activities and simplifying job design Jobs Comprise a set of tasks, elements, and job motions (basic physical movements) In a piece-rate wage system, pay is based on output Assembly-line Production meshed with principles of scientific management Advantages of task specialization High output, low costs, and minimal training Disadvantages of task specialization Boredom, lack of motivation, and physical and mental fatigue 8-405
  • 406. Employee Motivation Motivation willingness to work hard because that effort satisfies an employee need Improving Motivation positive reinforcement and feedback effective organization and discipline fair treatment of people satisfaction of employee needs setting of work-related goals Improving Motivation (cont.) design of jobs to fit employee work responsibility empowerment restructuring of jobs when necessary rewards based on company as well as individual performance achievement of company goals 8-406
  • 407. Evolution of Theories of Employee Motivation Abraham Maslow’s Pyramid of Human Needs Douglas McGregor’s Theory X and Theory Y •Theory X Employee SelfSelfactualization Esteem Social Safety/Security Physiological (financial) • Dislikes work • Must be coerced • Shirks responsibility • Little ambition • Security top motivator •Theory Y Employee • Work is natural • Self-directed Self• Controlled • Accepts responsibility • Makes good decisions Frederick Herzberg’s Hygiene/Motivation Theories •Hygiene Factors • Company policies • Supervision • Working conditions • Interpersonal relations • Salary, status, security •Motivation Factors • Achievement • Recognition • Job interest • Responsibility • Growth • Advancement 8-407
  • 408. Contemporary Trends in Human Resources Management Job training extensive and varied two of Deming’s 14 points refer to employee education and training Cross Training an employee learns more than one job Job rotation horizontal movement between two or more jobs according to a plan Empowerment giving employees authority to make decisions Teams group of employees work on problems in their immediate work area 8-408
  • 409. Contemporary Trends in Human Resources Management (cont.) Job enrichment vertical enlargement allows employees control over their work horizontal enlargement an employee is assigned a complete unit of work with defined start and end Flexible time part of a daily work schedule in which employees can choose time of arrival and departure Alternative workplace nontraditional work location Telecommuting employees work electronically from a location they choose Temporary and part-time employees mostly in fast-food and restaurant chains, retail companies, package delivery services, and financial firms 8-409
  • 410. Employee Compensation Types of pay hourly wage the longer someone works, the more s/he is paid individual incentive or piece rate employees are paid for the number of units they produce during the workday straight salary common form of payment for management commissions usually applied to sales and salespeople 8-410
  • 411. Employee Compensation (cont.) Gainsharing an incentive plan joins employees in a common effort to achieve company goals in which they share in the gains Profit sharing sets aside a portion of profits for employees at year’s end 8-411
  • 412. Managing Diversity in Workplace Workforce has become more diverse 4 out of every 10 people entering workforce during the decade from 1998 to 2008 will be members of minority groups In 2000 U.S. Census showed that some minorities, primarily Hispanic and Asian, are becoming majorities Companies must develop a strategic approach to managing diversity 8-412
  • 413. Affirmative Actions vs. Managing Diversity Affirmative action an outgrowth of laws and regulations government initiated and mandated contains goals and timetables designed to increase level of participation by women and minorities to attain parity levels in a company’s workforce not directly concerned with increasing company success or increasing profits Managing diversity process of creating a work environment in which all employees can contribute to their full potential in order to achieve a company’s goals voluntary in nature, not mandated seeks to improve internal communications and interpersonal relationships, resolve conflict, and increase product quality, productivity, and efficiency 8-413
  • 415. Global Diversity Issues Cultural, language, geography significant barriers to managing a globally diverse workforce E-mails, faxes, Internet, phones, air travel make managing a global workforce possible but not necessarily effective How to deal with diversity? identify critical cultural elements learn informal rules of communication use a third party who is better able to bridge cultural gap become culturally aware and learn foreign language teach employees cultural norm of organization 8-415
  • 416. Attributes of Good Job Design An appropriate degree of repetitiveness An appropriate degree of attention and mental absorption Some employee responsibility for decisions and discretion Employee control over their own job Goals and achievement feedback A perceived contribution to a useful product or service Opportunities for personal relationships and friendships Some influence over the way work is carried out in groups Use of skills 8-416
  • 417. Factors in Job Design Task analysis how tasks fit together to form a job Worker analysis determining worker capabilities and responsibilities for a job Environment analysis physical characteristics and location of a job Ergonomics fitting task to person in a work environment Technology and automation broadened scope of job design 8-417
  • 418. Elements of Job Design 8-418
  • 419. Job Analysis Method Analysis (work methods) Study methods used in the work included in the job to see how it should be done Primary tools are a variety of charts that illustrate in different ways how a job or work process is done 8-419
  • 420. Process Flowchart Symbols Operation: An activity directly contributing to product or service Transportation: Moving the product or service from one location to another Inspection: Examining the product or service for completeness, irregularities, or quality Delay: Process having to wait Storage: Store of the product or service 8-420
  • 422. Job Photo-Id Cards PhotoTime (min) –1 WorkerWorkerMachine Chart Operator Date Time (min) 10/14 Photo Machine Key in customer data on card 2.6 Idle Feed data card in 0.4 Accept card –2 –3 Idle Take picture 0.6 Begin photo process Idle –4 Position customer for photo 1.0 3.4 Photo/card processed Inspect card & trim edges 1.2 Idle –5 –6 –7 –8 –9 8-422
  • 423. WorkerWorker-Machine Chart: Summary Summary Operator Time % Photo Machine Time % Work 5.8 63 4.8 52 Idle 3.4 37 4.4 48 Total 9.2 min 100% 9.2 Min 100% 8-423
  • 424. Motion Study Used to ensure efficiency of motion in a job Frank & Lillian Gilbreth Find one “best way” to do task Use videotape to study motions 8-424
  • 425. General Guidelines for Motion Study Efficient Use Of Human Body Work simplified, rhythmic and symmetric Hand/arm motions coordinated and simultaneous Employ full extent of physical capabilities Conserve energy use machines, minimize distances, use momentum Tasks simple, minimal eye contact and muscular effort, no unnecessary motions, delays or idleness 8-425
  • 426. General Guidelines for Motion Study Efficient Arrangement of Workplace Tools, material, equipment - designated, easily accessible location Comfortable and healthy seating and work area Efficient Use of Equipment Equipment and mechanized tools enhance worker abilities Use foot-operated equipment to relieve hand/arm stress footConstruct and arrange equipment to fit worker use 8-426
  • 427. Illustrates improvement rate of workers as a job is repeated Processing time per unit decreases by a constant percentage each time output doubles Processing time per unit Learning Curves Units produced 8-427
  • 428. Learning Curves (cont.) Time required for the nth unit = tn = t1n b where: tn = t1 = n= b= time required for nth unit produced time required for first unit produced cumulative number of units produced ln r where r is the learning curve percentage ln 2 (decimal coefficient) 8-428
  • 429. Learning Curve Effect Contract to produce 36 computers. t1 = 18 hours, learning rate = 80% What is time for 9th, 18th, 36th units? t9 = (18)(9)ln(0.8)/ln 2 = (18)(9)-0.322 = (18)/(9)0.322 = (18)(0.493) = 8.874hrs t18 = (18)(18)ln(0.8)/ln 2 = (18)(0.394) = 7.092hrs t36 = (18)(36)ln(0.8)/ln 2 = (18)(0.315) = 5.674hrs 8-429
  • 430. Processing time per unit Learning Curve for Mass Production Job End of improvement Standard time Units produced 8-430
  • 431. Learning Curves (cont.) Advantages planning labor planning budget determining scheduling requirements Limitations product modifications negate learning curve effect improvement can derive from sources besides learning industry-derived learning curve rates may be inappropriate 8-431
  • 432. Chapter 8 Supplement Work Measurement Operations Management Roberta Russell & Bernard W. Taylor, III
  • 433. Lecture Outline Time Studies Work Sampling Supplement 8-433 8-
  • 434. Work Measurement Determining how long it takes to do a job Growing importance in service sector Services tend to be labor-intensive laborService jobs are often repetitive Time studies Standard time is time required by an average worker to perform a job once Incentive piece-rate wage system based on time piecestudy Supplement 8-434 8-
  • 435. Stopwatch Time Study Basic Steps 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Establish standard job method Break down job into elements Study job Rate worker’s performance (RF) Compute average time (t) Supplement 8-435 8-
  • 436. Stopwatch Time Study Basic Steps (cont.) 6. Compute normal time Normal Time = (Elemental average) x (rating factor) Nt = (t )(RF) )(RF) Normal Cycle Time = NT = ΣNt 7. Compute standard time Standard Time = (normal cycle time) x (1 + allowance factor) ST = (NT)(1 + AF) Supplement 8-436 8-
  • 437. Performing a Time Study Time Study Observation Sheet Identification of operation Date Sandwich Assembly Operator Smith Approval Jones Observer Russell Cycles 1 Grasp and lay 1 out bread slices 2 Spread mayonnaise on both slices 3 Place ham, cheese, and lettuce on bread 4 t 2 3 4 5 6 5/17 Summary 7 8 9 10 .04 .05 .05 .04 .06 .05 .06 .06 .07 .05 R .04 .06 R .11 .11 RF Nt .53 .053 1.05 .056 .44 .79 1.13 1.47 1.83 2.21 2.60 2.98 3.37 t .12 t .38 .72 1.05 1.40 1.76 2.13 2.50 2.89 3.29 t .07 Σt R .23 .55 .07 .08 .07 .07 .14 .12 .13 .13 .08 .13 .10 .12 .09 .14 .08 .77 .077 1.00 .077 .14 1.28 1.28 1.10 .141 .93 1.25 1.60 1.96 2.34 2.72 3.12 3.51 Place top on sandwich, t .10 .12 .08 .09 .11 .11 .10 .10 .12 .10 1.03 1.03 1.10 .113 Slice, and stack R .33 .67 1.01 1.34 1.71 2.07 2.44 2.82 3.24 3.61 Supplement 8-437 8-
  • 438. Performing a Time Study (cont.) Average element time = t = 0.53 Σt = = 0.053 10 10 Normal time = (Elemental average)(rating factor) Nt = ( t )(RF) = (0.053)(1.05) = 0.056 )(RF) Normal Cycle Time = NT = Σ Nt = 0.387 ST = (NT) (1 + AF) = (0.387)(1+0.15) = 0.445 min Supplement 8-438 8-
  • 439. Performing a Time Study (cont.) How many sandwiches can be made in 2 hours? 120 min 0.445 min/sandwich = 269.7 or 270 sandwiches Example 17.3 Supplement 8-439 8-
  • 440. Number of Cycles To determine sample size: zs n= 2 eT where z = number of standard deviations from the mean in a normal distribution reflecting a level of statistical confidence s= Σ(xi - x)2 = sample standard deviation from sample time study n-1 T = average job cycle time from the sample time study e = degree of error from true mean of distribution Supplement 8-440 8-
  • 441. Number of Cycles: Example • Average cycle time = 0.361 • Computed standard deviation = 0.03 • Company wants to be 95% confident that computed time is within 5% of true average time zs n= eT 2 = 2 (1.96)(0.03) = 10.61 or 11 (0.05)(0.361) Supplement 8-441 8-
  • 442. Number of Cycles: Example (cont.) Supplement 8-442 8-
  • 443. Developing Time Standards without a Time Study Elemental standard time files predetermined job element times Predetermined motion times predetermined times for basic micro-motions micro- Time measurement units TMUs = 0.0006 minute 100,000 TMU = 1 hour Advantages worker cooperation unnecessary workplace uninterrupted performance ratings unnecessary consistent Disadvantages ignores job context may not reflect skills and abilities of local workers Supplement 8-443 8-
  • 444. MTM Table for MOVE TIME (TMU) WEIGHT ALLOWANCE DISTANCE MOVED (INCHES) A 3/4 or less 2.0 1 2.5 2 3.6 3 4.9 4 6.1 … 20 19.2 B 2.0 2.9 4.6 5.7 6.9 C 2.0 3.4 5.2 6.7 8.0 18.2 22.1 Hand in motion B Weight (lb) up to: Static constant TMU Dynamic factor 2.3 2.9 3.6 4.3 2.5 1.00 0 7.5 1.06 2.2 15.6 37.5 1.39 12.5 A. Move object to other hand or against stop B. Move object to approximate or indefinite location Source: MTM Association for Standards and Research. C. Move object to exact location Supplement 8-444 8-
  • 445. Work Sampling Determines the proportion of time a worker spends on activities Primary uses of work sampling are to determine ratio delay percentage of time a worker or machine is delayed or idle analyze jobs that have non-repetitive tasks non- Cheaper, easier approach to work measurement Supplement 8-445 8-
  • 446. Steps of Work Sampling 1. 2. Define job activities Determine number of observations in work sample 2 n= z e p(1 - p) where n = sample size (number of sample observations) z = number of standard deviations from mean for desired level of confidence e = degree of allowable error in sample estimate p = proportion of time spent on a work activity estimated prior to calculating work sample Supplement 8-446 8-
  • 447. Steps of Work Sampling (cont.) 3. Determine length of sampling period 4. Conduct work sampling study; record observations 5. Periodically re-compute number reof observations Supplement 8-447 8-
  • 448. Work Sampling: Example What percent of time is spent looking up information? Current estimate is p = 30% Estimate within +/- 2%, with 95% confidence +/- n= z e 2 2 p(1 - p) = 1.96 (0.3)(0.7) = 2016.84 or 2017 0.02 After 280 observations, p = 38% n= z e 2 2 p(1 - p) = 1.96 (0.38)(0.62) = 2263 0.02 Supplement 8-448 8-
  • 450. Chapter 9 Project Management Operations Management Roberta Russell & Bernard W. Taylor, III
  • 451. Lecture Outline Project Planning Project Scheduling Project Control CPM/PERT Probabilistic Activity Times Microsoft Project Project Crashing and Time-Cost Trade-off 9-451
  • 452. Project Management Process Project unique, one-time operational activity or effort 9-452
  • 456. Project Team and Project Manager Project team made up of individuals from various areas and departments within a company Matrix organization a team structure with members from functional areas, depending on skills required Project manager most important member of project team 9-456
  • 457. Scope Statement and Work Breakdown Structure Scope statement a document that provides an understanding, justification, and expected result of a project Statement of work written description of objectives of a project Work breakdown structure (WBS) breaks down a project into components, subcomponents, activities, and tasks 9-457
  • 458. Work Breakdown Structure for Computer Order Processing System Project 9-458
  • 459. Responsibility Assignment Matrix Organizational Breakdown Structure (OBS) a chart that shows which organizational units are responsible for work items Responsibility Assignment Matrix (RAM) shows who is responsible for work in a project 9-459
  • 460. Global and Diversity Issues in Project Management In existing global business environment, project teams are formed from different genders, cultures, ethnicities, etc. In global projects diversity among team members can add an extra dimension to project planning Cultural research and communication are important elements in planning process 9-460
  • 461. Project Scheduling Steps Define activities Sequence activities Estimate time Develop schedule Techniques Gantt chart CPM/PERT Microsoft Project 9-461
  • 462. Gantt Chart Graph or bar chart with a bar for each project activity that shows passage of time Provides visual display of project schedule Slack amount of time an activity can be delayed without delaying the project 9-462
  • 463. Example of Gantt Chart 0 | 2 | Month 4 | 6 | 8 | 10 Activity Design house and obtain financing Lay foundation Order and receive materials Build house Select paint Select carpet 1 Finish work 3 5 7 9 Month 9-463
  • 464. Project Control Time management Cost management Quality management Performance management Earned Value Analysis a standard procedure for numerically measuring a project’s progress, forecasting its completion date and cost and measuring schedule and budget variation Communication Enterprise project management 9-464
  • 465. CPM/PERT Critical Path Method (CPM) DuPont & Remington-Rand (1956) RemingtonDeterministic task times Activity-onActivity-on-node network construction Project Evaluation and Review Technique (PERT) US Navy, Booz, Allen & Hamilton Multiple task time estimates; probabilistic Activity-onActivity-on-arrow network construction 9-465
  • 466. Project Network Activity-on-node (AON) nodes represent activities, and arrows show precedence relationships Node Activity-on-arrow (AOA) arrows represent activities and nodes are events for points in time Event 1 2 3 Branch completion or beginning of an activity in a project Dummy two or more activities cannot share same start and end nodes 9-466
  • 467. AOA Project Network for a House 3 Lay foundation 2 1 3 Design house and obtain financing 2 Dummy Build house 0 1 Order and receive materials 4 Select paint Finish work 6 3 1 1 1 7 Select carpet 5 9-467
  • 468. Concurrent Activities Lay foundation 2 3 Lay foundation 3 Order material (a) Incorrect precedence relationship 2 Dummy 2 0 1 4 Order material (b) Correct precedence relationship 9-468
  • 469. AON Network for House Building Project Lay foundations Build house 4 3 2 2 Start Finish work 7 1 1 3 Design house and obtain financing 3 1 Order and receive materials 5 1 6 1 Select carpet Select paint 9-469
  • 470. Critical Path 4 3 2 2 Start 7 1 1 3 3 1 A: B: C: D: 1-2-4-7 3 + 2 + 3 + 1 = 9 months 1-2-5-6-7 3 + 2 + 1 + 1 + 1 = 8 months 1-3-4-7 3 + 1 + 3 + 1 = 8 months 1-3-5-6-7 3 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 = 7 months 5 1 6 1 Critical path Longest path through a network Minimum project completion time 9-470
  • 471. Activity Start Times Start at 5 months 4 3 2 2 Start Finish at 9 months 7 1 1 3 3 1 Start at 3 months 5 1 Finish 6 1 Start at 6 months 9-471
  • 472. Node Configuration Activity number Earliest start Earliest finish 1 0 3 3 0 3 Latest finish Activity duration Latest start 9-472
  • 473. Activity Scheduling Earliest start time (ES) earliest time an activity can start ES = maximum EF of immediate predecessors Forward pass starts at beginning of CPM/PERT network to determine earliest activity times Earliest finish time (EF) earliest time an activity can finish earliest start time plus activity time EF= ES + t 9-473
  • 474. Earliest Activity Start and Finish Times Lay foundations Build house 2 Start 3 5 4 2 5 8 3 1 0 3 7 1 Design house and obtain financing 8 9 1 6 3 3 4 1 Order and receive materials 6 7 Finish work 1 5 5 6 1 Select carpet Select pain 9-474
  • 475. Activity Scheduling (cont.) Latest start time (LS) Latest time an activity can start without delaying critical path time LS= LF - t Latest finish time (LF) latest time an activity can be completed without delaying critical path time LF = minimum LS of immediate predecessors Backward pass Determines latest activity times by starting at the end of CPM/PERT network and working forward 9-475
  • 476. Latest Activity Start and Finish Times Lay foundations Build house 2 3 5 2 Start 3 5 4 5 8 3 5 8 1 0 3 7 8 9 1 0 3 1 8 9 Design house and obtain financing 6 3 3 1 4 5 Order and receive materials 5 5 6 7 7 Finish work 8 6 1 7 1 4 6 Select carpet Select pain 9-476
  • 478. Probabilistic Time Estimates Beta distribution a probability distribution traditionally used in CPM/PERT Mean (expected time): Variance: a + 4m + b 4m t= 6 σ = 2 b-a 2 6 where a = optimistic estimate m = most likely time estimate b = pessimistic time estimate 9-478
  • 479. P(time) P(time) Examples of Beta Distributions m t b a Time t m b Time P(time) a a m=t b Time 9-479
  • 480. Project Network with Probabilistic Time Estimates: Example Equipment installation Equipment testing and modification 1 4 6,8,10 2,4,12 System development Start System training 8 2 Manual testing 3,6,9 5 Position recruiting 2,3,4 3 1,3,5 3,7,11 1,4,7 Finish 11 9 Job Training 2,4,6 6 System testing 3,4,5 Final debugging 10 1,10,13 System changeover Orientation 7 2,2,2 9-480
  • 481. Activity Time Estimates TIME ESTIMATES (WKS) ACTIVITY 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 MEAN TIME VARIANCE a m b t б2 6 3 1 2 2 3 2 3 2 1 1 8 6 3 4 3 4 2 7 4 4 10 10 9 5 12 4 5 2 11 6 7 13 8 6 3 5 3 4 2 7 4 4 9 0.44 1.00 0.44 2.78 0.11 0.11 0.00 1.78 0.44 1.00 4.00 9-481
  • 482. Activity Early, Late Times, and Slack ACTIVITY 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 t б2 ES EF LS LF S 8 6 3 5 3 4 2 7 4 4 9 0.44 1.00 0.44 2.78 0.11 0.11 0.00 1.78 0.44 1.00 4.00 0 0 0 8 6 3 3 9 9 13 16 8 6 3 13 9 7 5 16 13 17 25 1 0 2 16 6 5 14 9 12 21 16 9 6 5 21 9 9 16 16 16 25 25 1 0 2 8 0 2 11 0 3 8 0 9-482
  • 483. Earliest, Latest, and Slack 1 0 8 1 Start 2 0 6 0 3 0 3 2 8 9 4 8 5 16 21 3 5 10 13 17 8 9 7 9 6 6 Critical Path 13 5 6 3 6 6 3 4 5 16 7 3 Finish 16 9 9 1 0 13 9 9 4 12 16 11 16 25 9 16 25 9 7 3 5 2 14 16 9-483
  • 484. Total project variance σ2 = б22 + б52 + б82 + б112 σ = 1.00 + 0.11 + 1.78 + 4.00 = 6.89 weeks 9-484
  • 485. 9-485
  • 486. Probabilistic Network Analysis Determine probability that project is completed within specified time Z= where x-µ σ µ = tp = project mean time σ = project standard deviation x = proposed project time Z = number of standard deviations x is from mean 9-486
  • 487. Normal Distribution of Project Time Probability Zσ µ = tp x Time 9-487
  • 488. Southern Textile Example What is the probability that the project is completed within 30 weeks? P(x ≤ 30 weeks) σ 2 = 6.89 weeks σ σ µ = 25 x = 30 = = 2.62 weeks 6.89 Z = = x-µ σ 30 - 25 2.62 = 1.91 Time (weeks) From Table A.1, (appendix A) a Z score of 1.91 corresponds to a probability of 0.4719. Thus P(30) = 0.4719 + 0.5000 = 0.9719 9-488
  • 489. Southern Textile Example What is the probability that the project is completed within 22 weeks? P(x ≤ 22 weeks) σ 2 = 6.89 weeks σ σ x = 22 µ = 25 = = 2.62 weeks 6.89 Z = = x-µ σ 22 - 25 2.62 = -1.14 Time (weeks) From Table A.1 (appendix A) a Z score of -1.14 corresponds to a probability of 0.3729. Thus P(22) = 0.5000 - 0.3729 = 0.1271 9-489
  • 490. Microsoft Project Popular software package for project management and CPM/PERT analysis Relatively easy to use 9-490
  • 498. PERT Analysis with Microsoft Project (cont.) 9-498
  • 499. PERT Analysis with Microsoft Project (cont.) 9-499
  • 500. Project Crashing Crashing reducing project time by expending additional resources Crash time an amount of time an activity is reduced Crash cost cost of reducing activity time Goal reduce project duration at minimum cost 9-500
  • 501. Project Network for Building a House 4 2 8 12 7 4 1 12 3 4 5 4 6 4 9-501
  • 502. Normal Time and Cost vs. Crash Time and Cost $7,000 – $6,000 – Crash cost Crashed activity $5,000 – Slope = crash cost per week $4,000 – Normal activity $3,000 – Normal cost $2,000 – 0 – Normal time Crash time $1,000 – | 2 | 4 | 6 | 8 | 10 | 12 | 14 Weeks 9-502
  • 503. Project Crashing: Example TOTAL ALLOWABLE CRASH TIME (WEEKS) NORMAL TIME (WEEKS) CRASH TIME (WEEKS) NORMAL COST 1 12 7 $3,000 $5,000 5 $400 2 8 5 2,000 3,500 3 500 3 4 3 4,000 7,000 1 3,000 4 12 9 50,000 71,000 3 7,000 5 4 1 500 1,100 3 200 6 4 1 500 1,100 3 200 7 4 3 15,000 22,000 1 7,000 $75,000 $110,700 ACTIVITY CRASH COST CRASH COST PER WEEK 9-503
  • 504. $7000 $500 Project Duration: 36 weeks 4 2 8 $700 12 7 4 1 FROM … 12 $400 3 4 6 4 5 4 $3000 $200 $200 $7000 $500 4 2 8 TO… Project Duration: 31 weeks Additional Cost: $2000 $700 12 7 4 1 7 $400 3 4 $3000 5 4 6 4 $200 $200 9-504
  • 505. TimeTime-Cost Relationship Crashing costs increase as project duration decreases Indirect costs increase as project duration increases Reduce project length as long as crashing costs are less than indirect costs 9-505
  • 506. TimeTime-Cost Tradeoff Minimum cost = optimal project time Total project cost Cost ($) Indirect cost Direct cost Crashing Time Project duration 9-506
  • 507. Chapter 10 Supply Chain Management Strategy and Design Operations Management Roberta Russell & Bernard W. Taylor, III
  • 508. Lecture Outline The Management of Supply Chains Information Technology: A Supply Chain Enabler Supply Chain Integration Supply Chain Management (SCM) Software Measuring Supply Chain Performance 10-508 10-
  • 509. Supply Chains All facilities, functions, and activities associated with flow and transformation of goods and services from raw materials to customer, as well as the associated information flows An integrated group of processes to “source,” “make,” and “deliver” products 10-509 10-
  • 514. Supply Chain for Service Providers More difficult than manufacturing Does not focus on the flow of physical goods Focuses on human resources and support services More compact and less extended 10-514 10-
  • 515. Value Chains Value chain every step from raw materials to the eventual end user ultimate goal is delivery of maximum value to the end user Supply chain activities that get raw materials and subassemblies into manufacturing operation ultimate goal is same as that of value chain Demand chain increase value for any part or all of chain Terms are used interchangeably Value creation of value for customer is important aspect of supply chain management 10-515 10-
  • 516. Supply Chain Management (SCM) Managing flow of information through supply chain in order to attain the level of synchronization that will make it more responsive to customer needs while lowering costs Keys to effective SCM information communication cooperation trust 10-516 10-
  • 517. Supply Chain Uncertainty and Inventory One goal in SCM: respond to uncertainty in customer demand without creating costly excess inventory Negative effects of uncertainty lateness incomplete orders Inventory insurance against supply chain uncertainty Factors that contribute to uncertainty inaccurate demand forecasting long variable lead times late deliveries incomplete shipments product changes batch ordering price fluctuations and discounts inflated orders 10-517 10-
  • 518. Bullwhip Effect Occurs when slight demand variability is magnified as information moves back upstream 10-518 10-
  • 519. Risk Pooling Risks are aggregated to reduce the impact of individual risks Combine inventories from multiple locations into one Reduce parts and product variability, thereby reducing the number of product components Create flexible capacity 10-519 10-
  • 520. Information Technology: A Supply Chain Enabler Information links all aspects of supply chain E-business replacement of physical business processes with electronic ones Electronic data interchange (EDI) a computer-to-computer exchange of business documents Bar code and point-of-sale data creates an instantaneous computer record of a sale 10-520 10-
  • 521. Information Technology: A Supply Chain Enabler (cont.) Radio frequency identification (RFID) technology can send product data from an item to a reader via radio waves Internet allows companies to communicate with suppliers, customers, shippers and other businesses around the world instantaneously Build-to-order (BTO) direct-sell-to-customers model via the Internet; extensive communication with suppliers and customer 10-521 10-
  • 525. Supply Chain Integration Information sharing among supply chain members Reduced bullwhip effect Early problem detection Faster response Builds trust and confidence Collaborative planning, forecasting, replenishment, and design Reduced bullwhip effect Lower costs (material, logistics, operating, etc.) Higher capacity utilization Improved customer service levels 10-525 10-
  • 526. Supply Chain Integration (cont.) Coordinated workflow, production and operations, procurement Production efficiencies Fast response Improved service Quicker to market Adopt new business models and technologies Penetration of new markets Creation of new products Improved efficiency Mass customization 10-526 10-
  • 527. Collaborative Planning, Forecasting, and Replenishment (CPFR) Process for two or more companies in a supply chain to synchronize their demand forecasts into a single plan to meet customer demand Parties electronically exchange past sales trends point-of-sale data on-hand inventory scheduled promotions forecasts 10-527 10-
  • 528. Supply Chain Management (SCM) Software Enterprise resource planning (ERP) software that integrates the components of a company by sharing and organizing information and data 10-528 10-
  • 529. Key Performance Indicators Metrics used to measure supply chain performance Inventory turnover Inventory turns = Cost of goods sold Average aggregate value of inventory Total value (at cost) of inventory Average aggregate value of inventory = ∑ (average inventory for item i ) × (unit value item i ) Days of supply Days of supply = Average aggregate value of inventory (Cost of goods sold)/(365 days) Fill rate: fraction of orders filled by a distribution center within a specific time period 10-529 10-
  • 531. Process Control and SCOR Process Control not only for manufacturing operations can be used in any processes of supply chain Supply Chain Operations Reference (SCOR) a cross industry supply chain diagnostic tool maintained by the Supply Chain Council 10-531 10-
  • 534. Chapter 11 Global Supply Chain Procurement and Distribution Operations Management Roberta Russell & Bernard W. Taylor, III
  • 536. Procurement The purchase of goods and services from suppliers Cross enterprise teams coordinate processes between a company and its supplier OnOn-demand (direct-response) delivery (directrequires the supplier to deliver goods when demanded by the customer Continuous replenishment supplying orders in a short period of time according to a predetermined schedule 11-536 11-
  • 537. Outsourcing Sourcing selection of suppliers Outsourcing purchase of goods and services from an outside supplier Core competencies what a company does best Single sourcing a company purchases goods and services from only a few (or one) suppliers 11-537 11-
  • 538. Categories of Goods and Services... 11-538 11-
  • 539. E-Procurement Direct purchase from suppliers over the Internet, by using software packages or through e-marketplaces, e-hubs, and eetrading exchanges Can streamline and speed up the purchase order and transaction process 11-539 11-
  • 540. E-Procurement (cont.) What can companies buy over the Internet? Manufacturing inputs the raw materials and components that go directly into the production process of the product Operating inputs maintenance, repair, and operation goods and services 11-540 11-
  • 541. E-Procurement (cont.) E-marketplaces (e-hubs) (eWebsites where companies and suppliers conduct business-to-business activities business-to- Reverse auction process used by e-marketplaces for buyers eto purchase items; company posts orders on the internet for suppliers to bid on 11-541 11-
  • 542. Distribution Encompasses all channels, processes, and functions, including warehousing and transportation, that a product passes on its way to final customer Order fulfillment process of ensuring on-time delivery of an order onLogistics transportation and distribution of goods and services Driving force today is speed Particularly important for Internet dot-coms dot- 11-542 11-
  • 543. Distribution Centers (DC) and Warehousing DCs are some of the largest business facilities in the United States Trend is for more frequent orders in smaller quantities FlowFlow-through facilities and automated material handling Postponement final assembly and product configuration may be done at the DC 11-543 11-
  • 544. Warehouse Management Systems Highly automated system that runs day-to-day day-tooperations of a DC Controls item putaway, picking, packing, and shipping Features transportation management order management yard management labor management warehouse optimization 11-544 11-
  • 546. VendorVendor-Managed Inventory Manufacturers generate orders, not distributors or retailers Stocking information is accessed using EDI A first step towards supply chain collaboration Increased speed, reduced errors, and improved service 11-546 11-
  • 547. Collaborative Logistics and Distribution Outsourcing Collaborative planning, forecasting, and replenishment create greater economies of scale InternetInternet-based exchange of data and information Significant decrease in inventory levels and costs and more efficient logistics Companies focus on core competencies 11-547 11-
  • 548. Transportation Rail low-value, high-density, bulk products, raw materials, intermodal containers not as economical for small loads, slower, less flexible than trucking Trucking main mode of freight transport in U.S. small loads, point-to-point service, flexible More reliable, less damage than rails; more expensive than rails for long distance 11-548 11-
  • 549. Transportation (cont.) Air most expensive and fastest, mode of freight transport lightweight, small packages <500 lbs high-value, perishable and critical goods less theft Package Delivery small packages fast and reliable increased with e-Business primary shipping mode for Internet companies 11-549 11-
  • 550. Transportation (cont.) Water low-cost shipping mode primary means of international shipping U.S. waterways slowest shipping mode Intermodal combines several modes of shippingtruck, water and rail key component is containers Pipeline transport oil and products in liquid form high capital cost, economical use long life and low operating cost 11-550 11-
  • 551. Internet Transportation Exchanges Bring together shippers and carriers Initial contact, negotiations, auctions Examples www.nte.com www.freightquote.com 11-551 11-
  • 552. Global Supply Chain International trade barriers have fallen New trade agreements To compete globally requires an effective supply chain Information technology is an “enabler” of global trade 11-552 11-
  • 553. Obstacles to Global Chain Transactions Increased documentation for invoices, cargo insurance, letters of credit, ocean bills of lading or air waybills, and inspections Ever changing regulations that vary from country to country that govern the import and export of goods Trade groups, tariffs, duties, and landing costs Limited shipping modes Differences in communication technology and availability 11-553 11-
  • 554. Obstacles to Global Chain Transactions (cont.) Different business practices as well as language barriers Government codes and reporting requirements that vary from country to country Numerous players, including forwarding agents, custom house brokers, financial institutions, insurance providers, multiple transportation carriers, and government agencies Since 9/11, numerous security regulations and requirements 11-554 11-
  • 555. Duties and Tariffs Proliferation of trade agreements Nations form trading groups no tariffs or duties within group charge uniform tariffs to nonmembers Member nations have a competitive advantage within the group Trade specialists include freight forwarders, customs house brokers, export packers, and export management and trading companies 11-555 11-
  • 556. Duties and Tariffs (cont.) 11-556 11-
  • 557. Landed Cost Total cost of producing, storing, and transporting a product to the site of consumption or another port Value added tax (VAT) an indirect tax assessed on the increase in value of a good at any stage of production process from raw material to final product Clicker shock occurs when an ordered is placed with a company that does not have the capability to calculate landed cost 11-557 11-
  • 558. WebWeb-based International Trade Logistic Systems International trade logistics web-based software systems reduce obstacles to global trade convert language and currency provide information on tariffs, duties, and customs processes attach appropriate weights, measurements, and unit prices to individual products ordered over the Web incorporate transportation costs and conversion rates calculate shipping costs online while a company enters an order track global shipments 11-558 11-
  • 559. Recent Trends in Globalization for U.S. Companies Two significant changes passage of NAFTA admission of China in WTO Mexico cheap labor and relatively short shipping time China cheaper labor and longer work week, but lengthy shipping time Major supply chains have moved to China 11-559 11-
  • 560. China’s Increasing Role in the Global Supply Chain World’s premier sources of supply Abundance of low-wage labor lowWorld’s fastest growing market Regulatory changes have liberalized its market Increased exporting of higher technology products 11-560 11-
  • 561. Models in Doing Business in China Employ local third-party trading agents thirdWhollyWholly-owned foreign enterprise Develop your own international procurement offices 11-561 11-
  • 562. Challenges Sourcing from China Getting reliable information in more difficult than in the U.S. Information technology is much less advanced and sophisticated than in the U.S. Work turnover rates among low-skilled lowworkers is extremely high 11-562 11-
  • 563. Effects of 9/11 on Global Chains Increase security measures added time to supply chain schedules Increased supply chain costs 24 hours rules for “risk screening” extended documentation extend time by 3-4 days 3- Inventory levels have increased 5% Other costs include: new people, technologies, equipment, surveillance, communication, and security systems, and training necessary for screening at airports and seaports around the world 11-563 11-
  • 564. Chapter 11 Supplement Transportation and Transshipment Models Operations Management Roberta Russell & Bernard W. Taylor, III
  • 566. Transportation Model A transportation model is formulated for a class of problems with the following characteristics a product is transported from a number of sources to a number of destinations at the minimum possible cost each source is able to supply a fixed number of units of product each destination has a fixed demand for product Solution Methods steppingstepping-stone modified distribution Excel’s Solver Supplement 11-566 11-
  • 575. Chapter 12 Forecasting Operations Management Roberta Russell & Bernard W. Taylor, III
  • 576. Lecture Outline Strategic Role of Forecasting in Supply Chain Management Components of Forecasting Demand Time Series Methods Forecast Accuracy Time Series Forecasting Using Excel Regression Methods 12-576 12-
  • 577. Forecasting Predicting the future Qualitative forecast methods subjective Quantitative forecast methods based on mathematical formulas 12-577 12-
  • 578. Forecasting and Supply Chain Management Accurate forecasting determines how much inventory a company must keep at various points along its supply chain Continuous replenishment supplier and customer share continuously updated data typically managed by the supplier reduces inventory for the company speeds customer delivery Variations of continuous replenishment quick response JIT (just-in-time) (just-inVMI (vendor-managed inventory) (vendorstockless inventory 12-578 12-
  • 579. Forecasting Quality Management Accurately forecasting customer demand is a key to providing good quality service Strategic Planning Successful strategic planning requires accurate forecasts of future products and markets 12-579 12-
  • 580. Types of Forecasting Methods Depend on time frame demand behavior causes of behavior 12-580 12-
  • 581. Time Frame Indicates how far into the future is forecast Short- midShort- to mid-range forecast typically encompasses the immediate future daily up to two years LongLong-range forecast usually encompasses a period of time longer than two years 12-581 12-
  • 582. Demand Behavior Trend a gradual, long-term up or down movement of longdemand Random variations movements in demand that do not follow a pattern Cycle an up-and-down repetitive movement in demand up-and- Seasonal pattern an up-and-down repetitive movement in demand up-andoccurring periodically 12-582 12-
  • 583. Demand Demand Forms of Forecast Movement Random movement Time (b) Cycle Demand Demand Time (a) Trend Time (c) Seasonal pattern Time (d) Trend with seasonal pattern 12-583 12-
  • 584. Forecasting Methods Time series statistical techniques that use historical demand data to predict future demand Regression methods attempt to develop a mathematical relationship between demand and factors that cause its behavior Qualitative use management judgment, expertise, and opinion to predict future demand 12-584 12-
  • 585. Qualitative Methods Management, marketing, purchasing, and engineering are sources for internal qualitative forecasts Delphi method involves soliciting forecasts about technological advances from experts 12-585 12-
  • 586. Forecasting Process 1. Identify the purpose of forecast 2. Collect historical data 6. Check forecast accuracy with one or more measures 5. Develop/compute forecast for period of historical data 7. Is accuracy of forecast acceptable? No 3. Plot data and identify patterns 4. Select a forecast model that seems appropriate for data 8b. Select new forecast model or adjust parameters of existing model Yes 8a. Forecast over planning horizon 9. Adjust forecast based on additional qualitative information and insight 10. Monitor results and measure forecast accuracy 12-586 12-
  • 587. Time Series Assume that what has occurred in the past will continue to occur in the future Relate the forecast to only one factor - time Include moving average exponential smoothing linear trend line 12-587 12-
  • 588. Moving Average Naive forecast demand in current period is used as next period’s forecast Simple moving average uses average demand for a fixed sequence of periods stable demand with no pronounced behavioral patterns Weighted moving average weights are assigned to most recent data 12-588 12-
  • 589. Moving Average: Naïve Approach MONTH ORDERS PER MONTH Jan Feb Mar Apr May June July Aug Sept Oct Nov FORECAST 120 90 120 100 90 75 100 110 75 50 110 75 50 130 75 110 130 90 110 90 12-589 12-
  • 590. Simple Moving Average n Σ D i MAn = i=1 n where n = number of periods in the moving average Di = demand in period i 12-590 12-
  • 591. 3-month Simple Moving Average MONTH Jan Feb Mar Apr May June July Aug Sept Oct Nov ORDERS PER MONTH 120 90 100 75 110 50 75 130 110 90 - 3 Σ MOVING AVERAGE – – – 103.3 88.3 95.0 78.3 78.3 85.0 105.0 110.0 MA3 = = Di i=1 3 90 + 110 + 130 3 = 110 orders for Nov 12-591 12-
  • 592. 5-month Simple Moving Average MONTH Jan Feb Mar Apr May June July Aug Sept Oct Nov ORDERS PER MONTH 120 90 100 75 110 50 75 130 110 90 - MOVING AVERAGE – – – – – 99.0 85.0 82.0 88.0 95.0 91.0 5 Σ MA5 = = Di i=1 5 90 + 110 + 130+75+50 5 = 91 orders for Nov 12-592 12-
  • 593. Smoothing Effects 150 – 5-month 125 – Orders 100 – 75 – 3-month 50 – Actual 25 – 0– | Jan | Feb | Mar | | | | Apr May June July Month | | Aug Sept | Oct | Nov 12-593 12-
  • 594. Weighted Moving Average Σ Wi Di n Adjusts moving average method to more closely reflect data fluctuations WMAn = i=1 where Wi = the weight for period i, between 0 and 100 percent Σ Wi = 1.00 12-594 12-
  • 595. Weighted Moving Average Example MONTH WEIGHT August September October DATA 17% 33% 50% 130 110 90 3 November Forecast WMA3 = Σ1 Wi Di i= = (0.50)(90) + (0.33)(110) + (0.17)(130) = 103.4 orders 12-595 12-
  • 596. Exponential Smoothing Averaging method Weights most recent data more strongly Reacts more to recent changes Widely used, accurate method 12-596 12-
  • 597. Exponential Smoothing (cont.) Ft +1 = α Dt + (1 - α)Ft where: Ft +1 = forecast for next period Dt = actual demand for present period Ft = previously determined forecast for present period α = weighting factor, smoothing constant 12-597 12-
  • 598. Effect of Smoothing Constant 0.0 ≤ α ≤ 1.0 If α = 0.20, then Ft +1 = 0.20 Dt + 0.80 Ft If α = 0, then Ft +1 = 0 Dt + 1 Ft = Ft Forecast does not reflect recent data If α = 1, then Ft +1 = 1 Dt + 0 Ft = Dt Forecast based only on most recent data 12-598 12-
  • 599. Exponential Smoothing (α=0.30) (α PERIOD MONTH DEMAND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec 37 40 41 37 45 50 43 47 56 52 55 54 F2 = αD1 + (1 - α)F1 = (0.30)(37) + (0.70)(37) = 37 F3 = αD2 + (1 - α)F2 = (0.30)(40) + (0.70)(37) = 37.9 F13 = αD12 + (1 - α)F12 = (0.30)(54) + (0.70)(50.84) = 51.79 12-599 12-
  • 600. Exponential Smoothing (cont.) PERIOD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 MONTH Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec Jan DEMAND 37 40 41 37 45 50 43 47 56 52 55 54 – FORECAST, Ft + 1 (α = 0.3) (α = 0.5) – 37.00 37.90 38.83 38.28 40.29 43.20 43.14 44.30 47.81 49.06 50.84 51.79 – 37.00 38.50 39.75 38.37 41.68 45.84 44.42 45.71 50.85 51.42 53.21 53.61 12-600 12-
  • 601. Exponential Smoothing (cont.) 70 – α = 0.50 Actual 60 – Orders 50 – 40 – α = 0.30 30 – 20 – 10 – 0– | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 | 11 | 12 | 13 Month 12-601 12-
  • 602. Adjusted Exponential Smoothing AFt +1 = Ft +1 + Tt +1 where T = an exponentially smoothed trend factor Tt +1 = β(Ft +1 - Ft) + (1 - β) Tt where Tt = the last period trend factor β = a smoothing constant for trend 12-602 12-
  • 603. Adjusted Exponential Smoothing (β=0.30) (β PERIOD MONTH DEMAND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec 37 40 41 37 45 50 43 47 56 52 55 54 T3 = β(F3 - F2) + (1 - β) T2 = (0.30)(38.5 - 37.0) + (0.70)(0) = 0.45 AF3 = F3 + T3 = 38.5 + 0.45 = 38.95 T13 = β(F13 - F12) + (1 - β) T12 = (0.30)(53.61 - 53.21) + (0.70)(1.77) = 1.36 AF13 = F13 + T13 = 53.61 + 1.36 = 54.97 12-603 12-
  • 604. Adjusted Exponential Smoothing: Example PERIOD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 MONTH Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec Jan DEMAND FORECAST Ft +1 37 40 41 37 45 50 43 47 56 52 55 54 – 37.00 37.00 38.50 39.75 38.37 38.37 45.84 44.42 45.71 50.85 51.42 53.21 53.61 TREND ADJUSTED Tt +1 FORECAST AFt +1 – 0.00 0.45 0.69 0.07 0.07 1.97 0.95 1.05 2.28 1.76 1.77 1.36 – 37.00 38.95 40.44 38.44 38.44 47.82 45.37 46.76 58.13 53.19 54.98 54.96 12-604 12-
  • 605. Adjusted Exponential Smoothing Forecasts 70 – Adjusted forecast (β = 0.30) (β 60 – Actual Demand 50 – 40 – Forecast (α = 0.50) (α 30 – 20 – 10 – 0– | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | | 6 7 Period | 8 | 9 | 10 | 11 | 12 | 13 12-605 12-
  • 606. Linear Trend Line y = a + bx where a = intercept b = slope of the line x = time period y = forecast for demand for period x Σ xy - nxy b = 2 - nx2 Σx a = y-bx where n = number of periods Σx x = n = mean of the x values Σy y = n = mean of the y values 12-606 12-
  • 608. Least Squares Example (cont.) 78 12 557 12 ∑xy - nxy b = 2 ∑x - nx2 x = y = = 6.5 = 46.42 3867 - (12)(6.5)(46.42) = 650 - 12(6.5)2 =1.72 a = y - bx = 46.42 - (1.72)(6.5) = 35.2 12-608 12-
  • 609. Linear trend line y = 35.2 + 1.72x Forecast for period 13 y = 35.2 + 1.72(13) = 57.56 units 70 – 60 – Actual Demand 50 – 40 – Linear trend line 30 – 20 – 10 – 0– | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | | 6 7 Period | 8 | 9 | 10 | 11 | 12 | 13 12-609 12-
  • 610. Seasonal Adjustments Repetitive increase/ decrease in demand Use seasonal factor to adjust forecast Seasonal factor = Si = Di ∑D 12-610 12-
  • 611. Seasonal Adjustment (cont.) YEAR 2002 2003 2004 Total DEMAND (1000’S PER QUARTER) 1 2 3 4 Total 12.6 14.1 15.3 42.0 8.6 10.3 10.6 29.5 6.3 7.5 8.1 21.9 17.5 18.2 19.6 55.3 45.0 50.1 53.6 148.7 D1 42.0 S1 = = = 0.28 ∑D 148.7 D3 21.9 S3 = = = 0.15 ∑D 148.7 D2 29.5 S2 = = = 0.20 ∑D 148.7 D4 55.3 S4 = = = 0.37 ∑D 148.7 12-611 12-
  • 612. Seasonal Adjustment (cont.) For 2005 y = 40.97 + 4.30x = 40.97 + 4.30(4) = 58.17 4.30x SF1 = (S1) (F5) = (0.28)(58.17) = 16.28 (S (F SF2 = (S2) (F5) = (0.20)(58.17) = 11.63 (S (F SF3 = (S3) (F5) = (0.15)(58.17) = 8.73 (S (F SF4 = (S4) (F5) = (0.37)(58.17) = 21.53 (S (F 12-612 12-
  • 613. Forecast Accuracy Forecast error difference between forecast and actual demand MAD mean absolute deviation MAPD mean absolute percent deviation Cumulative error Average error or bias 12-613 12-
  • 614. Mean Absolute Deviation (MAD) Σ| Dt - Ft | MAD = n where t = period number Dt = demand in period t Ft = forecast for period t n = total number of periods   = absolute value 12-614 12-
  • 615. MAD Example PERIOD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 DEMAND, Dt Ft (α =0.3) (Dt - Ft) |Dt - Ft| 37 37.00 – 40 37.00 3.00 41 Σ| D37.90 t | 3.10 t - F 37 38.83 1.83 MAD = 38.28 -6.72 n 45 50 40.29 9.69 53.39 = 43.20 -0.20 43 47 43.14 3.86 11 56 = 4.85 44.30 11.70 52 47.81 4.19 55 49.06 5.94 54 50.84 3.15 – 3.00 3.10 1.83 6.72 9.69 0.20 3.86 11.70 4.19 5.94 3.15 557 53.39 49.31 12-615 12-
  • 616. Other Accuracy Measures Mean absolute percent deviation (MAPD) ∑|Dt - Ft| MAPD = ∑Dt Cumulative error E = ∑et Average error E= ∑et n 12-616 12-
  • 617. Comparison of Forecasts FORECAST MAD MAPD E Exponential smoothing (α = 0.30) 4.85 (α 9.6% 49.31 Exponential smoothing (α = 0.50) 4.04 (α 8.5% 33.21 Adjusted exponential smoothing 3.81 7.5% 21.14 (α = 0.50, β = 0.30) Linear trend line 2.29 4.9% – (E) 4.48 3.02 1.92 – 12-617 12-
  • 618. Forecast Control Tracking signal monitors the forecast to see if it is biased high or low Tracking signal = ∑(Dt - Ft) E = MAD MAD 1 MAD ≈ 0.8 б Control limits of 2 to 5 MADs are used most frequently 12-618 12-
  • 619. Tracking Signal Values PERIOD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 DEMAND Dt 37 40 41 37 45 50 43 47 56 52 55 54 FORECAST, Ft ERROR Dt - Ft ∑E = ∑(Dt - Ft) 37.00 – – 37.00 3.00 3.00 37.90 3.10 6.10 38.83 -1.83 4.27 38.28 6.72 10.99 Tracking signal for period 3 40.29 9.69 20.68 43.20 -0.20 20.48 6.10 43.14 = 3.86 = 2.00 24.34 TS3 3.05 44.30 11.70 36.04 47.81 4.19 40.23 49.06 5.94 46.17 50.84 3.15 49.32 TRACKING MAD SIGNAL – – 3.00 1.00 3.05 2.00 2.64 1.62 3.66 3.00 4.87 4.25 4.09 5.01 4.06 6.00 5.01 7.19 4.92 8.18 5.02 9.20 4.85 10.17 12-619 12-
  • 620. Tracking Signal Plot Tracking signal (MAD) 3σ – 2σ – Exponential smoothing (α = 0.30) α 1σ – 0σ – -1σ – -2σ – Linear trend line -3σ – | 0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 Period | 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 | 11 | 12 12-620 12-
  • 621. Statistical Control Charts σ= ∑(Dt - Ft)2 n-1 Using σ we can calculate statistical control limits for the forecast error Control limits are typically set at ± 3σ 12-621 12-
  • 622. Statistical Control Charts 18.39 – UCL = +3σ σ 12.24 – Errors 6.12 – 0– -6.12 – -12.24 – -18.39 – | 0 LCL = -3σ σ | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 Period | 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 | 11 | 12 12-622 12-
  • 623. Time Series Forecasting using Excel Excel can be used to develop forecasts: Moving average Exponential smoothing Adjusted exponential smoothing Linear trend line 12-623 12-
  • 624. Exponentially Smoothed and Adjusted Exponentially Smoothed Forecasts 12-624 12-
  • 625. Demand and exponentially smoothed forecast 12-625 12-
  • 627. Computing a Forecast with Seasonal Adjustment 12-627 12-
  • 629. Regression Methods Linear regression a mathematical technique that relates a dependent variable to an independent variable in the form of a linear equation Correlation a measure of the strength of the relationship between independent and dependent variables 12-629 12-
  • 630. Linear Regression y = a + bx a = y-bx Σ xy - nxy 2 - nx2 b = Σx where a = intercept b = slope of the line Σx x =n Σy y =n = mean of the x data = mean of the y data 12-630 12-
  • 632. Linear Regression Example (cont.) 49 x= 8 346.9y = 8 = 6.125 = 43.36 ∑xy - nxy2 b = ∑x2 - nx2 = (2,167.7) - (8)(6.125)(43.36) (311) - (8)(6.125)2 = 4.06 a = y - bx = 43.36 - (4.06)(6.125) = 18.46 12-632 12-
  • 633. Linear Regression Example (cont.) Regression equation Attendance forecast for 7 wins y = 18.46 + 4.06x y = 18.46 + 4.06(7) = 46.88, or 46,880 60,000 – Attendance, y 50,000 – 40,000 – 30,000 – Linear regression line, y = 18.46 + 4.06x 4.06x 20,000 – 10,000 – | 0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | | 5 6 Wins, x | 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 12-633 12-
  • 634. Correlation and Coefficient of Determination Correlation, r Measure of strength of relationship Varies between -1.00 and +1.00 Coefficient of determination, r2 Percentage of variation in dependent variable resulting from changes in the independent variable 12-634 12-
  • 635. Computing Correlation r= r= n∑ xy - ∑ x∑ y [n∑ x2 - (∑ x)2] [n∑ y2 - (∑ y)2] [n (8)(2,167.7) - (49)(346.9) [(8)(311) - (49)2] [(8)(15,224.7) - (346.9)2] r = 0.947 Coefficient of determination r2 = (0.947)2 = 0.897 12-635 12-
  • 636. Regression Analysis with Excel 12-636 12-
  • 637. Regression Analysis with Excel (cont.) 12-637 12-
  • 638. Regression Analysis with Excel (cont.) 12-638 12-
  • 639. Multiple Regression Study the relationship of demand to two or more independent variables y = β0 + β1x1 + β2x2 … + βkxk where β0 = the intercept β1, … , βk = parameters for the independent variables x1, … , xk = independent variables 12-639 12-
  • 640. Multiple Regression with Excel 12-640 12-
  • 641. Chapter 13 Inventory Management Operations Management - 6th Edition Roberta Russell & Bernard W. Taylor, III Beni Asllani University of Tennessee at Chattanooga
  • 642. Lecture Outline Elements of Inventory Management Inventory Control Systems Economic Order Quantity Models Quantity Discounts Reorder Point Order Quantity for a Periodic Inventory System 13-642 13-
  • 643. What Is Inventory? Stock of items kept to meet future demand Purpose of inventory management how many units to order when to order 13-643 13-
  • 644. Inventory and Supply Chain Management Bullwhip effect demand information is distorted as it moves away from the end-use customer endhigher safety stock inventories to are stored to compensate Seasonal or cyclical demand Inventory provides independence from vendors Take advantage of price discounts Inventory provides independence between stages and avoids work stoppages 13-644 13-
  • 645. Inventory and Quality Management in the Supply Chain Customers usually perceive quality service as availability of goods they want when they want them Inventory must be sufficient to provide high-quality customer service in QM 13-645 13-
  • 646. Types of Inventory Raw materials Purchased parts and supplies Work-in-process (partially completed) products (WIP) Items being transported Tools and equipment 13-646 13-
  • 647. Two Forms of Demand Dependent Demand for items used to produce final products Tires stored at a Goodyear plant are an example of a dependent demand item Independent Demand for items used by external customers Cars, appliances, computers, and houses are examples of independent demand inventory 13-647 13-
  • 648. Inventory Costs Carrying cost cost of holding an item in inventory Ordering cost cost of replenishing inventory Shortage cost temporary or permanent loss of sales when demand cannot be met 13-648 13-
  • 649. Inventory Control Systems Continuous system (fixed-order(fixed-orderquantity) constant amount ordered when inventory declines to predetermined level Periodic system (fixed-time(fixed-timeperiod) order placed for variable amount after fixed passage of time 13-649 13-
  • 650. ABC Classification Class A 5 – 15 % of units 70 – 80 % of value Class B 30 % of units 15 % of value Class C 50 – 60 % of units 5 – 10 % of value 13-650 13-
  • 651. ABC Classification: Example PART 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 UNIT COST $ 60 350 30 80 30 20 10 320 510 20 ANNUAL USAGE 90 40 130 60 100 180 170 50 60 120 13-651 13-
  • 652. ABC Classification: Example (cont.) PART 9 8 2 1 4 3 6 5 10 7 PART VALUE $30,6001 16,0002 14,000 3 5,400 4,8004 3,9005 3,6006 3,000 CLASS 7 2,400 A 8 1,700 B 9 C 10 TOTAL % OF TOTAL % TOTAL UNIT COSTQUANTITY OF% CUMMULATIVE ANNUAL USAGE VALUE 35.9 $ 60 6.0 18.7 350 5.0 16.4 4.0 30 6.3 9.0 80 5.6 6.0 4.6 30 10.0 4.2 % OF TOTAL 18.0 20 3.5 10VALUE 13.0 ITEMS 2.8 12.0 320 71.0 9, 8, 2 2.0 17.0 1, 4, 3 510 16.5 $85,400 6, 5, 10, 720 12.5 90 6.0 40 11.0 A 130 15.0 24.0 60 30.0 B 100 40.0 %180TOTAL OF 58.0 170 71.0 QUANTITY 83.0 C 50 100.0 15.0 60 25.0 120 60.0 Example 10.1 13-652 13-
  • 653. Economic Order Quantity (EOQ) Models EOQ optimal order quantity that will minimize total inventory costs Basic EOQ model Production quantity model 13-653 13-
  • 654. Assumptions of Basic EOQ Model Demand is known with certainty and is constant over time No shortages are allowed Lead time for the receipt of orders is constant Order quantity is received all at once 13-654 13-
  • 655. Inventory Order Cycle Inventory Level Order quantity, Q Demand rate Average inventory Q 2 Reorder point, R 0 Lead time Order Order placed receipt Lead time Order Order placed receipt Time 13-655 13-
  • 656. EOQ Cost Model Co - cost of placing order Cc - annual per-unit carrying cost per- D - annual demand Q - order quantity Annual ordering cost = CoD Q Annual carrying cost = CcQ 2 Total cost = CoD + Q CcQ 2 13-656 13-
  • 657. EOQ Cost Model Deriving Qopt Proving equality of costs at optimal point CcQ CoD TC = + Q 2 CoD Cc ∂TC =– 2 + Q 2 ∂Q C0D Cc 0=– 2 + Q 2 Qopt = 2CoD Cc CoD CcQ = Q 2 Q2 2CoD = Cc Qopt = 2CoD Cc 13-657 13-
  • 658. EOQ Cost Model (cont.) Annual cost ($) Total Cost Slope = 0 CcQ Carrying Cost = 2 Minimum total cost CoD Ordering Cost = Q Optimal order Qopt Order Quantity, Q 13-658 13-
  • 659. EOQ Example Cc = $0.75 per gallon Qopt = 2CoD Cc Qopt = Co = $150 2(150)(10,000) (0.75) Qopt = 2,000 gallons Orders per year = D/Qopt = 10,000/2,000 = 5 orders/year D = 10,000 gallons CcQ CoD TCmin = + Q 2 TCmin (150)(10,000) (0.75)(2,000) = + 2 2,000 TCmin = $750 + $750 = $1,500 Order cycle time = 311 days/(D/Qopt) days/(D = 311/5 = 62.2 store days 13-659 13-
  • 660. Production Quantity Model An inventory system in which an order is received gradually, as inventory is simultaneously being depleted AKA non-instantaneous receipt model assumption that Q is received all at once is relaxed p - daily rate at which an order is received over time, a.k.a. production rate d - daily rate at which inventory is demanded 13-660 13-
  • 662. Production Quantity Model (cont.) p = production rate d = demand rate Q Maximum inventory level = Q - p d d = Q 1 -p 2CoD Qopt = Q d Average inventory level = 1p 2 Cc 1 - d p CoD CcQ d TC = Q + 2 1 - p 13-662 13-
  • 663. Production Quantity Model: Example Cc = $0.75 per gallon Co = $150 d = 10,000/311 = 32.2 gallons per day 2C o D Qopt = Cc 1 - d p D = 10,000 gallons p = 150 gallons per day 2(150)(10,000) = CoD CcQ d TC = Q + 2 1 - p 0.75 1 - 32.2 150 = 2,256.8 gallons = $1,329 2,256.8 Q Production run = p = = 15.05 days per order 150 13-663 13-
  • 664. Production Quantity Model: Example (cont.) 10,000 D Number of production runs = Q = 2,256.8 = 4.43 runs/year d Maximum inventory level = Q 1 - p = 2,256.8 1 - 32.2 150 = 1,772 gallons 13-664 13-
  • 665. Solution of EOQ Models with Excel 13-665 13-
  • 666. Solution of EOQ Models with Excel (Con’t) 13-666 13-
  • 667. Solution of EOQ Models with OM Tools 13-667 13-
  • 668. Quantity Discounts Price per unit decreases as order quantity increases CcQ CoD TC = + + PD 2 Q where P = per unit price of the item D = annual demand 13-668 13-
  • 669. Quantity Discount Model (cont.) ORDER SIZE 0 - 99 100 – 199 200+ PRICE $10 8 (d1) 6 (d2) TC = ($10 ) TC (d1 = $8 ) Inventory cost ($) TC (d2 = $6 ) Carrying cost Ordering cost Q(d1 ) = 100 Qopt Q(d2 ) = 200 13-669 13-
  • 670. Quantity Discount: Example QUANTITY 1 - 49 50 - 89 90+ Qopt = For Q = 72.5 For Q = 90 PRICE $1,400 1,100 900 2C o D = Cc Co = $2,500 Cc = $190 per TV D = 200 TVs per year 2(2500)(200) = 72.5 TVs 190 CcQopt CoD TC = + + PD = $233,784 2 Qopt CcQ CoD TC = + + PD = $194,105 2 Q 13-670 13-
  • 672. Reorder Point Level of inventory at which a new order is placed R = dL where d = demand rate per period L = lead time 13-672 13-
  • 673. Reorder Point: Example Demand = 10,000 gallons/year Store open 311 days/year Daily demand = 10,000 / 311 = 32.154 gallons/day Lead time = L = 10 days R = dL = (32.154)(10) = 321.54 gallons 13-673 13-
  • 674. Safety Stocks Safety stock buffer added to on hand inventory during lead time Stockout an inventory shortage Service level probability that the inventory available during lead time will meet demand 13-674 13-
  • 675. Variable Demand with a Reorder Point Inventory level Q Reorder point, R 0 LT LT Time 13-675 13-
  • 676. Inventory level Reorder Point with a Safety Stock Q Reorder point, R Safety Stock 0 LT LT Time 13-676 13-
  • 677. Reorder Point With Variable Demand R = dL + zσd L where d = average daily demand L = lead time σd = the standard deviation of daily demand z = number of standard deviations corresponding to the service level probability zσd L = safety stock 13-677 13-
  • 678. Reorder Point for a Service Level Probability of meeting demand during lead time = service level Probability of a stockout Safety stock zσd L σ dL Demand R 13-678 13-
  • 679. Reorder Point for Variable Demand The paint store wants a reorder point with a 95% service level and a 5% stockout probability d = 30 gallons per day L = 10 days σd = 5 gallons per day For a 95% service level, z = 1.65 R = dL + z σd L Safety stock = z σd L = 30(10) + (1.65)(5)( 10) = (1.65)(5)( 10) = 326.1 gallons = 26.1 gallons 13-679 13-
  • 680. Determining Reorder Point with Excel 13-680 13-
  • 681. Order Quantity for a Periodic Inventory System Q = d(tb + L) + zσd tb + L - I where d = average demand rate tb = the fixed time between orders L = lead time σd = standard deviation of demand zσd tb + L = safety stock I = inventory level 13-681 13-
  • 683. FixedFixed-Period Model with Variable Demand d = 6 packages per day σd = 1.2 packages tb = 60 days L = 5 days I = 8 packages z = 1.65 (for a 95% service level) Q = d(tb + L) + zσd tb + L - I = (6)(60 + 5) + (1.65)(1.2) 60 + 5 - 8 = 397.96 packages 13-683 13-
  • 684. FixedFixed-Period Model with Excel 13-684 13-
  • 685. Chapter 13 Supplement Simulation Operations Management Roberta Russell & Bernard W. Taylor, III
  • 686. Lecture Outline Monte Carlo Simulation Computer Simulation with Excel Areas of Simulation Application Supplement 13-686 13-
  • 687. Simulation Mathematical and computer modeling technique for replicating real-world problem situations Modeling approach primarily used to analyze probabilistic problems It does not normally provide a solution; instead it provides information that is used to make a decision Physical simulation Space flights, wind tunnels, treadmills for tires Mathematical-computerized simulation Computer-based replicated models Supplement 13-687 13-
  • 688. Monte Carlo Simulation Select numbers randomly from a probability distribution Use these values to observe how a model performs over time Random numbers each have an equal likelihood of being selected at random Supplement 13-688 13-
  • 689. Distribution of Demand LAPTOPS DEMANDED PER WEEK, x 0 1 2 3 4 FREQUENCY OF DEMAND 20 40 20 10 10 PROBABILITY OF DEMAND, P(x) 0.20 0.40 0.20 0.10 0.10 100 1.00 Supplement 13-689 13-
  • 690. Roulette Wheel of Demand 0 90 x=4 x=0 80 20 x=3 x=2 x=1 60 Supplement 13-690 13-
  • 691. Generating Demand from Random Numbers DEMAND, x RANGES OF RANDOM NUMBERS, r 0 1 2 3 4 0-19 20-59 2060-79 6080-89 8090-99 90- r = 39 Supplement 13-691 13-
  • 693. 15 Weeks of Demand WEEK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 r 39 73 72 75 37 02 87 98 10 47 93 21 95 97 69 DEMAND (x) (x 1 2 2 2 1 0 3 4 0 1 4 1 4 4 2 Σ = 31 REVENUE (S) 4,300 8,600 8,600 8,600 4,300 0 12,900 17,200 0 4,300 17,200 Average demand 4,300 = 31/15 17,200 = 2.07 laptops/week 17,200 8,600 $133,300 Supplement 13-693 13-
  • 694. Computing Expected Demand E(x) = (0.20)(0) + (0.40)(1) + (0.20)(2) + (0.10)(3) + (0.10)(4) = 1.5 laptops per week •Difference between 1.5 and 2.07 is due to small number of periods analyzed (only 15 weeks) •Steady-state result Steady•an average result that remains constant after enough trials Supplement 13-694 13-
  • 695. Random Numbers in Excel Supplement 13-695 13-
  • 697. Simulation in Excel (cont.) Supplement 13-697 13-
  • 699. Decision Making with Simulation (cont.) Supplement 13-699 13-
  • 700. Areas of Simulation Application Waiting Lines/Service Complex systems for which it is difficult to develop analytical formulas Determine how many registers and servers are needed to meet customer demand Inventory Management Traditional models make the assumption that customer demand is certain Simulation is widely used to analyze JIT without having to implement it physically Supplement 13-700 13-
  • 701. Areas of Simulation Application (cont.) Production and Manufacturing Systems Examples: production scheduling, production sequencing, assembly line balancing, plant layout, and plant location analysis Machine breakdowns typically occur according to some probability distributions Capital Investment and Budgeting Capital budgeting problems require estimates of cash flows, often resulting from many random variables Simulation has been used to generate values of cash flows, market size, selling price, growth rate, and market share Supplement 13-701 13-
  • 702. Areas of Simulation Application (cont.) Logistics Typically include numerous random variables, such as distance, different modes of transport, shipping rates, and schedules to analyze different distribution channels Service Operations Examples: police departments, fire departments, post offices, hospitals, court systems, airports Complex operations that no technique except simulation can be employed Environmental and Resource Analysis Examples: impact of manufacturing plants, waste-disposal facilities, nuclear power plants, waste and population conditions, feasibility of alternative energy sources Supplement 13-702 13-
  • 703. Chapter 14 Sales and Operations Planning Operations Management Roberta Russell & Bernard W. Taylor, III
  • 704. Lecture Outline The Sales and Operations Planning Process Strategies for Adjusting Capacity Strategies for Managing Demand Quantitative Techniques for Aggregate Planning Hierarchical Nature of Planning Aggregate Planning for Services 14-704 14-
  • 705. Sales and Operations Planning Determines the resource capacity needed to meet demand over an intermediate time horizon Aggregate refers to sales and operations planning for product lines or families Sales and Operations planning (S&OP) matches supply and demand Objectives Establish a company wide game plan for allocating resources Develop an economic strategy for meeting demand 14-705 14-
  • 706. Sales and Operations Planning Process 14-706 14-
  • 707. The Monthly S&OP Planning Process 14-707 14-
  • 708. Meeting Demand Strategies Adjusting capacity Resources necessary to meet demand are acquired and maintained over the time horizon of the plan Minor variations in demand are handled with overtime or under-time under- Managing demand Proactive demand management 14-708 14-
  • 709. Strategies for Adjusting Capacity Level production Producing at a constant rate and using inventory to absorb fluctuations in demand Chase demand Hiring and firing workers to match demand Peak demand Maintaining resources for highhigh-demand levels Overtime and under-time underIncreasing or decreasing working hours Subcontracting Let outside companies complete the work PartPart-time workers Hiring part time workers to complete the work Backordering Providing the service or product at a later time period 14-709 14-
  • 712. Strategies for Managing Demand Shifting demand into other time periods Incentives Sales promotions Advertising campaigns Offering products or services with countercyclical demand patterns Partnering with suppliers to reduce information distortion along the supply chain 14-712 14-
  • 713. Quantitative Techniques For AP Pure Strategies Mixed Strategies Linear Programming Transportation Method Other Quantitative Techniques 14-713 14-
  • 714. Pure Strategies Example: QUARTER Spring Summer Fall Winter SALES FORECAST (LB) 80,000 50,000 120,000 150,000 Hiring cost = $100 per worker Firing cost = $500 per worker Inventory carrying cost = $0.50 pound per quarter Regular production cost per pound = $2.00 Production per employee = 1,000 pounds per quarter Beginning work force = 100 workers 14-714 14-
  • 715. Level Production Strategy Level production (50,000 + 120,000 + 150,000 + 80,000) = 100,000 pounds 4 QUARTER Spring Summer Fall Winter SALES FORECAST PRODUCTION PLAN INVENTORY 80,000 50,000 120,000 150,000 100,000 20,000 100,000 70,000 100,000 50,000 100,000 0 400,000 140,000 Cost of Level Production Strategy (400,000 X $2.00) + (140,00 X $.50) = $870,000 14-715 14-
  • 716. Chase Demand Strategy QUARTER Spring Summer Fall Winter SALES PRODUCTION FORECAST PLAN 80,000 50,000 120,000 150,000 80,000 50,000 120,000 150,000 WORKERS WORKERS WORKERS NEEDED HIRED FIRED 80 50 120 150 0 0 70 30 20 30 0 0 100 50 Cost of Chase Demand Strategy (400,000 X $2.00) + (100 x $100) + (50 x $500) = $835,000 14-716 14-
  • 717. Level Production with Excel 14-717 14-
  • 718. Chase Demand with Excel 14-718 14-
  • 719. Mixed Strategy Combination of Level Production and Chase Demand strategies Examples of management policies no more than x% of the workforce can be laid off in one quarter inventory levels cannot exceed x dollars Many industries may simply shut down manufacturing during the low demand season and schedule employee vacations during that time 14-719 14-
  • 720. Mixed Strategies with Excel 14-720 14-
  • 721. Mixed Strategies with Excel (cont.) 14-721 14-
  • 722. General Linear Programming (LP) Model LP gives an optimal solution, but demand and costs must be linear Let Wt = workforce size for period t Pt =units produced in period t It =units in inventory at the end of period t Ft =number of workers fired for period t Ht = number of workers hired for period t 14-722 14-
  • 723. LP MODEL Minimize Z = $100 (H1 + H2 + H3 + H4) + $500 (F1 + F2 + F3 + F4) + $0.50 (I1 + I2 + I3 + I4) + $2 (P1 + P2 + P3 + P4) Subject to Demand constraints Production constraints Work force constraints P1 - I1 I1 + P2 - I2 I2 + P3 - I3 I3 + P4 - I4 1000 W1 1000 W2 1000 W3 1000 W4 100 + H1 - F1 W1 + H2 - F2 W2 + H3 - F3 W3 + H4 - F4 = 80,000 = 50,000 = 120,000 = 150,000 = P1 = P2 = P3 = P4 = W1 = W2 = W3 = W4 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) 14-723 14-
  • 724. Setting up the Spreadsheet 14-724 14-
  • 726. Transportation Method EXPECTED QUARTER DEMAND 1 2 3 4 900 1500 1600 3000 REGULAR OVERTIME SUBCONTRACT CAPACITY CAPACITY CAPACITY 1000 1200 1300 1300 100 150 200 200 500 500 500 500 Regular production cost per unit $20 Overtime production cost per unit $25 Subcontracting cost per unit $28 Inventory holding cost per unit per period $3 Beginning inventory 300 units 14-726 14-
  • 727. Transportation Tableau PERIOD OF USE PERIOD OF PRODUCTION 1 2 Beginning 0 Inventory 1 3 300 Regular 600 3 — 20 300 6 — 23 100 — 29 1000 100 34 100 37 500 28 31 Subcontract 28 31 34 Subcontract — 26 1200 28 150 31 150 28 1200 23 25 Regular Overtime 3 31 Regular — 1300 Overtime 200 20 25 28 Subcontract 4 Regular 250 — — 500 1300 Overtime 200 Subcontract 500 Demand 300 26 25 20 9 — Overtime 2 Unused Capacity Capacity 4 900 1500 1600 34 250 500 23 1300 28 200 31 500 20 1300 25 200 28 3000 500 250 14-727 14-
  • 728. Burruss’ Production Plan REGULAR SUBSUBENDING PERIOD DEMAND PRODUCTION OVERTIME CONTRACT INVENTORY 1 2 3 4 Total 900 1500 1600 3000 7000 1000 1200 1300 1300 4800 100 150 200 200 650 0 250 500 500 1250 500 600 1000 0 2100 14-728 14-
  • 729. Using Excel for the Transportation Method of Aggregate Planning 14-729 14-
  • 730. Other Quantitative Techniques Linear decision rule (LDR) Search decision rule (SDR) Management coefficients model 14-730 14-
  • 731. Hierarchical Nature of Planning Production Planning Capacity Planning Resource Level Product lines or families Sales and Operations Plan Resource requirements plan Plants Individual products Master production schedule Rough-cut capacity plan Critical work centers Components Material requirements plan Capacity requirements plan All work centers Manufacturing operations Shop floor schedule Input/ output control Individual machines Items Disaggregation: process of breaking an aggregate plan into more detailed plans 14-731 14-
  • 732. Collaborative Planning Sharing information and synchronizing production across supply chain Part of CPFR (collaborative planning, forecasting, and replenishment) involves selecting products to be jointly managed, creating a single forecast of customer demand, and synchronizing production across supply chain 14-732 14-
  • 733. Available-to-Promise (ATP) Quantity of items that can be promised to customer Difference between planned production and customer orders already received AT in period 1 = (On-hand quantity + MPS in period 1) – (CO until the next period of planned production) ATP in period n = (MPS in period n) – (CO until the next period of planned production) Capable-to-promise quantity of items that can be produced and mad available at a later date 14-733 14-
  • 736. ATP: Example (cont.) Take excess units from April ATP in April = (10+100) – 70 = 40 = 30 ATP in May = 100 – 110 = -10 =0 ATP in June = 100 – 50 = 50 14-736 14-
  • 737. Rule Based ATP Product Request Yes Is the product available at this location? No Availableto-promise Yes Is an alternative product available at this location? No Allocate inventory Yes Is this product available at a different location? No Is an alternative product available at an alternate location? Yes No Allocate inventory Capable-topromise date Is the customer willing to wait for the product? No Availableto-promise Yes Revise master schedule Trigger production Lose sale 14-737 14-
  • 738. Aggregate Planning for Services 1. Most services cannot be inventoried 2. Demand for services is difficult to predict 3. Capacity is also difficult to predict 4. Service capacity must be provided at the appropriate place and time 5. Labor is usually the most constraining resource for services 14-738 14-
  • 741. Yield Management: Example NO-SHOWS NO- PROBABILITY 0 1 2 3 P(N < X) .15 .25 .30 .30 .00 .15 .40 .70 .517 Optimal probability of no-shows noP(n < x) ≤ P(n Cu 75 = = .517 Cu + Co 75 + 70 Hotel should be overbooked by two rooms 14-741 14-
  • 742. Chapter 14 Supplement Linear Programming Operations Management Roberta Russell & Bernard W. Taylor, III
  • 743. Lecture Outline Model Formulation Graphical Solution Method Linear Programming Model Solution Solving Linear Programming Problems with Excel Sensitivity Analysis Supplement 14-743 14-
  • 744. Linear Programming (LP) A model consisting of linear relationships representing a firm’s objective and resource constraints LP is a mathematical modeling technique used to determine a level of operational activity in order to achieve an objective, subject to restrictions called constraints Supplement 14-744 14-
  • 745. Types of LP Supplement 14-745 14-
  • 746. Types of LP (cont.) Supplement 14-746 14-
  • 747. Types of LP (cont.) Supplement 14-747 14-
  • 748. LP Model Formulation Decision variables mathematical symbols representing levels of activity of an operation Objective function a linear relationship reflecting the objective of an operation most frequent objective of business firms is to maximize profit most frequent objective of individual operational units (such as a production or packaging department) is to minimize cost Constraint a linear relationship representing a restriction on decision making Supplement 14-748 14-
  • 749. LP Model Formulation (cont.) Max/min z = c1x1 + c2x2 + ... + cnxn subject to: a11x1 + a12x2 + ... + a1nxn (≤, =, ≥) b1 a21x1 + a22x2 + ... + a2nxn (≤, =, ≥) b2 : an1x1 + an2x2 + ... + annxn (≤, =, ≥) bn xj = decision variables bi = constraint levels cj = objective function coefficients aij = constraint coefficients Supplement 14-749 14-
  • 750. LP Model: Example RESOURCE REQUIREMENTS PRODUCT Bowl Mug Labor (hr/unit) 1 2 Clay (lb/unit) 4 3 Revenue ($/unit) 40 50 There are 40 hours of labor and 120 pounds of clay available each day Decision variables x1 = number of bowls to produce x2 = number of mugs to produce Supplement 14-750 14-
  • 751. LP Formulation: Example Maximize Z = $40 x1 + 50 x2 Subject to x1 + 4x1 + 2x2 ≤ 40 hr 3x2 ≤ 120 lb x1 , x2 ≥ 0 Solution is x1 = 24 bowls Revenue = $1,360 (labor constraint) (clay constraint) x2 = 8 mugs Supplement 14-751 14-
  • 752. Graphical Solution Method 1. Plot model constraint on a set of coordinates in a plane 2. Identify the feasible solution space on the graph where all constraints are satisfied simultaneously 3. Plot objective function to find the point on boundary of this space that maximizes (or minimizes) value of objective function Supplement 14-752 14-
  • 753. Graphical Solution: Example x2 50 – 40 – 4 x1 + 3 x2 ≤ 120 lb 30 – Area common to both constraints 20 – x1 + 2 x2 ≤ 40 hr 10 – 0– | 10 | 20 | 30 | 40 | 50 | 60 x1 Supplement 14-753 14-
  • 754. Computing Optimal Values x1 + 4x1 + 40 – 4 x1 + 3 x2 = 120 lb 30 – 20 – x1 + 2 x2 = 40 hr 2x 2 = 3x 2 = 40 120 4x1 + -4x1 - 8x 2 = 3x 2 = 160 -120 5x 2 = x2 = x2 40 8 x1 + 2(8) = x1 = 40 24 10 – 8 0– | 10 | 24 | 20 30 | x1 40 Z = $40(24) + $50(8) = $1,360 Supplement 14-754 14-
  • 755. Extreme Corner Points x1 = 0 bowls x2 = 20 mugs Z = $1,000 x2 40 – 30 – 20 – A B 10 – 0– x1 = 224 bowls x2 = 8 mugs Z = $1,360 x1 = 30 bowls x2 = 0 mugs Z = $1,200 | 10 | 20 | C| 30 40 x1 Supplement 14-755 14-
  • 756. Objective Function x2 40 – 4x1 + 3x2 = 120 lb 3x Z = 70x1 + 20x2 70x 20x 30 – Optimal point: x1 = 30 bowls x2 = 0 mugs Z = $2,100 A 20 – B 10 – 0– | 10 | 20 x1 + 2x2 = 40 hr 2x | C | 30 40 x 1 Supplement 14-756 14-
  • 757. Minimization Problem CHEMICAL CONTRIBUTION Brand Nitrogen (lb/bag) GroGro-plus CropCrop-fast Phosphate (lb/bag) 2 4 4 3 Minimize Z = $6x1 + $3x2 subject to 2x1 + 4x2 ≥ 16 lb of nitrogen 4x1 + 3x2 ≥ 24 lb of phosphate x 1, x 2 ≥ 0 Supplement 14-757 14-
  • 758. Graphical Solution x2 14 – x1 = 0 bags of Gro-plus GroCrop12 – x2 = 8 bags of Crop-fast Z = $24 10 – A Z = 6x1 + 3x2 6x 3x 8– 6– 4– 2– 0– B | 2 | 4 | 6 | 8 C | 10 | 12 | 14 x1 Supplement 14-758 14-
  • 759. Simplex Method A mathematical procedure for solving linear programming problems according to a set of steps Slack variables added to ≤ constraints to represent unused resources x1 + 2x2 + s1 =40 hours of labor 40 4x1 + 3x2 + s2 =120 lb of clay 120 Surplus variables subtracted from ≥ constraints to represent excess above resource requirement. For example, 2x1 + 4x2 ≥ 16 is transformed into 4x 16 2x1 + 4x2 - s1 = 16 4x 16 Slack/surplus variables have a 0 coefficient in the objective function Z = $40x1 + $50x2 + 0s1 + 0s2 Supplement 14-759 14-
  • 762. Solving LP Problems with Excel Supplement 14-762 14-
  • 763. Solving LP Problems with Excel (cont.) Supplement 14-763 14-
  • 764. Solving LP Problems with Excel (cont.) Supplement 14-764 14-
  • 765. Sensitivity Range for Labor Hours Supplement 14-765 14-
  • 767. Chapter 15 Resource Planning Operations Management Roberta Russell & Bernard W. Taylor, III
  • 768. Lecture Outline Material Requirements Planning (MRP) Capacity Requirements Planning (CRP) Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) Customer Relationship Management (CRM) Supply Chain Management (SCM) Product Lifecycle Management (PLM) 15-768 15-
  • 770. Material Requirements Planning (MRP) Computerized inventory control and production planning system When to use MRP? Dependent demand items Discrete demand items Complex products Job shop production Assemble-to-order environments 15-770 15-
  • 771. Demand Characteristics Independent demand Dependent demand 100 x 1 = 100 tabletops 100 x 4 = 400 table legs 100 tables Continuous demand Discrete demand 400 – 300 – No. of tables No. of tables 400 – 200 – 100 – 1 2 3 4 Week 300 – 200 – 100 – 5 M T W Th F M T W Th F 15-771 15-
  • 773. MRP Inputs and Outputs Inputs Master production schedule Product structure file Item master file Outputs Planned order releases Work orders Purchase orders Rescheduling notices 15-773 15-
  • 774. Master Production Schedule Drives MRP process with a schedule of finished products Quantities represent production not demand Quantities may consist of a combination of customer orders and demand forecasts Quantities represent what needs to be produced, not what can be produced Quantities represent end items that may or may not be finished products 15-774 15-
  • 775. Master Production Schedule (cont.) MPS ITEM Pencil Case Clipboard Lapboard Lapdesk 1 2 125 85 75 0 125 95 120 50 PERIOD 3 4 125 120 47 0 125 100 20 50 5 125 100 17 0 15-775 15-
  • 777. Product Structure Clipboard Top clip (1) Pivot (1) Bottom clip (1) Spring (1) Rivets (2) Finished clipboard Pressboard (1) 15-777 15-
  • 778. Product Structure Tree Level 0 Clipboard Pressboard (1) Top Clip (1) Clip Ass’y (1) Bottom Clip (1) Rivets (2) Pivot (1) Level 1 Spring (1) Level 2 15-778 15-
  • 779. Multilevel Indented BOM LEVEL 0----1----2---2---2---2--1---1--- ITEM Clipboard Clip Assembly Top Clip Bottom Clip Pivot Spring Rivet Press Board UNIT OF MEASURE QUANTITY ea ea ea ea ea ea ea ea 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 15-779 15-
  • 780. Specialized BOMs Phantom bills Transient subassemblies Never stocked Immediately consumed in next stage K-bills Group small, loose parts under pseudo-item pseudonumber Reduces paperwork, processing time, and file space 15-780 15-
  • 781. Specialized BOMs (cont.) Modular bills Product assembled from major subassemblies and customer options Modular bill kept for each major subassembly Simplifies forecasting and planning X10 automobile example 3 x 8 x 3 x 8 x 4 = 2,304 configurations 3 + 8 + 3 + 8 + 4 = 26 modular bills 15-781 15-
  • 782. Modular BOMs X10 Automobile Engines (1 of 3) 4-Cylinder (.40) Exterior color (1 of 8) Interior (1 of 3) Bright red (.10) Leather (.20) Interior color (1 of 8) Body (1 of 4) Grey (.10) Sports coupe (.20) 6-Cylinder (.50) White linen (.10) Tweed (.40) Light blue (.10) Two-door (.20) Two- 8-Cylinder (.10) Sulphur yellow (.10) Plush (.40) Rose (.10) Four-door (.30) Four- Off-white (.20) Off- Station wagon (.30) Neon orange (.10) Metallic blue (.10) Cool green (.10) Emerald green (.10) Black (.20) Jet black (.20) Brown (.10) Champagne (.20) B/W checked (.10) 15-782 15-
  • 783. Time-phased Bills an assembly chart shown against a time scale Forward scheduling: start at today‘s date and schedule forward to determine the earliest date the job can be finished. If each item takes one period to complete, the clipboards can be finished in three periods Backward scheduling: start at the due date and schedule backwards to determine when to begin work. If an order for clipboards is due by period three, we should start production now 15-783 15-
  • 784. Item Master File DESCRIPTION Item Pressboard Item no. 7341 Item type Purch Product/sales class Comp Value class B Buyer/planner RSR Vendor/drawing 07142 Phantom code N Unit price/cost 1.25 Pegging Y LLC 1 INVENTORY POLICY Lead time Annual demand Holding cost Ordering/setup cost Safety stock Reorder point EOQ Minimum order qty Maximum order qty Multiple order qty Policy code 1 5000 1 50 0 39 316 100 500 1 3 15-784 15-
  • 785. Item Master File (cont.) PHYSICAL INVENTORY On hand Location On order Allocated Cycle Last count Difference 150 W142 100 75 3 9/5 -2 USAGE/SALES YTD usage/sales MTD usage/sales YTD receipts MTD receipts Last receipt Last issue CODES Cost acct. Routing Engr 1100 75 1200 0 8/25 10/5 00754 00326 07142 15-785 15-
  • 786. MRP Processes Exploding the bill of material Netting out inventory Lot sizing TimeTime-phasing requirements Netting process of subtracting ononhand quantities and scheduled receipts from gross requirements to produce net requirements Lot sizing determining the quantities in which items are usually made or purchased 15-786 15-
  • 788. MRP: Example Master Production Schedule 1 Clipboard Lapdesk 85 0 2 95 60 3 120 0 4 100 60 5 100 0 Item Master File On hand On order LLC Lot size Lead time CLIPBOARD LAPDESK 25 20 175 (Period 1) 0 (sch receipt) 0 0 L4L Mult 50 1 1 PRESSBOARD 150 0 1 Min 100 1 15-788 15-
  • 789. MRP: Example (cont.) Product Structure Record Level 0 Clipboard Pressboard (1) Clip Ass’y (1) Rivets (2) Level 1 Level 0 Lapdesk Pressboard (2) Trim (3’) Beanbag (1) Glue (4 oz) Level 1 15-789 15-
  • 790. MRP: Example (cont.) ITEM: CLIPBOARD LOT SIZE: L4L LLC: 0 LT: 1 Gross Requirements PERIOD 1 2 3 4 5 85 95 120 100 100 Scheduled Receipts Projected on Hand 175 25 Net Requirements Planned Order Receipts Planned Order Releases 15-790 15-
  • 791. MRP: Example (cont.) ITEM: CLIPBOARD LOT SIZE: L4L LLC: 0 LT: 1 Gross Requirements PERIOD 1 2 3 4 5 85 95 120 100 100 Scheduled Receipts Projected on Hand Net Requirements 175 25 115 0 Planned Order Receipts Planned Order Releases (25 + 175) = 200 units available (200 - 85) = 115 on hand at the end of Period 1 15-791 15-
  • 792. MRP: Example (cont.) ITEM: CLIPBOARD LOT SIZE: L4L LLC: 0 LT: 1 PERIOD 1 3 4 5 85 Gross Requirements 2 95 120 100 100 Scheduled Receipts Projected on Hand 25 Net Requirements 175 115 20 0 0 Planned Order Receipts Planned Order Releases 115 units available (115 - 85) = 20 on hand at the end of Period 2 15-792 15-
  • 793. MRP: Example (cont.) ITEM: CLIPBOARD LOT SIZE: L4L LLC: 0 LT: 1 PERIOD 1 3 4 5 85 Gross Requirements 2 95 120 100 100 Scheduled Receipts Projected on Hand 25 Net Requirements 175 115 20 0 0 0 100 Planned Order Receipts Planned Order Releases 100 100 20 units available (20 - 120) = -100 — 100 additional Clipboards are required Order must be placed in Period 2 to be received in Period 3 15-793 15-
  • 794. MRP: Example (cont.) ITEM: CLIPBOARD LOT SIZE: L4L LLC: 0 LT: 1 PERIOD 2 3 4 5 85 Gross Requirements 1 95 120 100 100 Scheduled Receipts Projected on Hand 25 Net Requirements 175 115 20 0 0 0 0 0 100 100 100 100 100 100 Planned Order Receipts Planned Order Releases 100 100 100 Following the same logic Gross Requirements in Periods 4 and 5 develop Net Requirements, Planned Order Receipts, and Planned Order Releases 15-794 15-
  • 795. MRP: Example (cont.) ITEM: LAPDESK LOT SIZE: MULT 50 LLC: 0 LT: 1 Gross Requirements PERIOD 1 2 0 60 3 0 4 60 5 0 Scheduled Receipts Projected on Hand 20 Net Requirements Planned Order Receipts Planned Order Releases 15-795 15-
  • 796. MRP: Example (cont.) ITEM: LAPDESK LOT SIZE: MULT 50 LLC: 0 LT: 1 Gross Requirements PERIOD 1 2 3 4 5 0 60 0 60 0 20 10 10 0 0 Scheduled Receipts Projected on Hand 20 Net Requirements 0 Planned Order Releases 50 50 50 Planned Order Receipts 40 50 50 Following the same logic, the Lapdesk MRP matrix is completed as shown 15-796 15-
  • 797. MRP: Example (cont.) ITEM: CLIPBOARD LLC: 0 LOT SIZE: L4L LT: 1 2 100 Planned Order Releases ITEM: LAPDESK LOT SIZE: MULT 50 LLC: 0 LT: 1 Planned Order Releases ITEM: PRESSBOARD LLC: 0 LOT SIZE: MIN 100 LT: 1 Gross Requirements Scheduled Receipts Projected on Hand Net Requirements Planned Order Receipts Planned Order Releases 1 100 2 1 PERIOD 3 4 PERIOD 3 4 50 1 5 100 5 50 2 PERIOD 3 4 5 150 15-797 15-
  • 798. MRP: Example (cont.) ITEM: CLIPBOARD LLC: 0 LOT SIZE: L4L LT: 1 Planned Order Releases ITEM: LAPDESK LOT SIZE: MULT 50 LLC: 0 LT: 1 Planned Order Releases 2 100 1 PERIOD 3 4 100 2 PERIOD x1 3 4 x1 1 50 x2 x2 ITEM: PRESSBOARD LLC: 0 LOT SIZE: MIN 100 LT: 1 1 2 Gross Requirements 100 100 Scheduled Receipts Projected on Hand 150 Net Requirements Planned Order Receipts Planned Order Releases 5 100 x1 5 50 PERIOD 3 4 200 100 5 0 15-798 15-
  • 799. MRP: Example (cont.) ITEM: CLIPBOARD LLC: 0 LOT SIZE: L4L LT: 1 2 100 Planned Order Releases ITEM: LAPDESK LOT SIZE: MULT 50 LLC: 0 LT: 1 Planned Order Releases ITEM: PRESSBOARD LLC: 0 LOT SIZE: MIN 100 LT: 1 Gross Requirements Scheduled Receipts Projected on Hand 150 Net Requirements Planned Order Receipts Planned Order Releases 1 100 2 1 PERIOD 3 4 PERIOD 3 4 50 100 5 50 1 100 50 PERIOD 3 4 200 100 2 100 50 100 5 50 100 150 0 150 150 100 0 5 0 0 100 100 15-799 15-
  • 800. MRP: Example (cont.) Planned Order Report PERIOD ITEM Clipboard Lapdesk Pressboard 1 2 3 4 5 100 100 100 50 50 100 150 100 15-800 15-
  • 801. Lot Sizing in MRP Systems Lot-for-lot ordering policy Fixed-size lot ordering policy Minimum order quantities Maximum order quantities Multiple order quantities Economic order quantity Periodic order quantity 15-801 15-
  • 802. Using Excel for MRP Calculations 15-802 15-
  • 803. Advanced Lot Sizing Rules: L4L Total cost of L4L = (4 X $60) + (0 X $1) = $240 15-803 15-
  • 804. Advanced Lot Sizing Rules: EOQ EO Q = 2(30)(60 = 60 1 minimum order quantity Total cost of EOQ = (2 X $60) + [(10 + 50 + 40) X $1)] = $220 15-804 15-
  • 805. Advanced Lot Sizing Rules: POQ POQ = Q / d = 60 / 30 = 2 periods worth of requirements Total cost of POQ = (2 X $60) + [(20 + 40) X $1] = $180 15-805 15-
  • 806. Planned Order Report Item #2740 On hand 100 On order 200 Allocated 50 DATE 10-08 10- 10-27 10- ORDER NO. 9-26 9-30 10-01 10SR 7542 10-10 1010-15 1010-23 10GR 6473 Date 9 - 25 - 05 Lead time 2 weeks Lot size 200 Safety stock 50 GROSS REQS. AL 4416 AL 4174 GR 6470 SCHEDULED PROJECTED RECEIPTS ON HAND ACTION 25 25 50 200 CO 4471 GR 6471 GR 6471 50 Key: AL = allocated CO = customer order PO = purchase order 150 75 50 25 - 50 50 25 0 - 50 Expedite SR 10-01 1075 25 0 Release PO 10-13 10- WO = work order SR = scheduled receipt GR = gross requirement 15-806 15-
  • 807. MRP Action Report Current date 9-25-08 9-25ITEM #2740 #3616 #2412 #3427 #2516 #2740 #3666 DATE 10-08 1010-09 1010-10 1010-15 1010-20 1010-27 1010-31 10- ORDER NO. QTY. 7542 200 7648 100 200 50 Expedite Move forward Move forward Move backward De-expedite DeRelease Release ACTION SR PO PO PO SR PO WO 10-01 1010-07 1010-05 1010-25 1010-30 1010-13 1010-24 10- 15-807 15-
  • 808. Capacity Requirements Planning (CRP) Creates a load profile Identifies under-loads and over-loads Inputs Planned order releases Routing file Open orders file 15-808 15-
  • 810. Calculating Capacity Maximum capability to produce Rated Capacity Theoretical output that could be attained if a process were operating at full speed without interruption, exceptions, or downtime Effective Capacity Takes into account the efficiency with which a particular product or customer can be processed and the utilization of the scheduled hours or work Effective Daily Capacity = (no. of machines or workers) x (hours per shift) x (no. of shifts) x (utilization) x ( efficiency) 15-810 15-
  • 811. Calculating Capacity (cont.) Utilization Percent of available time spent working Efficiency How well a machine or worker performs compared to a standard output level Load Standard hours of work assigned to a facility Load Percent Ratio of load to capacity load Load Percent = capacity x 100% 15-811 15-
  • 812. Load Profiles graphical comparison of load versus capacity Leveling underloaded conditions: Acquire more work Pull work ahead that is scheduled for later time periods Reduce normal capacity 15-812 15-
  • 813. Reducing Over-load Conditions Over1. Eliminating unnecessary requirements 2. Rerouting jobs to alternative machines, workers, or work centers 3. Splitting lots between two or more machines 4. Increasing normal capacity 5. Subcontracting 6. Increasing efficiency of the operation 7. Pushing work back to later time periods 8. Revising master schedule 15-813 15-
  • 814. Hours of capacity Initial Load Profile 120 – 110 – 100 – 90 – 80 – 70 – 60 – 50 – 40 – 30 – 20 – 10 – 0– Normal capacity 1 2 3 4 5 6 Time (weeks) 15-814 15-
  • 815. Hours of capacity Adjusted Load Profile 120 – 110 – 100 – 90 – 80 – 70 – 60 – 50 – 40 – 30 – 20 – 10 – 0– Pull ahead Overtime 1 2 Work an extra shift Push back Push back 3 4 Normal capacity 5 6 Time (weeks) Load leveling process of balancing underloads and overloads 15-815 15-
  • 816. Relaxing MRP Assumptions Material is not always the most constraining resource Lead times can vary Not every transaction needs to be recorded Shop floor may require a more sophisticated scheduling system Scheduling in advance may not be appropriate for on-demand production. 15-816 15-
  • 817. Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) Software that organizes and manages a company’s business processes by sharing information across functional areas integrating business processes facilitating customer interaction providing benefit to global companies 15-817 15-
  • 818. Organizational Data Flows Source: Adapted from Joseph Brady, Ellen Monk, and Bret Wagner, Concepts in Enterprise Resource Planning (Boston: Course Technology, 2001), pp. 7–12 15-818 15-
  • 821. ERP Implementation Analyze business processes Choose modules to implement Which processes have the biggest impact on customer relations? Which process would benefit the most from integration? Which processes should be standardized? Align level of sophistication Finalize delivery and access Link with external partners 15-821 15-
  • 822. Customer Relationship Management (CRM) Software that Plans and executes business processes Involves customer interaction Changes focus from managing products to managing customers Analyzes point-of-sale data for patterns point-ofused to predict future behavior 15-822 15-
  • 823. Supply Chain Management Software that plans and executes business processes related to supply chains Includes Supply chain planning Supply chain execution Supplier relationship management Distinctions between ERP and SCM are becoming increasingly blurred 15-823 15-
  • 824. Product Lifecycle Management (PLM) Software that Incorporates new product design and development and product life cycle management Integrates customers and suppliers in the design process though the entire product life cycle 15-824 15-
  • 825. ERP and Software Systems 15-825 15-
  • 826. Connectivity Application programming interfaces (APIs) give other programs well-defined ways of speaking to wellthem Enterprise Application Integration (EAI) solutions EDI is being replaced by XML, business language of Internet ServiceService-oriented architecture (SOA) collection of “services” that communicate with each other within software or between software 15-826 15-
  • 827. Chapter 16 Lean Systems Operations Management Roberta Russell & Bernard W. Taylor, III
  • 828. Lecture Outline Basic Elements of Lean Production Benefits of Lean Production Implementing Lean Production Lean Services Leaning the Supply Chain Lean Six Sigma Lean and the Environment Lean Consumption 16-828 16-
  • 829. Lean Production Doing more with less inventory, fewer workers, less space Just-in-time (JIT) smoothing the flow of material to arrive just as it is needed “JIT” and “Lean Production” are used interchangeably Muda waste, anything other than that which adds value to product or service 16-829 16-
  • 831. Waste in Operations (cont.) 16-831 16-
  • 832. Waste in Operations (cont.) 16-832 16-
  • 833. Basic Elements 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Flexible resources Cellular layouts Pull system Kanbans Small lots Quick setups Uniform production levels Quality at the source Total productive maintenance Supplier networks 16-833 16-
  • 834. Flexible Resources Multifunctional workers perform more than one job general-purpose machines perform several basic functions Cycle time time required for the worker to complete one pass through the operations assigned Takt time paces production to customer demand 16-834 16-
  • 835. Standard Operating Routine for a Worker 16-835 16-
  • 836. Cellular Layouts Manufacturing cells comprised of dissimilar machines brought together to manufacture a family of parts Cycle time is adjusted to match takt time by changing worker paths 16-836 16-
  • 837. Cells with Worker Routes 16-837 16-
  • 838. Worker Routes Lengthen as Volume Decreases 16-838 16-
  • 839. Pull System Material is pulled through the system when needed Reversal of traditional push system where material is pushed according to a schedule Forces cooperation Prevent over and underproduction While push systems rely on a predetermined schedule, pull systems rely on customer requests 16-839 16-
  • 840. Kanbans Card which indicates standard quantity of production Derived from two-bin inventory system twoMaintain discipline of pull production Authorize production and movement of goods 16-840 16-
  • 842. Origin of Kanban a) Two-bin inventory system Two- b) Kanban inventory system Bin 1 Kanban Bin 2 Reorder card Q-R R R Q = order quantity R = reorder point - demand during lead time 16-842 16-
  • 843. Types of Kanban Production kanban authorizes production of goods Withdrawal kanban authorizes movement of goods Kanban square a marked area designated to hold items Signal kanban a triangular kanban used to signal production at the previous workstation Material kanban used to order material in advance of a process Supplier kanban rotates between the factory and suppliers 16-843 16-
  • 847. Determining Number of Kanbans No. of Kanbans = average demand during lead time + safety stock container size dL + S C where N = N = number of kanbans or containers d = average demand over some time period L = lead time to replenish an order S = safety stock C = container size 16-847 16-
  • 848. Determining Number of Kanbans: Example d = 150 bottles per hour L = 30 minutes = 0.5 hours S = 0.10(150 x 0.5) = 7.5 C = 25 bottles (150 x 0.5) + 7.5 dL + S N= = 25 C = 75 + 7.5 = 3.3 kanbans or containers 25 Round up to 4 (to allow some slack) or down to 3 (to force improvement) 16-848 16-
  • 849. Small Lots Require less space and capital investment Move processes closer together Make quality problems easier to detect Make processes more dependent on each other 16-849 16-
  • 851. Less Inventory Exposes Problems 16-851 16-
  • 852. Components of Lead Time Processing time Reduce number of items or improve efficiency Move time Reduce distances, simplify movements, standardize routings Waiting time Better scheduling, sufficient capacity Setup time Generally the biggest bottleneck 16-852 16-
  • 853. Quick Setups Internal setup Can be performed only when a process is stopped External setup Can be performed in advance SMED Principles Separate internal setup from external setup Convert internal setup to external setup Streamline all aspects of setup Perform setup activities in parallel or eliminate them entirely 16-853 16-
  • 854. Common Techniques for Reducing Setup Time 16-854 16-
  • 855. Common Techniques for Reducing Setup Time (cont.) 16-855 16-
  • 856. Common Techniques for Reducing Setup Time (cont.) 16-856 16-
  • 857. Uniform Production Levels Result from smoothing production requirements on final assembly line Kanban systems can handle +/- 10% +/demand changes Reduce variability with more accurate forecasts Smooth demand across planning horizon MixedMixed-model assembly steadies component production 16-857 16-
  • 859. Quality at the Source Visual control makes problems visible Poka-yokes prevent defects from occurring Kaizen a system of continuous improvement; “change for the good of all” Jidoka authority to stop the production line Andons call lights that signal quality problems Under-capacity scheduling leaves time for planning, problem solving, and maintenance 16-859 16-
  • 861. Examples of Visual Control (cont.) 16-861 16-
  • 862. Examples of Visual Control (cont.) 16-862 16-
  • 863. 5 Whys One of the keys to an effective Kaizen is finding the root cause of a problem and eliminating it A practice of asking “why?” repeatedly until the underlying cause is identified (usually requiring five questions) Simple, yet powerful technique for finding the root cause of a problem 16-863 16-
  • 864. Total Productive Maintenance (TPM) Breakdown maintenance Repairs to make failed machine operational Preventive maintenance System of periodic inspection and maintenance to keep machines operating TPM combines preventive maintenance and total quality concepts 16-864 16-
  • 865. TPM Requirements Design products that can be easily produced on existing machines Design machines for easier operation, changeover, maintenance Train and retrain workers to operate machines Purchase machines that maximize productive potential Design preventive maintenance plan spanning life of machine 16-865 16-
  • 866. 5S Scan Goal Eliminate or Correct Seiri(sort) Keep only what you need Seiton(set in order) A place for everything and everything in its place Cleaning, and looking for ways to keep clean and organized Unneeded equipment, tools, furniture; unneeded items on walls, bulletins; items blocking aisles or stacked in corners; unneeded inventory, supplies, parts; safety hazards Items not in their correct places; correct places not obvious; aisles, workstations, & equipment locations not indicated; items not put away immediately after use Floors, walls, stairs, equipment, & surfaces not clean; cleaning materials not easily accessible; lines, labels, signs broken or unclean; other cleaning problems Necessary information not visible; standards not known; checklists missing; quantities and limits not easily recognizable; items can’t be located within 30 seconds Number of workers without 5S training; number of daily 5S inspections not performed; number of personal items not stored; number of times job aids not available or up-to-date Seisou (shine) Seiketsu (standardize) Shisuke (sustain) Maintaining and monitoring the first three categories Sticking to the rules 16-866 16-
  • 867. Supplier Networks Long-term supplier contracts Synchronized production Supplier certification Mixed loads and frequent deliveries Precise delivery schedules Standardized, sequenced delivery Locating in close proximity to the customer 16-867 16-
  • 868. Benefits of Lean Production Reduced inventory Improved quality Lower costs Reduced space requirements Shorter lead time Increased productivity 16-868 16-
  • 869. Benefits of Lean Production (cont.) Greater flexibility Better relations with suppliers Simplified scheduling and control activities Increased capacity Better use of human resources More product variety 16-869 16-
  • 870. Implementing Lean Production Use lean production to finely tune an operating system Somewhat different in USA than Japan Lean production is still evolving Lean production is not for everyone 16-870 16-
  • 871. Lean Services Basic elements of lean production apply equally to services Most prevalent applications lean retailing lean banking lean health care 16-871 16-
  • 872. Leaning the Supply Chain “pulling” a smooth flow of material through a series of suppliers to support frequent replenishment orders and changes in customer demand Firms need to share information and coordinate demand forecasts, production planning, and inventory replenishment with suppliers and supplier’s suppliers throughout supply chain 16-872 16-
  • 873. Leaning the Supply Chain (cont.) Steps in Leaning the Supply Chain: Build a highly collaborative business environment Adopt the technology to support your system 16-873 16-
  • 874. Lean Six Sigma Lean and Six Sigma are natural partners for process improvement Lean Eliminates waste and creates flow More continuous improvement Six Sigma Reduces variability and enhances process capabilities Requires breakthrough improvements 16-874 16-
  • 875. Lean and the Environment Lean’s mandate to eliminate waste and operate only with those resources that are absolutely necessary aligns well with environmental initiatives Environmental waste is often an indicator of poor process design and inefficient production 16-875 16-
  • 876. EPA Recommendations Commit to eliminate environmental waste through lean implementation Recognize new improvement opportunities by incorporating environmental, heath and safety (EHS) icons and data into value stream maps Involve staff with EHS expertise in planning Find and drive out environmental wastes in specific process by using lean process-improvement tools processEmpower and enable workers to eliminate environmental wastes in their work areas 16-876 16-
  • 877. Lean Consumption Consumptions process involves locating, buying, installing, using, maintaining, repairing, and recycling. Lean Consumption seeks to: Provide customers what they want, where and when they want it Resolve customer problems quickly and completely Reduce the number of problems customers need to solve 16-877 16-
  • 878. Chapter 17 Scheduling Operations Management Roberta Russell & Bernard W. Taylor, III
  • 879. Lecture Outline Objectives in Scheduling Loading Sequencing Monitoring Advanced Planning and Scheduling Systems Theory of Constraints Employee Scheduling 17-879 17-
  • 880. What is Scheduling? Last stage of planning before production occurs Specifies when labor, equipment, and facilities are needed to produce a product or provide a service 17-880 17-
  • 881. Scheduled Operations Process Industry Linear programming EOQ with non-instantaneous nonreplenishment Mass Production Assembly line balancing Project Project -scheduling techniques (PERT, CPM) Batch Production Aggregate planning Master scheduling Material requirements planning (MRP) Capacity requirements planning (CRP) 17-881 17-
  • 882. Objectives in Scheduling Meet customer due dates Minimize job lateness Minimize response time Minimize completion time Minimize time in the system Minimize overtime Maximize machine or labor utilization Minimize idle time Minimize work-inwork-inprocess inventory 17-882 17-
  • 883. Shop Floor Control (SFC) scheduling and monitoring of day-to-day production day-toin a job shop also called production control and production activity control (PAC) usually performed by production control department Loading Check availability of material, machines, and labor Sequencing Release work orders to shop and issue dispatch lists for individual machines Monitoring Maintain progress reports on each job until it is complete 17-883 17-
  • 884. Loading Process of assigning work to limited resources Perform work with most efficient resources Use assignment method of linear programming to determine allocation 17-884 17-
  • 885. Assignment Method 1. Perform row reductions 4. If number of lines equals number of rows in matrix, then optimum subtract minimum value in each solution has been found. Make row from all other row values assignments where zeros appear 2. Perform column reductions subtract minimum value in each column from all other column values 3. Cross out all zeros in matrix use minimum number of horizontal and vertical lines Else modify matrix subtract minimum uncrossed value from all uncrossed values add it to all cells where two lines intersect other values in matrix remain unchanged 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until optimum solution is reached 17-885 17-
  • 886. Assignment Method: Example Initial Matrix Bryan Kari Noah Chris Row reduction 5 4 2 5 0 0 1 1 1 2 0 0 1 10 6 7 9 PROJECT 3 4 6 10 4 6 5 6 4 10 2 5 2 6 5 Column reduction 5 4 1 6 3 2 0 3 0 0 1 1 1 2 0 0 4 3 0 5 Cover all zeros 3 2 0 3 0 0 1 1 1 2 0 0 4 3 0 5 Number lines ≠ number of rows so modify matrix 17-886 17-
  • 887. Assignment Method: Example (cont.) Modify matrix 1 0 0 1 0 0 3 1 1 2 2 0 Cover all zeros 2 1 0 3 1 0 0 1 0 0 3 1 1 2 2 0 2 1 0 3 Number of lines = number of rows so at optimal solution PROJECT Bryan Kari Noah Chris 1 1 0 0 1 2 0 0 3 1 3 1 2 2 0 PROJECT 4 2 1 0 3 Bryan Kari Noah Chris 1 10 6 7 9 2 5 2 6 5 3 6 4 5 4 4 10 6 6 10 Project Cost = (5 + 6 + 4 + 6) X $100 = $2,100 17-887 17-
  • 888. Sequencing Prioritize jobs assigned to a resource If no order specified use first-come first-served (FCFS) Other Sequencing Rules FCFS - first-come, first-served LCFS - last come, first served DDATE - earliest due date CUSTPR - highest customer priority SETUP - similar required setups SLACK - smallest slack CR - smallest critical ratio SPT - shortest processing time LPT - longest processing time 17-888 17-
  • 889. Minimum Slack and Smallest Critical Ratio SLACK considers both work and time remaining SLACK = (due date – today’s date) – (processing time) CR recalculates sequence as processing continues and arranges information in ratio form time remaining CR = remaining work due date - today’s date = remaining processing time If CR > 1, job ahead of schedule If CR < 1, job behind schedule If CR = 1, job on schedule 17-889 17-
  • 890. Sequencing Jobs through One Process Flow time (completion time) Time for a job to flow through system Makespan Time for a group of jobs to be completed Tardiness Difference between a late job’s due date and its completion time 17-890 17-
  • 892. Simple Sequencing Rules: FCFS FCFS START PROCESSING COMPLETION SEQUENCE TIME TIME TIME DATE A B C D E Total Average 0 5 15 17 25 5 10 2 8 6 5 15 17 25 31 93 93/5 = 18.60 10 15 5 12 8 DUE TARDINESS 0 0 12 13 23 48 48/5 = 9.6 17-892 17-
  • 893. Simple Sequencing Rules: DDATE DDATE START PROCESSING COMPLETION SEQUENCE TIME TIME TIME DATE C E A D B Total Average 0 2 8 13 21 2 6 5 8 10 2 8 13 21 31 75 75/5 = 15.00 5 8 10 12 15 DUE TARDINESS 0 0 3 9 16 28 28/5 = 5.6 17-893 17-
  • 894. Simple Sequencing Rules: SLACK A(10-0) – 5 = 5 B(15-0) – 10 = 5 C(5-0) – 2 = 3 D(12-0) – 8 = 4 E(8-0) – 6 = 2 SLACK START PROCESSING COMPLETION SEQUENCE TIME TIME TIME DATE E C D A B Total Average 0 6 8 16 21 6 2 8 5 10 6 8 16 21 31 82 82/5 = 16.40 8 5 12 10 15 DUE TARDINESS 0 3 4 11 16 34 34/5 = 6.8 17-894 17-
  • 895. Simple Sequencing Rules: SPT SPT START PROCESSING COMPLETION SEQUENCE TIME TIME TIME DATE C A E D B Total Average 0 2 7 13 21 2 5 6 8 10 2 7 13 21 31 74 74/5 = 14.80 5 10 8 12 15 DUE TARDINESS 0 0 5 9 16 30 30/5 = 6 17-895 17-
  • 896. Simple Sequencing Rules: Summary RULE AVERAGE COMPLETION TIME FCFS DDATE SLACK SPT 18.60 15.00 16.40 14.80 AVERAGE TARDINESS 9.6 5.6 6.8 6.0 NO. OF JOBS TARDY 3 3 4 3 MAXIMUM TARDINESS 23 16 16 16 17-896 17-
  • 897. Sequencing Jobs Through Two Serial Process Johnson’s Rule 1. List time required to process each job at each machine. Set up a one-dimensional matrix to represent desired onesequence with # of slots equal to # of jobs. 2. Select smallest processing time at either machine. If that time is on machine 1, put the job as near to beginning of sequence as possible. 3. If smallest time occurs on machine 2, put the job as near to the end of the sequence as possible. 4. Remove job from list. 5. Repeat steps 2-4 until all slots in matrix are filled and all 2jobs are sequenced. 17-897 17-
  • 899. Johnson’s Rule (cont.) E E A 5 A D D 11 B C B Process 1 (sanding) C 20 31 38 Idle time E 5 A 15 D 23 B 30 Process 2 (painting) C 37 41 Completion time = 41 Idle time = 5+1+1+3=10 17-899 17-
  • 900. Guidelines for Selecting a Sequencing Rule 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. SPT most useful when shop is highly congested Use SLACK for periods of normal activity Use DDATE when only small tardiness values can be tolerated Use LPT if subcontracting is anticipated Use FCFS when operating at low-capacity levels lowDo not use SPT to sequence jobs that have to be assembled with other jobs at a later date 17-900 17-
  • 901. Monitoring Work package Shop paperwork that travels with a job Gantt Chart Shows both planned and completed activities against a time scale Input/Output Control Monitors the input and output from each work center 17-901 17-
  • 902. Gantt Chart Job 32B Behind schedule Facility 3 Job 23C Ahead of schedule 2 Job 11C Job 12A On schedule 1 1 Key: 2 3 4 5 6 8 Today’s Date 9 10 11 12 Days Planned activity Completed activity 17-902 17-
  • 903. Input/Output Control Input/Output Report PERIOD Planned input Actual input Deviation Planned output Actual output Deviation Backlog 1 2 3 4 65 65 70 70 75 75 75 75 30 20 10 5 TOTAL 270 0 0 300 0 0 0 17-903 17-
  • 904. Input/Output Control (cont.) Input/Output Report PERIOD Planned input Actual input Deviation Planned output Actual output Deviation Backlog 1 2 3 4 65 60 -5 75 75 -0 30 65 60 -5 75 75 -0 15 70 65 -5 75 65 -10 0 70 65 -5 75 65 -10 0 TOTAL 270 250 -20 300 280 -20 0 17-904 17-
  • 905. Advanced Planning and Scheduling Systems Infinite - assumes infinite capacity Loads without regard to capacity Then levels the load and sequences jobs Finite - assumes finite (limited) capacity Sequences jobs as part of the loading decision Resources are never loaded beyond capacity 17-905 17-
  • 906. Advanced Planning and Scheduling Systems (cont.) Advanced planning and scheduling (APS) AddAdd-ins to ERP systems ConstraintConstraint-based programming (CBP) identifies a solution space and evaluates alternatives Genetic algorithms based on natural selection properties of genetics Manufacturing execution system (MES) monitors status, usage, availability, quality 17-906 17-
  • 907. Theory of Constraints Not all resources are used evenly Concentrate on the” bottleneck” resource Synchronize flow through the bottleneck Use process and transfer batch sizes to move product through facility 17-907 17-
  • 908. Drum-Buffer-Rope Drum Bottleneck, beating to set the pace of production for the rest of the system Buffer Inventory placed in front of the bottleneck to ensure it is always kept busy Determines output or throughput of the system Rope Communication signal; tells processes upstream when they should begin production 17-908 17-
  • 909. TOC Scheduling Procedure Identify bottleneck Schedule job first whose lead time to bottleneck is less than or equal to bottleneck processing time Forward schedule bottleneck machine Backward schedule other machines to sustain bottleneck schedule Transfer in batch sizes smaller than process batch size 17-909 17-
  • 910. A B D B3 1 7 C3 2 15 D3 3 5 B2 2 3 C2 1 10 D2 2 8 B1 1 5 Synchronous Manufacturing C C1 3 2 D1 3 10 Key: i ij k l Item i Operation j of item i performed at machine center k takes l minutes to process 17-910 17-
  • 911. Synchronous Manufacturing (cont.) Demand = 100 A’s Machine setup time = 60 minutes MACHINE 1 MACHINE 2 MACHINE 3 B1 B3 C2 Sum 5 7 10 22 B2 C3 D2 3 15 8 26* C1 D3 D1 2 5 10 17 * Bottleneck 17-911 17-
  • 912. Synchronous Manufacturing (cont.) Setup Machine 1 C2 Setup B1 2 B3 1562 1002 2322 Idle Setup Machine 2 C3 B2 1512 12 Machine 3 Setup C1 0 200 Setup D2 1872 2732 Setup D1 Idle 1260 D3 1940 Completion time 2737 17-912 17-
  • 913. Employee Scheduling Labor is very flexible resource Scheduling workforce is complicated, repetitive task Assignment method can be used Heuristics are commonly used 17-913 17-
  • 914. Employee Scheduling Heuristic 1. Let N = no. of workers available Di = demand for workers on day i X = day working O = day off 2. Assign the first N - D1 workers day 1 off. Assign the next N - D2 workers day 2 off. Continue in a similar manner until all days are have been scheduled 3. If number of workdays for full time employee < 5, assign remaining workdays so consecutive days off are possible 4. Assign any remaining work to part-time employees part5. If consecutive days off are desired, consider switching schedules among days with the same demand requirements 17-914 17-
  • 915. Employee Scheduling DAY OF WEEK WORKERS REQUIRED M T W MIN NO. OF 3 3 4 TH F SA SU 3 4 5 3 Taylor Smith Simpson Allen Dickerson 17-915 17-
  • 916. Employee Scheduling (cont.) DAY OF WEEK WORKERS REQUIRED Taylor Smith Simpson Allen Dickerson M T W MIN NO. OF 3 3 4 O O X X X X X O O X X X X X O TH F SA SU 3 4 5 3 O O X X X X X O X X X X X X X X X X O O Completed schedule satisfies requirements but has no consecutive days off 17-916 17-
  • 917. Employee Scheduling (cont.) DAY OF WEEK WORKERS REQUIRED Taylor Smith Simpson Allen Dickerson M T W MIN NO. OF 3 3 4 O O X X X O O X X X X X O X X TH F SA SU 3 4 5 3 X X O O X X X X X O X X X X X X X X O O Revised schedule satisfies requirements with consecutive days off for most employees 17-917 17-
  • 918. Automated Scheduling Systems Staff Scheduling Schedule Bidding Schedule Optimization 17-918 17-